Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
CORNELL
UNIVERSITY LIBRARY
MATHEMATICS
QA
V.2
""'""*">'
455.D95"'"
""'"^
The
tine
original of
tliis
book
is in
restrictions in
text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924001085392
MACMILLAN AND
LONDON
CO., Limited
THE MACMILLAN
A COURSE OF
PLANE GEOMETRY
FOR
ADVANCED STUDENTS
PART
II.
KY
CLEMENT
V.
DURELL,
M.A.
MACMILLAN AND
ST.
CO.,
LIMITED
GLASGOW PRINTED AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. BY ROBERT MACLEHOSE AND CO. LTD.
:
PREFACE
'The
first
dealt
with
the geometry of the straight line and circle; the present volume
contains a
of the conic.
The author
ception which
higher geometry
is
and
generality of con-
more
course of geometrical
based on the focus-directrix definition and developed by Euclidean methods, provides excellent practice in rider-work;
may
gain from
it
a .systematic knowledge
projective treatment
new
ideas.
On
the other
hand a
anything
fertile
he
transition
as
abrupt and
as
algebra to
the
calculus.
There are
of absorbing
constant surprises,
interest, and principles which, by the generality of their application and the variety of their expression, cannot fail to fascinate the reader and incite him to investigate their developments for himself. Experience proves incontestably that analytical methods frequently
elucidate
difficult
geometrical conceptions.
The
theory
of ideal
and
its
application to
homography and
involution,
the principles
of conical projection are undoubtedly illuminated by a joint use of geometry and analysis.
much
simplicity
is
secured,
treatment
has
been
entirely
omitted in the
vi
PREFACE
geometrical For, although the construction of a interest, yet the is of remarkable theoretical
following pages.
theory of imaginaries
intrinsic difficulties
render
The
subject-matter has projection for the reader to understand the principles of general a stage as possible; not real and imaginary elements at as early
him with an invaluable weapon for problems, but also because, to a greater attacking a large class of extent than in the case of inversion and reciprocation, it enables
only
because
it
furnishes
him
is
both
stimulating
and
I.,
instructive.
As
or
in Part
the
number
is
appended
far
to each
theorem
group of theorems
will
very considerable,
more of course
If
than
be
student.
however the
book is being used with a class, the significance of a particular theorem can frequently be emphasised by taking a sequence of dependent riders very rapidly on the black-board, asking for
suggestions,
applications
and so working through half a dozen or more simple This certainly forms a useful in a few minutes.
variation to the slow progress made when the student works alone and unaided, although it cannot be regarded as a substitute; and in order that such a method may be rendered possible, an ample
supply of examples
is
essential.
The
to
school purposes,
a compact and elementary form for and has been modified in a variety of ways suggested by experience; but, at the same time, the author is profoundly conscious of all that he owes both to friends and Those who are acquainted with Chasles' powerful and books.
present
original text-books
will
And
is
have
Whitehead;
the
first
chapter
has
criticised
by
PRE I^CE
Mr.
C.
vii
Godfrey and
Mr.
H. W. Richmond;
and
Mr. A.
E.
soHd geometry.
The arduous
M. many improvements
and the table of contents and index have by Mr. G. A. Herman. The Editor of the Educational Times has courteously authorised the use of problems which have appeared in the columns of that journal and the Syndics and
style
;
been
constructed
of the Cambridge University Press and the Clarendon Press have kindly accorded their permission for the inclusion of questions set
in recent College
and University
papers.
Winchester,
January,
1
9 10.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
The Principle of Continuity
Points and Lines
I
Angles
.......
: .
.
4
8
The
Isotropic Lines
...
.
.10
.11
. .
14
The Line at
Infinity
.18
24
. .
-25
CHAPTER H
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
Definitions
30
31
34
35
36
38
CONTENTS
PAGE
....
w.r.t.
. .
:
Central Properties Practical Solid Geometry Plans and Elev.^tions Secondary Projections Inclination of Lines and Planes Horizontal Projection The Index System
.
.
41 .42
-5'
53
54
.
...
. .
60
CHAPTER
Historical Note
Definitions
. .
III
CONICAL PROJECTION
.
...
...
65
Points .-^nd Lines Analytical Treatment of Projection The Conic as the Projection of the Circle
.
.......
.
66
.66 .76
78
Areal Coordinates
.82
CHAPTER
Historical Note
IV
THE CONIC
7 88
The Conic
Lines
the Projection of the Circle Poles and Polars w.r.t. the Conic Conjugate Points and
as
.
.
....
.
90
92
95
J
Note on Method Chasles' Theorem Central Properties Diameters The Parabola Conic touching the Line at Infinity The Hyperbola Conic having two real Asymptotes The Quadrangle and Quadrilateral Cross Ratio Theorems
....
00
104 107
no
116
CONTENTS
xi
CHAPTER V
GENERAL PROJECTION
Historical Note
... ...
PAGE
.
123
Infinity
.
.124
133
.
.
Focus-Directrix Property,
SP^e.PM
.136
. .
140
.141
CHAPTER
Historical Note
Pascal's
VI
147
...
. .
.
-153 -157
160
.
163
.166
CHAPTER VH
RECIPROCATION
Historical Note
Definition
...
.
-'71
171
173
w.r.t.
a Conic
is
a Conic
173
174
174
xii
CONTENTS
PAGE
Point Reciprocation
'79
...
.
is
a Circle i8o
i88
.192
199
...
CHAPTER
Historical Note
VIII
The Double Points Analytical Treatment of Homographic Pencils The Double Rays Geometrical Treatment of Homographic Ranges and
.
214
Pencils
216
225
232
CHAPTER
IX
CHAPTER X
INVOLUTION RANGES AND PENCILS
Historical Note
262
262
263
CONTENTS
Analytical Treatment
:
xiii
...
. . . .
page
265
265
...
. .
....
.
...
274
279
Constructions
...
.
.281
.
.
283
287
Pencils in Involution
.288
Orthogonal Involution 289 Range or Pencil in Involution Projects into a Range or Pencil in Involution .291
.
. .
CHAPTER
Ranges of Points on a Conic
XI
xiv
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
XII
MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES
PACE
332
335
....
. .
.
...
.
337
342
345
. .
3Si
INDEX
355
CHAPTER
I.
methods
to geometrical
research by
of view,
new
field
to
consolidated in
number of apparently dissimilar theorems and so method and enunciation the isolated achievements
Moreover it supplied a sound bstsis for by expressing in obtrusive analytical terms the fundamental laws governing the structure of lines and curves.
further research,
of independent thinkers.
In
order
to
enunciate
analytical
theorems with
it
the
utmost
is
The
notion of
integers,
was
for
and
finally
ax = b;
where
a,
b,
ax-\-h = o;
ax^
= b;
{ax ^
hf^
+ c= o
c represent
it
With
is
this
notion of number,
to formulate
satisfied
by n numbers.
This instance serves
generalisations
to
illustrate
that
valuable
are
frequently
rendered possible
by the removal
of
certain
(possibly
unconscious)
previously imposed.
inadmissible,
it
Thus,
if
is
it
no longer
a root.
D.G.
II.
Now
may be urged
A
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
2,
[CH.
3,
|, v/J,
such as 'J^s
to
call
is
wholly unintelligible.
first
The
reason
why we
tend
numbers of the
imaginary or impossible,
is almost entirely due to the fact that accustomed to represent graphically the former type, and we are do not readily associate any graphical connection with the latter
type.
Anyone by drawing
i
inches, finds
it
easy to accept
of complex
The
graphical
representation
is
less familiar;
and con-
presented
more considerable.
ance
is
But, in
wholly immaterial.
The
number does
not
depend on whether or not it can be represented under some geometrical form. It may be easier to understand its nature as
it
is
its
properties
its
if
it
is
capable of
graphical representation.
meaning its organism depend solely on the laws and operations to which it is subject. Now complex numbers obey the same fundamental laws of and may therefore enter with equal Algebra as real numbers If the result of any sequence freedom into analytical processes.
But
its
use and
of such processes
is
then
its
valid,
even
if
any
For
since
the process
It is
is
valid analytically,
its
depiction.
by borrowing from analysis notions which are incapable of graphical This procedure is usually referred to as the Principle
of Continuity.*
The germ
who
but formed a
continuous chain, the ellipse passing into the parabola, and the
parabola into the hyperbola.
The
first
given by Boscovich (1711-1787), in what was intended to form an elementary school text-book on conic sections. But it was
Poncelet's (1788-1867) great discovery of the "circular points at
infinity "
*
and
Much
Conies.
I.]
in all
this principle.
It is
The
at the
a:co&a+^sina=/,
cuts the
circle
x^->ry^
= a''
real if
coincident if/
complex if/>a.
By making use
meets every
that points
j)'
of the
enlarged
is
two
"points.''
by removing a
must be real. Any pair of real numbers, e.g. a; = 3, = 4, can be represented graphically by the position of a point referred to real coordinate axes, and so can be associated and identified geometrically with a point. If either or both the numbers
of a given pair are complex, for the sake of continuity of expression,
the pair
is
still
an imaginary point,
The
is
importance
which
is
the
locus of
" points " at distance a from the origin, does not merely
all
points which
a,
b,
c are
the
straight
line
associated
with
equation.
or
e.g.
A
line
line
may
one
no points
the
3),
Capable
+j/ =
of
being
represented
on paper;
i-2+\/-i(j'-3) =
I
(2,
and
the line
a;
V-
thus possible
in
ito
But
addition
,to this, it
may
applies
For example,
if
two
PLANE GEOMETRY
it
[CH.
is
w.r.t.
a straight
analytical
the
common
chord.
This
is
expressible
in
terms,
analytical
of whether
the points
of intersection
or
imaginary,
it
must be true
is
in general.
in,
In other words,
involved
may
order
;
to
generalise
the
range of application
of geometrical
theorems
and
this is referred to
of Continuity.
is
The
another feature of
line
principle,
on Kepler's
develop
it
of thought;
but
to
here.
+v/-i
/.
Definitions.
(i)
Any
pair of
numbers,
real or
repre-
Any
satisfy the
equation ax
real or
numbers,
+ fy + = o, where a, b, c are any constant complex, are said to constitute a Straight Line
t:
in a given plane.
In general,
if
any or
all
the constants
a,
b,
real.
{a
+ id,
b+
ib')
(a
id, b
- ill),
imaginary points.
(4) If the constant coefficients in the equations of
two
lines are
i.e.
{a
+ id)x+{b+ib')y+c+ic^ = 0;
lines are
called conjugate^
lines.
it
will
{i.e.
equationSi
*The power
defined
as
I.]
follows that
any two
+ l>^y +
c-^
= o;
and
the
The apparent
exception, where
later.
J = -^,
i.e.
Does a
Does an imaginary
Is
it
line contain
real points?
possible to
many
Is
it
possible to
lines
through
THEOREM
Two
Any two
where
a,
1.
+ b'y -V c) = o
c
ax + by + c~
two
t{a'x
+ b'y + ^) = o,
a,
b',
denote
real constants.
These meet
real equations
ax-\-by \-c-=<:i;
a'x
+ b'y + c' = 0,
q.e.d.
which
"
is
necessarily real.
THEOREM
conjugate imaginary points
lie
2.
Two
on a
real line.
The proof is left to the reader. "Take {x^^ + ix^, yi + iy^; {x.^ ix.2, y^-iy^
THEOREM
Any
This
3.
Every imaginary line contains one and only one real point.
imaginary line can be represented by
satisfied
by the pair of
real values of x,
given by
ax + by + c=o;
.'.
a'x
+ b'y + c' = o.
equations
it
Further,
the
two
ax + by + c=o;
q.e.d.
satisfied.
.'.
there
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
Every imaginary point
lies
4.
real line.
The proof
is
left to
the reader.
THEOKEM
Every
real line contains
5.
points,
an imaginary point.
the line
is
Hence
J'j
the
number
of imaginary points on
unlimited.
let
Further,
{x^
a,
+ ix2,
c
ax-^
+ y'g) be one
imaginary
point
on
ax + dy + c=o;
b,
Then
.'.
ax-^-\rby-^^-c=o
:.
+ byi + c+ i{ax^ \-by^ = o\ and ax2 + by2 = o; ax^ + by^+c- i(ax^ + by^ = o
;
.'.
the point
(x-^
- ix^,
y-^
- iy^ also
lies
on the
line
pairs.
.'.
all
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
6.
Through every real point there pass an unlimited number of imaginary lines; and these occur in conjugate pairs.
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
THEOREM
If
7.
\
two
lines
/j,
imaginary lines
l{,
at at
a point P, and
,
if
the conjugate
|
then
imaginary points.
To
If
we
this
l^.
we now
write
-i
for
4',
i in
work,
we have the
by writing
solution
giving
P.
Hence
the coordinates of
-/
for
i.
points,
q.e.d.
I.]
THEOREM
(i)
8.
real line
meets a
real conic in
real
or conjugate imaginaries.
(2)
real,
Two
all
or two real
imaginaries,
or two pairs of
conjugate imaginaries.
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
quartic,
THEOREM
Two
of conjugate imaginary points.
9.
The proof
5. 6.
7.
is
left
to the reader.
2. 4. 6.
8. 9.
8. 9.
+ z";
+ 32,
3-2Z.
real point
Find the
on the
line (2
+ y)x + (3-2z)y=&-i.
two
pairs of conjugate
is real.
two of the vertices of a quadrangle are real points, and if the 13. other two are conjugate imaginaries, prove that one vertex and the
opposite side only, of the diagonal point triangle are real.
14.
15.
Enunciate and prove the dual of Ex. Enunciate and prove the dual of Ex.
12.
13.
16. A quadrilateral is formed by drawing the tangents from two conjugate imaginary points to a given real conic, and the determine which points and lines in the diagonals are drawn figure are real, and which are conjugate imaginaries.
:
17. 18.
What does the equation x'^+j'^=o represent? What do the equations (l) j;2+y-6jr-8y + 2l=o; (2) ;i;2+y-6;tr-8j/ + 2S=o x^+y^-6x-Sy+2g=o; (3)
?
represent
PLANE GEOMETRY
19.
[CH.
line
is
a.
variable
prove
real
P
c,^
w.r.t.
a given
If the
is
straight
lines
y = m^x + fj
Buj^
if
y = m^x +
either
are both
real,
it
is
represented
by
'
^^i
I
~ ^2,
imaginary, the
+ m^m^
it
term
'
angle
ceases to
In order to secure
continuity of statement,
definition
for this
therefore convenient to
this
make some
which
will
apply to
case.
The
essential condition,
purpose, is that there should be no analytical distinction between the two meanings ascribed to the word angle.' But it
'
is
lead
to
geometrical
interpretations
which
contrary
to
recognised
general theorems.
Definition.
If either or both the lines
y = tn^x + c,
jc
= m^ +
c^
are imaginary,
the expression
+ m-^m^
L^^
I
?-
is
lines,
of either of
the
We
will first
Suppose that
^
T
+ m-^m^
^^k
for
- km^-
+ m^ = o
m-^,
is
of the
first
degree
and
is
satisfied
by two values of
the coefificient of Wj
zero
.'.
- km^ = o
or
and
k + m^^o;
Hence,
for all
if
m^= i
and
k=+i.
is
equal to +
/'
values of m^.
But
it
takes different
m-^.
The
last definition
may
Definition.
If either or both the lines
y^m^x + c^^, y = m^ + c^
are imaginary,
the expression
^i ~ ^^
is
I.]
9
is
equal
I.
According then to our definition, the term 'angle' must not be applied to the case where either Of the lines is of the form
J'=
that
.ix->rC.
is
it
It
easy to see
is
why
this
Suppose
third line
lines
angles in the
same sense {i.e. angles whose tangents are equal) with a OA, then we say that the lines OP, coincide.
OF
,.
But
this
ceases to be true
if
the line
OA
-.
is
of the form
the
tangent of the
.
'angle" between
y = mx + d,
.
appear to be
m-i =
.
-i(i+mi)
^
=-t,
which
does
on the value of m.
In other words,
with the lines
it is
y=
tx + c.
is
is
based on the
such import-
It is of
ance to understand
If the lines
this, that it is
somewhat
example
with the line
6^^
y = m.yX,
tan
then
y = m^, y = m^x make angles ^jj, ^^3 y = m^x makes with y = m^x an angle
tan
a
d-.~
given by
,
p = ^^
tan^,o
1
tan +^
is
unless
m= t, m
,
'
which
case
the last
expression
indeterminate.
By
definition,
tan
^ - tan
5,,
= ^
( I
+ m^.^
+ m^m.^
- m-^m^ - m.^m^
and
-I-
m.^
(l+OT2l)(l+W3Wi)
(l+OT2^3)(l+OTl^)
I
-(.
m^.^ ( I + wZgWj)
-
'
tan ^12
I
+ tan
f/jj
unless
+ m-^ = o.
lo If
PLANE GEOMETRY
2',
[CH.
determinate.
limit,
the expression becomes inhowever i+m-^ = o or m-^ = [The case where tan 6^^ or tan d^^ increases without i.e. i+m^m^^^o or i+mgm^^o has been neglected: but;
of
the
it
proviso,
is
introduced
that
all
the
definition,
were omitted.
Now
true,
essential
general
formulae
should
remain
independently of whether
And therefore, just any of the quantities are real or complex. because the notion of an angle is being generalised to secure
continuity between the domains of
it
'
real
'
and imaginary
'
'
elements,
is
the -axis,
^ = 0,
y = mx + c makes
an angle B with
it,
given by
tan V =
1
+mxo
m o = m.
line
a;-axis, if
It
is
y= ix + c would
an angle
supposition,
sides are
i,
make
with the
same
false
is
\/i -|-z2
= \/i - i = 0.
the reader of
if
This graphical
made
to attach a
meaning
to the
Definition.
The
is
lines
J=
z':*: -t-
This name
due
20.
to Laguerre.
j/
= z>is
unaltered
when
the
that the ordinary formula for the distance between two holds good, prove that the distance between any two points on the line ^ = z;r is zero. Interpret this geometrically.
21.
Assuming
still
real points
22.
If tan Q
i,
is still
vahd,
if
is
the
I.]
ii
angles
(i?.^.
But
the present
purpose
it
is
unnecessary to
enter into
further
details.
CROSS EATIO.
Let
angle
/j, /j, /g,
4 be
with
6-^^
the
4 makes
etc.
Then
is
lines
sin e^^
sm
^.
6I32
(Part
^
I.,
'
p.
10^.) ^ '
And
If
if this
expression
necessary to
= - i. make a new
first
ratio as applied to
It
imaginary lines
sight
might appear at
by means of the angular expression, which is But this would have the the characteristic for four real lines. extreme inconvenience of excluding the isotropic lines from the idea
of a pencil.
lines are
respectively,
referred to their
y - m-^x = o
Then
tan 6 12"
y-
m^pc
=o
.
y - m^x = o
n
y- nii^x = o.
m^ m-.
m- m,
..
= 7^
K)^
^,
case.
which
is
now
in a
Definition.
If four
concurrent
lines,
by
_v
ig
above)
and
if
the value
of'
the
:
cross ratio
is
i,
are said to
be harmonically conjugate to each other. If all the lines are real, the above form of the cross
ratio
is
12
PLANE GEOMETRY
:
[CH.
and
this equivalenc&;
remains,
when any
or
all
the
lines are
imaginary, provided
that
none of the
generalised
metrical
properties
of
would be necessary
first
of
all to
define what
It
meant by the length of the line joining two imaginary points. would then be easy to deduce the usual theorems. But this
be
left to
will
the reader.
24. Formulate a definition for the length of the imaginary points. What proviso should be inserted?
two
25.
The
coordinates of A, B,
C are
- 2,
22) respectively
prove that
{AB + ACY
is
less
analytical formulae.
26.
What
is
constant,
if
is
constant.
THEOREM
If a is the angle
ratio
10.
[Laguerre's Theorem.]
lines
between the
4-
of the
is
pencil formed
by the
'
y=
ix,
equal to cos 2a
Q,
sin 2a or exp(2a.i).
Let
m = tan
m' = tan
6',
so that a = d -ff.
The
cross ratio
d' d'
zsin &)
_ cos(g -
6')
+ zsin(g -
6')
zsin
6^)
(cos
+ isin
0)
cos(^- e')-zsin(6-6')
Q.E.D.
a=-,
= -
i.
This theorem
may now be
stated geometrically,
by using terms
I.J
13
THEOSEM
(i)
11.
Any
variable
form with the isotropic lines a pencil of constant cross ratio. (3) If two lines are harmonically conjugate to the isotropic lines,
they must be perpendicular to each other.
(4) If a variable pair of straight lines
lines
ratio,
they must
make
a constant angle
THEOREM
The
and
isotropic lines are the only
12.
lines
y = mx, y = nix
y = lx, y = I'x.
y= Xx, y = /ix.
ij.)
By
definition,
(m - A) (ni .'.
jx)-V
(m - \){m-
= o;
:.
= {X + fj.)(m-j, smce mm
Similarly,
2(X/i-
l)
= (A + /l)(/-Im
.'.
= {X + ij){m~ l){lm+i);
If
l=m,
/=
If
= m',
X-{-fjL
.-.
.'.
is
It is owing to these properties, and the additional fact that the value of a cross ratio is unaffected by any homographic transformation,
to
lines
play so
14
PLANE GEOMETRY
TRANSFORMATION.
It is
[CH.
known property
by
another
effecting
property, apparently of
an
Two
been
examples of
this
process
of
transformation
have already
met
It
with.
I., it
pp.
is
of Duality.
To any
point
of the
:
first
system
to any
and
is
of
the
exists
what
called
a one-to-one or
correspondence.
Another method of transformation was exhibited by the process of Inversion. In this case (see p. 21), to any point A of the
first
and conversely.
y) ; (f, rf) are two corresponding points two systems, the transformation is effected by
Analytically,
(x,
where ^
is
We
shall
now
This
is
the latter
by the method of orthogonal and conical projection, of which is one of the chief subjects of discussion in
C,
consisting
of points,
lines,
or
curves
outside
and
to all
on the
lines
or curves of C.
These
is
lines,
radiating from
lines,
C.
:
Then C"
said to
be formed from
by conical
pro-
jection
and
in
is
Now
:
suppose
then, owing been generated from C, there exists a one-to-one correspondence between C and ; to every point and
way
which
C are C has
I.J
ij
line
there
respectively of C",
and conversely.
Definition.
Any
that
line of one correspond to one and only one and line respectively of the other, and conversely, is called a tomographic transformation.
point
To
Let
transformation.
(x,
and
let
(f, 17)
y) be the coordinates of a point A in the first system in be the coordinates of the corresponding point
required to express
since
f,
ij
Now,
the correspondence
expressions
cannot
contain
any radicals
reducing
them
to
common
where
f-^,
f^,
4'
loss of generality,
we may
is
To any
straight line
by hypothesis.
each must
fit
^ have no common
b^y + c^ my + n'
factor,
be linear
in x,
.
y
a-^x -^
a^ + b^y + c^
^~
Ix
^~
And
to
it
Ix +
+ my + n'
in terms of |,
1?,
is
that
any
and only
one
.
system.
is
The above
expression
letters
therefore
b-^,
c-^,
the
a^,
b^,
general
c^,
I,
transformation
required:
and the
Oj,
m, n represent
q.e.d.
real or imaginary.
assumed thatyi,_^,
<t>
i6
PLANE GEOMETRY
made
to
lines,
[CH.
any four
subject to the
same conditions.
13.
THEOREM
The
cross ratio of
in value
lines is unaltered
Take the
of the
^,
ri
system
maybe
written:
'rj
= m^^,
ri
= m2^,
"^i)
line
corresponding to
m-fi-^x
which
is
parallel to r
= -
~ x = M,x,
say.
Then
M.-M^^^-f^^-'^P^
{b^-m^b^ib^^-m^^)' ^jn,-m,){m,-m^^ reduces at once to
Q.E.D.
:.
L$^iK^4Jl^s)
Corollary.
If four lines
^
form a harmonic pencil, the four corresponding
^
lines
also form a
harmonic
pencil.
THEOREM
The
in
14.
is
unaltered
The
pencil
is
having
this
range
as
a section
Theorem
13.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
The degree
formation.
15.
of a curve
is
be of degree
n.
Then any
.'.
curve
.'.
r r
at the
is
corresponding n points.
q.e.d.
of degree n.
I.J
17
THEOREM
The
class of a
16.
curve
{i.e.
the
number
is
to the curve)
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
will
51).
of establishing a
correspondence,
is
a curve which
homographically related to a
THEOREM
Any
conic
is
17.
of degree
2,
it
follows,
either
from Theorem 15 or by direct substitution, that the equation of any conic can be written in the form
ax^
29.
30.
2jy
+ c=o.
q.e.d.
Prove Theorem
general three
(finite)
self-
of Ex. 30,
how many
straight
lines
are there,
the points
(o,
i),
(o,
o),
(o,
i),
;
(3,
o),
12)
correspond respectively to
(o, o),
i)
find the
34.
relation connecting
;
two systems
:
(o, i)
(2,
o) as self-corresponding
lines joining
If the
homographic
relation
g= ^_^_^^j
f.
x+2/y-i
,
^'^
2x-y+i
jr-h2j/-H
'
P^'^
to
ij) system parallel to ^-t-2iy = o correspond system which pass through the point (-^, -f).
of the general homographic relation, prove of parallel lines in the (^, -q) system corresponds to that any class a class of concurrent lines in the (x, y) system: and that the
36.
i8
PLANE GEOMETRY
37.
[CH.
^=
= ~^
transforms
the parabola
38.
into a circle.
p,
^=^ + 0'
into a circle.
39. If the homographic relation is ^ = a,.i +(5,7 + fi prove that parallel lines correspond to parallel lines.
40.
7)
= a.,x + b^y-\-c,^,
What
make
y2
,,2
^-2
(1) ^ '
'-,
a-
77,= + b' l,
and
.'
(2)
a''
-^-T2=i 0^
correspond to the
circle ^^
1/-
= c^
science,
it
i.s
of primary
meanings of
precision.
pretations,
It
is
with
absolute
A
is
term which
more than
desirable
likely to at
this
error.
therefore
is
consider
what precise
meaning
write
to
To
say that
infinity is a
number
is
down,
a manifest con-
tradiction to imagine a
number which
is
larger than
is
any number
infinity
true
that
not a number.
Consider a series of points A^
A-^,
Ao,
...
A,
...
line,
it
is
clear that
it is
is
and accordingly
infinite.
said
number
of points
is
unlimited or
The word
If
"infinite'' is here
we count,
Hence,
number
completed and
number
of pages,
but
line,
I.J
19
processes.
is
possible to
name
number
is
N'
sufficiently large
case
400),
completed before arriving at JV: while if the process is infinite, no matter what number be named, a stage in the counting will arise which exceeds N'. This, then, gives a precise sense to the word
"infinite" as
illustrating
it
It
is
worth while
"If n tends to become infinite, then Jn tends to become infinite." This is an abbreviated form of saying that, whatever number be named,
Consider the statement:
that
\J}t
>
N.
It
is
the
is
important.
to choose
number
JV,
and
afterIf,
wards
it lies
>
JV.
And this statement may be written more if -> co then Mr. Bromwich, in the form \/-*oo, where 00* stands for "infinity." The reader is. however,
Jn tends to infinity.
briefly,
following
if
= oo,
then
\/??
= oo,
for
it
is
a bare self-contradiction to
Consider
now
^
Ix
+ my -^ n
''
Ix +
my + n
To any point ^.in the {x, y) system, there corresponds one and only one point a in the (^, y}) system, provided that A does not As the point A tends to any point lie on the line lx-\-my + n = o.
of this line, the corresponding values of
f,
rj
and when
actually falls
on
this
this
line,
^,
the a
two systems
is
marred by
figure.
this
that
is
there
exists
which there
no corresponding
it
To
is
desirable to eradicate
exceptional case.
This
is
done by
in-
venting a line which will be called the "ideal line" or the "line This line is at infinity," and adding this to the (f, -q) system.
essentially fictitious
representation.
It
at
*The symbol
00
is
Felsted and Cambridge, and afterwards became Savilian Professor of Geometry He was also the first to introduce negative indices into the theory at Oxford.
of Algebra.
20
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
created
solely
for
[CH.
the
purpose of corresponding
to
the
line
Ix +
possesses only such properties as are consequent from this correspondence. The name " line at infinity " is indeed
misleading, for (i)
(2) infinity is
it
my + = o and
is
not a line at
all in
Further,
we conceive a
by the
that they
line Ix
fulfil
+ my + = o.
relations of the form
we
X and y
we obtain
precisely,
it
now
appears that
no
A^
+ /i7; + v = o
line
in the
it
(^,
is
y) system which corresponds to the line rj) system. Hence, in order to complete
necessary to add to the
is
the correspondence,
fictitious
which as before
called the
"line at infinity."
By
correspondence y) system
corre-
now
now
which meet
at a point
on the
line lx
+ my + n = o.
>?)
They
spond
finite
to a system
of lines
in the (^,
since
it
i.e. to a system of parallel lines. But corresponds to a single ideal point a on the line at infinity, follows that each of a system of parallel lines contains the same
point of intersection,
ideal point.
point, since
And
its
further,
no
line
ideal
with Ix
my +
corresponding line has only one point of intersection n = o. Therefore every class of parallel lines deter(ideal) point, just as every class of
(finite) point.
mines a unique
concurrent
lines
determines a unique
point they determine.
may be
Now
therefore meaningit
:
for
it
is,
so to
possible directions.
may be noted
is
in
anal)sis
The
point
based, tacitly assume a Euclidean axiom of parallelism. statement that every line contains one and only one ideal.
is
merely an
alternative
mode
of expression
of Playfair's
I.J
21
axiom.
is
as
in
non-Euclidean geometry,
this
is
discarded,
et'i/ier
it
one or
Summarising
is
this
discussion,
we conclude
homographic transformations.
corresponds homographically
the fact that
it
it
to
involves
meets
every other straight line in one and only one (ideal) point.
it
And
lies at infinity,
it
in
lies
it
position.
Lastly,
of direction, and
representation.
An
interesting
example of the necessity for care in working with We propose is supplied by Inversion.
Fig.
I.
to consider
circle
is,
when
the centre of
inversion
lies
on Z.
if Z^, F^, -P^, are a series of the centre of inversion, the inverse points on a straight line /, parallel to the tangent at O on / at is very close to O, then /) lies If
From a
geometrical standpoint,
if
points on L, and
is
Pv A. A.
(Part"
I.,
'ie
p.
135).
a great distance
from
and as F tends
to
O, the line
0F
then,
tends to assume
to Z.
If,
we regard
PLANE GEOMETRY
the limit
it
[CH.
when
/"-* O,
is
/.
Consequently
/,
is
together
on
/.
is
circle,
as
tends to L.
lies
It
the limit
line
when O
on Z, the
In
this
inverse figure
is
way we have two distinct interpretations of what the is this really means that our definition of inversion
:
Fig.
Analytically,
easily seen to
the
equations
of the
inversion-transformation
^iy
are
be
^
be solved without
^2-^
a;2-|-y
n-x'^
+y^
these equations can
^^
+ r]^=\=o,
y,
x and
and give
tion,
With these restrictions, the equations always admit of interpretaand supply a correspondence which is always (i, i). But if
may be
meaningless
or cease to give a
(i, i)
correspondence.
.sa4
l.J
23
Now
the value of the process of inversion depends largely on
it
is
in general
(i, i).
it
is
If,
have a
common
-point.
known
to
have
common
point
h, it is
had as a
common
this
argument would
H^, H^.
It is therefore
inversion as follows
"The
process of inversion
'^
is
^=^^f^v
origin."
It
^^
is
applied
to
points
of
the
x,
plane,
excluding the line at infinity and the isotropic lines through the
follows from this definition that the inverse of a circle, w.r.t.
it,
a point on
omitted.
The advantage
fallacious
of this proviso
is
the point
/j,
4, which we
know
common
point
at infinity,
Therefore
lines,
which
41.
is
absurd.
is
given by
C-j,2+y n ^2+y
where k
42.
is
Consider the
of the
inversion transformation,
when the
given by
inverse of
w.r.t.
the pair of
isotropic
lines,
the origin?
is
homographic transformation
^
defined by
1
^~
determine the line
at infinity in the x,
in
2x-y-V\
x+y
i,
1?
'
^^
x + 2y-
x+y
corresponds to the line
the
plane, which
plane.
24
45.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
Determine the general homographic transformation, such that to the lines at infinity are x=o and ^ = o.
find
With the notation of the general homographic transformation, the condition that rj = W]f and 7j = ;2^ correspond to parallel lines
.t",
in the
plane.
47. Determine the general homographic transformation, such that isotropic lines through the origin correspond to isotropic lines through
x+y=
Find
the
equation of
the
conic,
corresponding
to
the circle
^-'
^-'
OX,
OY
x
he.
(-.-). where
i.
x, y, z are
relation
+y + z=
Fig.
3.
To
every position of
z.
P there
for X, y,
Any
straight line
of the form
af-j +^(- j + ^ = o
parallel
lines
= q.
by
Any two
can
be represented
y-mx =
c.^z;
y - mx = c^z. To obtain
tion,
we
have, by subtrac-
(^1-^2)2 =
all
or z =
o.
Hence
=o
we
therefore
may be regarded
as the ecLuation
I.]
2C
circle
can be written
in the
line z
= o where
x^ ^y^
=o
or
j = ix.
the
Hence
pomts,
.
every circle
cuts
I
same
twO'
VIZ.
X
I
= -^ =
2
z -
I
o),
= o: smce x+y=i.
and
will
49.
in
is
used
in
speaking
THEOREM
Two
the circular points at infinity.
18.
Take the
^... ^^
origin at their
w
....^
common
......
,
centre.
_L
l;2
/^2
CI
{x^
-{y''
o'z^
\
^O = o.
'
x^ +_y2
z^
_ Q^ = o.
y = ^i ~
.,
= o:
i.e.
at
w'.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
If
19.
concentric-
circles,
the two conies must have double contact with each other.
adjacent points
curves,
other.
hence,
if
other,
any twO'
must
also
touch each
i8.
The theorem
Theorem
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
20.
The equation
ax"^
2fyz
+ cz^ = o. [Theorem
o.
17]:
26
PLANE GEOMETRY
Therefore, by hypothesis, the points
[CH.
axare identical;
x-
+j)'-
= O) \ oJ
.".
circle.
q.e.d.
Although the
terms,
is
it
last
must be clearly understood that such geometrical language employed merely as a convenient means of expressing the result
And
it
is
only possible to
initially that
is
make
if it is
agreed
the terms
attached to them
The
and suggestive
interpretation,
It
by a geometrical
a definite
i.e.
channel,
of an analytical phenomenon.
expresses
by an
equation,
viz.
and conversely, if an equation is of the second + o xy as its leading terms, it must represent
.
a
is
circle.
at
But while it is convenient to generalise our notation, it the same time necessary to avoid making other uses of this
chief analytical properties of circular points
The
lines
and
isotropic
have
to
been
already
indicated.
:
geometry
rests
on two
facts
can be
made
(2)
correspond homographically to
The
latter
we
shall
now proceed
THEOREM
To
21.
B be the given
points.
Choose the
(/
b),
(
j(/-axis
so as to bisect
AB
at right angles.
The
coordinates of A,
are
-/
b) respectively.
I.]
27
line at
y^b
is,
by hypothesis,
to correspond to the
infinity
^^
y-b
V
'
'
J^b
'
"-iX
+ IS^y + y^
- = -;
I
t
Now
.-.
{/, b) is
to correspond to
4 = "i4|tol, and
.-.
similarly
- 1
= ^l^lZlM+ll
and
.
+ iy^ = a.J+li^ + y^ iaj- ip^b - zVi = - aj+ P^b + 72 z'ai/=^2^ + 72 and ili^b + ty-^ = a.2f.
io.^f+ili-J>
Fig.
4.
We
To
that
satisfy
and
six
independent
ySj,
72 are zero:
itj,
P^, so that
io.j=ii,b or
:^=^.
is
tion of transformation
given by
= bx
y-
Q.E.D.
Prove that the general homographic transformation which makes (o, o), {h, k), in the (x, y) figure correspond to the circular
(^, 97) figure is
given by
^~
kx hy
ia-^
28
PLANE GEOMETRY
51.
[CH.
ellipse
-2+^ =
'
is
52.
^ - 1^ =
is
by x=a^, y=ib7).
53.
{a,
will
:
make
the points
2a)
{a,
2a) correspond
and
will
make
;
the points
verify that
&
It
"~~'
mto a
circle.
55. Prove that a conic, given by its general equation, can be transformed into a circle by relations of the form
in general
__a
r]
fit)
-rj
+ v'
+v
Determine a simple homographic transformation, which makes .v- + ycy + 4y^+i=o correspond to a circle. [Use Ex. 55.]
56. 57.
prove that
any transformation which makes them correspond to circles, will also make the conic Si-XS2=0 correspond to a circle, where X is any constant.
This
completes
our
summary
of the
rudimentary principles,
the historical path by
:
This
is
first
and
is
is
may
be
real or
cation for
complex, the foregoing pages supply a complete justifithe validity of imaginary conical projection, i.e. projection
where either the vertex or any points or lines in the projected figure may be imaginary. The process is to be regarded as analytical
(see p. 76).
language
is
The statement of the mode of projection in geometrical only a convenient means of indicating the way in which
is
to
be chosen.
1.]
29
and
same time no
is,
less rigorous,
method.
It
This
is
effected,
for
example, by
Von
is
Staudt
in
his
great
work.
the
The Geometry of
of
Position,
which
generated from
lines, planes, and curves up a non-metrical theory of and then evolves harmonic, homographic and involution systems
disposition
systems of points,
them.
He
builds
pairs, to secure
CHAPTER
II.
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION.
This chapter deals with the simplest method of generating homographically one plane figure from a given plane figure.
lines
and
If this is held up in the drawn on a flat glass plate. sunlight above a sheet of paper, shadows will be cast on the paper, forming a second geometrical system, corresponding in If the sun is directly overhead and if every detail to the first.
is
shadow system on the paper is called the orthogonal projection. of the geometrical system on the glass plate. The correspondence between the two systems is complete, in the sense that every point, line, or curve in the one is directly connected with a unique point, line, or curve in the other. But it is clear that in general the shapes and sizes of the two figures The shadow of any object gives only a distorted will differ. For example, it will be shown that representation of that object. the shadows of two equal lines are lines of equal length, if and
only
in
if
the lines
are
parallel
Definitions.
(i) -Pj, P^,
...
2; /j,/2>"cr.
Then
(2)
/>.,, ...
is
...
on the plane
The
2 and
cr
is
called the
axis of projection.
CH.
II.]
ORTHOGON4L PROJECTION
We
which the
hold good
proceed to enumerate a number of simple theorems on utility of orthogonal projection depends. Many still
in
more general process of conical projection in is marked with an asterisk. In the present chapter, the word " projection " is used as an
the
:
letters
will
be used to refer to
*
(i) (2)
THEOREM
22.
meet of
(3)
their projections.
of
two
points
projects
into
the
join
of their
projections.
(4)
Any
is
unaltered in position
by projection.
its
to the reader.
THEOREM
23.
Fig.
5-
lines
Take any point A on the axis of projection, and draw any two AP^P^, AQ^Q^ to cut the parallel lines at P^, P^ and Qr,, Q^.
Let
p.2,
/i,
5^2,
^1
0-.
32
PLANE GEOMETRY
Then, by parallels, ^ '
' '
[CH.
^
Ap^
Now we
saw
in
Chapter
that
two or
more
all
parallel
lines
infinity,
and
that the
possible systems
infinity.
an ideal
into
line, called
the line at
it
follows that
an
ideal point of
2 projects 2
first
an ideal point of
cr,
and consequently
tr.
projects
This
fact
may
at
sight appear to
it
might
be argued that a
example
and
a
at a great distance
from
it,
at a great distance
line
"infinitely
into
"infinitely
distant."
To
to
it
is
Chapter
where
it
has no geographical quality. If any logical use is to be made of the notion of " infinity," it is essential that the properties associated
with
it
initial definitions.
THEOREM
(i) If
24.
P^
is
the
mid-point of
P-^Po,,
then p^
is
the mid-point
of /i/>3.
(2) If
P,, /',
P are
collinear,
then
^^=hh.
and
if
P^ are
collinear,
{P^P^P^P^= -
i,
then {PiPiPsPi) = - I. *(4) If P-^, P^, P^, P^ are collinear, then the ranges {P-^P^P^P^},
THEOREM
If
25.
parallel,
then
^=4^i.
"1 V.2
The proof
P^i
projection a of A, and
left
to the reader.
II.]
ORTHOGON^
PROJECTION
26.
33
THEOREM
(i) (2)
is
P^P^
is
if
&
p^P^^p^p^.
cos
e.
The proof
1.
is
left
to the reader.
22.
24.
Prove Theorem
2.
3. 4.
25. 26.
is
5. If G is the centroid of the triangle ABC, prove that g the centroid of the triangle abc.
6.
ABC
is
projection
and
if
an equilateral triangle if BC is parallel to the axis of the two planes are inclined at an angle of 45, calculate
:
AB
.
makes an angle
o,
if
is
the
equals 4 cms. and makes with the axis of projection an 8. If angle of 30, find the length of its projection on a plane making an
AB
first
plane.
taken as the
jr-axis
and
if
the coordinates
(-1, -4), find the length oi angle of inclination of the two planes.
of
A,
are
(2,
3),
10. 11.
9,
ix^-\-y'''=i^.
axis of projection as
t 2+^ =
may
a<b.
AB,
C\abc
BC
;
of projection
,
if
are respectively perpendicular and parallel to the axis ^ is the angle of inclination of the two planes, prove
^^jjc='^^''[Circumscribe about ABC a rectangle having one side parallel to the axis of projection, and one corner at a vertex of the triangle.]
13.
Hence
ii
ABC
is
any
triangle,
prove that
/^abc
If
A
its
is
area of
projection on a plane
the area of any plane rectilinear figure, and if a is the making an angle 6 with the first
a=A
COS
^.
34
14.
PLANE GEOMETRY
mean
is
[CH.
AB, CD
unaltered by projection.
size
;
ABC
If the
is
prove
that
ab'^+bc^+ca^
18.
is
sum
number of given
lines
is
prove that the same is true, if line, all the lines being coplanar.
ANALYTICAL TKEATMENT.
The connection between
a
figure
and
its
projection
can be
O
Fig. 6.
\ory
Choose the
in
0-.
Kaxis
in
2 and
the
jc-axis
From any
point
on the
axis of projection,
draw OX, Ox
o-.
Y) be the coordinates of any point {x, y) be the coordinates of its projection / on er. Let d be the angle of inclination of 2 and a-.
Let {X,
in 2,
and
let
Then by Theorem
These
two
26,
{x = Xcosd, \y=Y.
equations
form
its
the
homographic
transformation
orthogonal projection.
THEOREM
(i) If the side
27.
AB
is
of the rectangle
ABCD
is
parallel to the
ABCD
is
equal
to cos^, where B
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
(2)
35
if s is
If 3' is
its
the
area of
projection
on
o-,
then
= S.
cos
6.
Fig.
7.
(i)
By Theorem
is
26,
.-.
But be
to ab.
ABCD
is
equal to cos
Q.
Fig.
S.
(2)
Draw
number
divided into a
is
number
strip as
inscribed,
of breadth
h,
small,
in
it
Kv
lVrpw;frn
36
of the areas of
all
PLANE GEOMETRY
these rectangles can be
[CH.
made
to
differ
from
the area of the closed curve by less than any assigned quantity,
however small.
If
part,
.".
we
have, by the
first
adding up,
2(a,VX.) = cos
.'.
fi'
^{A^^CJ},)
when
k-^o, s
= cos6.S.
explained
q.e.d.
analytical
notation
above,
this
S.
q.e.d.
19.
edge of the strip as one- side prove that the area of the curve between the sums of the areas of these two systems of rectangles, and that these two sums differ, for any oval curve, by less than 2hd where d\s the length of the maximum chord of the curve, perpendicular to the axis of projection. Hence establish Newton's result.
straight
lies
THEOREM
(i) If
28.
m^^,
...
G G
s.
is
m2,
...
at /'j,
P^,...,
then
is
at /j, /jj
(2) If
is
the centroid of
the area
The
(i)
notation
is
as above.
Let {X,
Y); {X^,
Then X=^^=
Zm
butJf=Ssec^: X,=x,sec6
'111!
;
...
'2(mxsecd)
I'w
a'^imxt
2w>
_'Si(?nx)
Ziin
Also
K=^;butF=;;
.
Y,=y,,.
r._ "((y)
\x,
y) or
is
the centroid of
zWj,
m^,
...
2X p.^, p^....
Q.E.D.
11.]
ORTHOGONA4 PROJECTION
Divide
27.
37
rectangles,
as
in
(2)
the
area
6'
into
sj^stetn
of
Tiieorem
The
...
up
S,
;
in s
~=
G
...=cosd, by Theorem 27
is
(i).
Now, when
centres
A-^o,
M^,
...
at the
is
projection
the
centroid of masses
M^,
the
...
at the
centres of the
rectangles
of
s,
and
...
is
therefore
m^, m^,
the centroid of
s.
Q.E.D.
integral calculus,
this
proof
may be
\pxdxdy
.,
x-coordinate of centroid of
s=
\\paxay
= cos6.X,
and
20.
s=
Y.
q.e.d.
ABCD
:
is
of projection
makes an angle of 30 with the axis a square ; the planes are inclined at an angle of 60, find the
AB
value of ^widab.
21.
0^-5C
is
a tetrahedron
OBC, ABC.
OABC is
a tetrahedron
OBC, ABC.
;
s^, s^, s^ are three mutually perpendicular lines 23. OA, OB, on the planes are the areas of the projections of the triangle prove that OBC, OCA, OAB; if s is the area of the triangle ABC,
OC
ABC
38
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THE ELLIPSE.
The
that
may be
appear
many
properties
made
to
yield corre-
ellipse.
To
exhibit
this
connection,
we
shall
define
the
ellipse
as
It
is
evident,
this
9,
equation, that an
ellipse is
symmetrical about
two
is
lines
ACA', BCB',
its
written in
standard form.
Fig.
9.
If
line
a>b, the
line
is
ACA'{=2a)
called the
is
called the
axis,
BCB\ = 2b)
is
minor
as
defined above,
necessary
of a
circle.
This
is
done
in
Theorem
being at
infinity.
THEOREM
By
the
29.
CF
of
ellipse
+ Yl ^=^,
{ci>b),
and by taking
for
the value
is
II.]
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
notation,
39
X=^^= cos 6 d
'
Y=y: '
'
X^
"2"
y2
y^ I fax\'^ = ibecomes^(^^)+-^=i,
,
or
Q.E.D.
-.X
--
Fig.
THEOREM
Ellipses,
30.
their
major to
which have their major axes parallel, and the ratio of their minor axis constant, can be projected into a
system of
circles.
The
where g f r vary.
Project as in
Theorem
29,
-Sr
{y-frf_ =
rH-^
1,
or
x-^^\ +{y-fr?
is
which
circle.
Q.E.D.
40
PLANE GEOMETRY
Ellipses
[CH.
Definition.
their
which have their major axes parallel, and the ratio of major to their minor axis constant, are said to be similar
stated in the form
and
A
of
"
circles.
And
if
a circle
is
is
of an
parallel to the
minor
;
axis,
but
an
circle,
of projection
parallel
to
The
will
who
is
acquainted with
the
geometry of the
its
ellipse
that
the
orthogonal projection
identical
Find Q Find Q
in
may
project into
,r2-|-_y2
y'''
= d,bx.
be projected
25.
in
circle
= r2 may
^y^=\.
ellipses
can be projected
ellipses.
homothetic
Prove that any hyperbola can be projected into a rectangular Prove that the projection of a parabola
a parabola.
hyperbola.
29.
30.
is
^+?^=1, or D
prove that the tangent at (acos<^, asinc^) on the circle projects into the tangent at (a cos <^, h sin <^) on the ellipse and that the eccentric angle of any point is unaltered by projection.
:
31.
w.r.t.
30,
Y)
polar of
the
y\
the
projection of
(X,
a point.
:
chords of a circle
by projecting an
ellipse.
II.]
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
Prove by projection that there
exists
41
33.
one point
in the plane
C
is
is
bisected at C.
C,
PCQ
parallel.
if
of Ex. 33,
of a chord
36.
HK
meet
at T, prove that
CT
38,
bisects
if
HK.
the foot of the
a, b,
is
of an ellipse, semi-axes
NP
is
produced to
so that :i=^=-,
NQ
PQB. cuts two fixed perpendicular lines a, b are constants, prove that P traces out an ellipse, having its semi-axes equal to a, b and situated along CA, CB. [This theorem gives a mechanical method for describing an eUipse.]
variable line
CA, CB at Q,
if
THEOREM
A tangent
The
tangent at any point
31.
of a curve
is
of the chord
FQ
as
Q-^F.
The theorem
is
Definition.
If a variable line
ellipse at
is
B, K, and
the locus
if
of
(2 is
w.r.t.
the
is
THEOREM
(i)
32.
The
polar of
F
its
w.r.t.
an
*(2)
point and
polar
w.r.t.
polar
w.r.t.
an
and
its
the circle,
Fig. 12.
43
PLANE -(JeOMETRY
Let any line through
[ch.
P cut
P
(3),
the ellipse at
H, K;
let
be the
harmonic conjugate of
a
circle.
w.r.t.
H, K.
;
Then by Theorem 24
polar of
.
.
{pq
hk") is
harmonic and
is
a fixed
is
is
the
w.r.t.
the circle.
the locus of
the polar of
.-.
Q P
is
UV.
is
w.r.t.
a straight line
is
UF;
its
and
polar
a point and
polar.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
(i)
33.
If the
polar of
w.r.t.
an
ellipse passes
through Q, then
the polar of
w.r.t.
passes through P.
[P,
the ellipse.]
If
(2)
IfK
lies
w.r.t.
an
ellipse lies
on the
line
MJV
and
on
IfH:.
\HK,
an
MN are
called
the ellipse.]
lines
w.r.t.
Conjugate
points
ellipse
project into
w.r.t.
projected.
The proof
is
left to
the reader.
THEOEEM
(i)
34.
its
it,
There
is is
exists
centre,
which
called a
diameter,
(2) If
an
into
circle,
its
centre
projects
The
of an ellipse
(4)
a diameter of the
ellipse.
if
PCP',
and
If
diameters of an ellipse;
PCP'
bisects
chords parallel to
then
are
QCQ
bisects
chords parallel to
PCP:
ellipse.
QCQ
called conjugate
diameters of the
(5)
an
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
23,
24.]
"]
38.
ORTHOGOI^L PROJECTION
Prove Theorem
33.
43
39.
40.
Prove Theorem
34.
:
Obtain by projection a theorem for two ellipses from the following a tangent at a point O on a circle cuts a concentric circle at P, Q then PO=OQ.
41.
:
'
pole of a chord
lie
Obtain by projection a theorem from the following T is the PQ of a circle, centre O, then the four points TPOQ on a circle.
42.
PQ
is
CPQ
43.
is a variable chord of an ellipse, centre C if the triangle of constant area, prove that PQ touches a fixed concentric
;
homothetic
ellipse.
The centroid of the triangle PQR, inscribed in an ellipse, at the centre of the ellipse prove that if the ellipse is projected into a circle, the triangle PQE is projected into an equilateral
is
;
triangle.
44. If CP, tangent at P
CD
is parallel
45.
46.
ellipse
lines
w.r.t.
the
47. If T is a point outside an ellipse, prove that the chord of contact of the tangents from T is the polar of T.
48.
ABCD
is
EFG
C;
EFG
each vertex
is
meets
of an ellipse, centre
if
CT
50. With the notation of the last exercise, at H, prove that CV.CT = CH2.
if
CT meets
the ellipse
51.
w.r.t.
given
52.
AB, CD
the tangents
;
at
/",
A,
O,
D
Q
meet
the tangents at B,
meet
at
prove that
are coUinear.
54. Prove that the cross ratio of the range formed by four collinear points is eciual to the cross ratio of the pencil formed by
44
PLANE GEOMETRY
In order to
illustrate
[CH.
projection,
The
Consequently, in order
is
not affected
by projection.
This
illustrated
example.
EXAMPLE
CP,
then
L
;
CD
two
P
P
va
H, K;
HP.PK^CD'^.
Fig. 13.
Fig.
14.
A
Since
cp,
circle,
is
pcd 90
JI.
therefore cd
.'.
parallel to
hk
PI
and therefore
CD
parallel to
P P IC
-^tt^,
y^
is
unaltered by projection.
Since
hp .pk = cp'^=cd'^, hp pk
cd
'
cd
^'
HP PK
-Q^ -Qj^=
I.
by Theorem
25,
HP.PK=CD'^.
Q.E.D.
EXAMPLE
are
parallel
IL
and
if its
its
sides
is
to
a pair of conjugate
diameters,
then
area
constant.
11.]
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
45
Project the ellipse into a circle, radius r say; since conjugate diameters project into diameters at right angles, the circumscribing
p'
Fig. i6.
parallelogram,
circle.
area
say,
The
therefore 4^^,
27,
by Theorem
..
cos
= ^r^,
q.e.d.
where 6
is
is
constant.
EXAMPLE
Of
all
in.
circle,
the equi-
lateral triangle
has a
maximum
triangles exist,
and
their sides
touch a concentric
Now
is
unaltered by projection.
of a
3 (see
triangle of
,
maximum
.
area, that
can be inscribed in an
ellipse, are
<t>,
<!>
+ ,
2Tr
ATT
<f>
+ jthe theorem
that can be inscribed in an ellipse, the triangle
<t>,
<p
<p-^
is
01
maximum
their sides
area: an unlimited
number of such
triangles exist,
and
touch a concentric homothetic ellipse. Another mode of enunciating this theorem is suggested by the
46
55.
in
PLANE GEOMETRY
Calculate the area of the
ellipse,
[CH.
maximum
/>.
be inscribed
an
semi-axes a and
56. Prove that the centroid of a triangle of maximum area that can be inscribed in an ellipse lies at the centre of the ellipse. 57. in
If
PQR
an
ellipse,
is a triangle of maximum area that can be inscribed prove that the tangents at P, Q, R are parallel to QR,
RP, PQ.
58.
is
any point on an
ellipse,
ACA'
line
AQ
ih&l
parallel to
CP
axis at R, prove
chord of an ellipse
OR'^ =
is
a fixed point
is
PO.OQ
aX
,
P,
From a Q; CD
.
fixed point
is IS
is
drawn a variable
an
ellipse
;
a semi-diameter of the
constant.
ellipse, parallel to
OP
prove
that
61.
OP.OQ
CD''
-_.,
P, Q,
62.
The sides BC, CA, AB of a triangle touch, an ellipse at R; prove that BP. CQ. AE=PC QA.EB. The tangents TP, TQ at the points P, Q on an ellipse are at
. ;
right angles
.
PH,
.
QK
.
/",
TP PH= TQ QK.
63.
Q; prove
that
The
at
PQ
of an ellipse
find
meet
if
differ
by a constant,
the locus of T.
64.
Prove that the area of the minimum triangle which can be dea, b, is ^^yib.
centroid of a triangle
;
The
PQR
QR
inscribed in an ellipse
at
is
centre
of the ellipse
PC
meets
and the
ellipse at
the
;
prove that
66.
CL LM.
[Garnet's theorem].
;
An
.
ellipse
;
AB
of a triangle at Pj, Pj
. .
. .
Qi, Q2
BPi BP2 CQi CQ, ARi AE2=CPi CP2 AQi AQj BEi BRj.
.
.
67.
From
and through
the
first
is
their extremities two other chords are drawn parallel to two chords, cutting the ellipse again at P, Q; prove that
PQ
fixed in direction.
T' is
;
point
a variable point on a tangent to a given ellipse at a fixed from the mid-point of TP the other tangent is drawn to the ellipse prove that TQ passes through a fixed point.
68.
MQ
69.
its
An
ellipse is inscribed in
;
mid-point
a triangle so as to touch one side at prove that the locus of its centre is a median of the
triangle.
n.]
70.
at
ORTHOGONi^ PROJECTION
47
the tangent
PP
in
is
a diameter of an ellipse
any chord
PD cuts
PQ.
P
71.
Q; prove
line cuts
bisects
A
H,
ellipses at /",
Q; H,
K;
prove that
72.
PH=Q,K.
HP,
KQ
are two
PQ.
73. A triangle is circumscribed to an ellipse and inscribed in a second concentric homothetic ellipse, whose linear dimensions are twice those of the first ellipse prove that an unlimited number of such tri;
angles
74.
exist,
and
The
external
common
.
at 7"; a line
prove that
75.
at P, Q,
at
P,
From a
drawn
to a concentric
first
homothetic
at
ellipse,
touching
it
at
ellipse
P, S; prove that
PQ^^RS.
w.r.t.
76. Prove that the polars of a given point homothetic ellipses are parallel.
a system of concentric
77. A tangent to an ellipse meets two conjugate diameters at T, prove that the other tangents from T, T' to the ellipse are parallel. 78.
PCP, DCD'
CA,
79.
CB
prove that
AP,
AP
are parallel to
BD, BU.
ellipse
off
which cuts
80.
is
triangle
81.
TPQ
is
the pole of a chord PQ, of an ellipse if the centroid of the lies on the curve, find the locus of T.
;
P on
an
ellipse,
centre C, to
major axis
AA'
is
NQ
is
drawn
parallel to
AP
to
meet
CP
zX
Q;
CP,
prove that
^0
82.
ellipse,
CD
is
r
CP,
;
such that
TP ^
is
constant
CD
is
are a variable pair of conjugate semi-diameters of an and prove that the mid-point of
PD
sector
84.
PCD
The
at
of constant area.
meet
line.
w.r.t. two homothetic ellipses polars of a variable point is a straight locus of the mid-point of prove that the
PQ
85.
CP CP;
an
ellipse';
CQ, CQ' are two pairs of conjugate semi-diameters of prove that the triangles CPQ, CPQ' are equal in area.
48
86.
PLANE GEOMETRY
ellipse, parallel to the
[CH.
an
Lines are drawn through the vertices of a triangle inscribed in diameters bisecting the opposite sides ; prove
chord
PQ
ellipse
L,
M,
88.
52 at i? ; and S^ at
PL, QM,
N respectively;
PN
PN
S-^
at
prove that
in
2RN=PL+QM.
;
APC
is
a triangle inscribed
an
ellipse
on
the curve
to
are drawn parallel to the diameters conjugate PL, PM, BC, CA, AB to meet these lines at L, M, N; prove that /., M,
are collinear.
G is 89. CP, CD are two conjugate semi-diameters of an ellipse the centroid of the sector PCD G-N is drawn parallel to CD to
;
;
^=p=3-if
L''^
'^ "^^^
centre and
AC
^,
a.
chord of a
2
circle,
and
is
AOC,
then
90.
{x,
OG OA
chords C"
arc^C =]
any sector of an
ellipse,
PCP
is
centre
semi-axes
a,
y) are the coordinates of the centroid of the sector, referred to CA, CB <^, <^' are the eccentric angles of P, P. Prove that
;
j:_2
sin<^'
^~3
91.
sin<^ y _2
'
cos
<^
- cos <^'
^'-'Z'
^~3
AB.
:
4''-4>
CA,
CB
P,
contact of a
common
w.r.t.
conjugate points
93.
tangent to two circles 5,, 52; then P, any circle coaxal with 5i, 52ellipse,
are
PQ
CP,
is
a diameter of an
is
prove that
94.
PP,
RQ
CD are
PVP', DRD'
respectively;
QCQ
in
at V,
R
;
prove that
95.
CV^=QR.RQ.
a variable triangle inscribed
PQR is
Q
an
ellipse
if
the tangents
at
P,
96.
are parallel to
QR, PR,
PQ.
;
PCP, DCjy
CP
at the vertex
in
//
if
CP=CD,
PB'
97.
PCP,
DCD
DQ, PR
Prove that
PQ,
HR
"]
ORTHOGONM. PROJECTION
; ; ;
49
98. PCP', DCD' are two conjugate diameters of an ellipse R is any point on the curve RD, RD' meet PCP' at K, K' prove that
CK.CK'=CP^.
99. Prove that two parallel tangents to an ellipse are met by any other tangent in points situated on conjugate diameters.
100. CP, CD are conjugate semi-diameters of an ellipse PN, DB are the perpendiculars from P, D to the major axis; prove that
;
(1)
(4)
PN2-|-DR2=CB2;
(2)
CN2+CR2=CA2;
(3)
CP2+OD2=CA2+CB2;
serai-diameters of an ellipse;
C4,
C^
102.
CB C&__
2X
M,
PD
cuts
prove that
CM^'^CN^~^'
If P,
are
two
points
%.,
on an
ellipse,
centre 0, whose
by
semi-diameters.
103.
CD
are conjugate
PCP, BCD'
extremities
?
Prove that there exists one pair of equal conjugate diameters, of an ellipse. What are the eccentric angles of their
ellipse
are called
the
PQRS
is
if its
PQ^+QR'
to
constant.
105.
inside
an
ellipse,
show how
draw a
106.
The tangent
at
any point
conjugate diameters at P,
is
CRP
CRD.
is
a.
is
equally
CA,
CB
if
the tangent at
CB
CP of an ellipse, TQ is Q QR is drawn parallel to the semiTD meets QR diameter CD conjugate to CP and meets CP &t R at V; prove that QR^=CD.RV.
108.
From a
drawn
109.
The
a.
diameter of an ellipse
diameters at
110.
an
ellipse is
drawn
its
centre
50
111.
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
a fixed point
;
[CH
ellipse
locui
is
Q
of
is
a point on
is
OF
such that
ellipse.
constant
a homothetic
112.
HK
CP,
is
;
/' is
on the
113.
at
ellipse
HPK at
CA
2X
their mid-points.
;
CD
CA
;
T;
\%
from
114.
to
TN
PT^
If
PQ
is
a diameter of
given
is
and
if /? is
PJP+RQ?
constant.
115.
PQ,
lines
PR
H,
poles
through H,
K parallel to PR, PQ
lies
meet at
prove that
on PF.
CQ,
to
CP
at
Q,
117.
T is
meets
the pole
^2 of ^ti ellipse, centre C; T!/", TQ meets TQQ are equal in area. of a chord PQ of an ellipse a chord HK parallel
a chord
;
TP
118.
PQ
at
V,
TQa.tR;
prove that
RV^=RK.RH.
[Newton's theorem.]
Through a variable point 0, two lines drawn cutting a given ellipse at F, Q and
'
obtained by taking
119.
is constant. What special value op> qq, at the centre of the ellipse?
:
is
The
an equilateral triangle
depends only on the '^
b, c, is projected orthogonally into prove that the angle between the two planes
-;;
ratio
a^ + i^+c^
75
121. Two adjacent sides of a parallelogram are of lengths a, b and are inclined at an angle Q ; the parallelogram is projected into a square, side x; prove that 2x''=a^\b'^-(a'^^2a^'^Q.o%7.Q^b'^)^.
points
[Inscribe an ellipse to touch the sides of the parallelogram at what does it project into ?]
:
its
mid-
122.
is
o-j,
o-j, 0-3
123.
y=%\wz can be
pro-
11.]
ORTHOGONL PROJECTION
PRACTICAL SOLID GEOMETRY.*
SI
account of the practical importance of the application of orthogonal projection to problems of solid geometry, it seems
desirable,
in passing, to call attention very briefly to this aspect
On
of the subject.
Two
zontal.
as
planes of reference,
which, in their most natural position, would be vertical and horiProjections of points or lines
on
named plans, and on the vertical plane (called named elevations. In simple cases, the h.p. and v.p.
and
vertical; but should this cease to
still
the
are
actually horizontal
case, for
be the
and
v.p.
The
is
of that point
the plane.
Notation.
The
line,
and
ground
and
denoted by
XY.
Capital letters A, B,
a,
b,
c,
C, ...denote
...,and their
c',..^.
Where two
is
points A,
denoted by j or
it
if
is
V.P.
H.P.
a
Fig. 17
(i).
Fig.
7W.
In the figures of the projections of solids, it is usual to edges by represent visible edges by continuous lines and invisible
front.
dotted
*This
lines.
section (pages 51-64) has been written
by Mr. A. E. Broomfield.
52
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
THEOREM
(i)
35.
XY
is
is
equal
above the
h.p.
XV
equal
to
of the projectors of
extremities,
and the
form a right-angled
third; see Fig. 7.]
Fig. 17
v.p.
triangle.
it
is
(2) represents
(i),
the
about
XY
is
so as to
make
its
H.p.
125.
a, a'
and elevation of
w.r.t.
the ground-line
XY
perpendicular to
XY.
Given the plans and elevations of A, B, construct the length Given the plan and elevation of a
v.p.
of
AS.
127.
line,
it
line
With the data of Ex. 127, construct the points in which the meets the H.P. and v.p.
129. 130.
What
is
.is
a point
what
is
the condition
intersect)
Given the points in which a line of indefinite length meets the and v.p., construct the angle it makes with the H.p., and construct
Given the plans and elevations of a point
plan.
132.
and a
the
line
BC,
A, equal and
parallel to
SC.
of
its
Given
the
plan
of
triangle
ABC,
find
plan
centroid.
134.
at
line
AB
v.p.
AB,
the
abc
is
ABC
A,
lie in
v.p., if
ACB=90.
the mid-point of
AB,
note that
AD = CD=BD.'\
Prove that
"J
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
SECONDARY PROJECTIONS.
53
Definition.
The trace of one plane on another is their line of intersection; and the trace of a line on a plane is their point of intersection. Thus the ground Une, XY, is the trace of the h.p. on the v.p. or the v.p. on the h.p.
THEOREM
Given the plan and elevation of a
36.
on a
new
remaining unaltered.
A w.r.t. the ground be the trace of the new h.p. on the original v.p. Let aa' meet XYin m; draw an perpendicular to Xj J^ and produce it to a^ so that na-^ = ma. Then a^ and a' are the required
Let
a, a!
line
XY;
and
X^
Y-y
w.r.t.
is
from the
its
v.p.
is
i.e.
XY
Q.E.F.
unchanged
plan.
It is
= am,
a-^
important to note
that,
if
a line
lies
Given the
lines in
V.P.,
and
elevation.
137. Given the plan and elevation of a point, on a new v.p., the h.p. remaining unaltered.
54
138.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Draw
the
[CH.
plan and
H.P.
elevation of a cube, which rests with and with one edge making a given angle with
XY.
139.
Draw Draw
the plan
any given
position.
is
141.
An
H.P.
determine
142.
elevation on
any given
v.P.
its
XYaX
143.
I-5",
Draw Draw
;
which
rests with
in
any given
position.
144.
rests with
vertical
the plan and elevation of a regular octahedron, which one corner on the H.P., and the diagonal through that corner the length of its edge being i"
145.
Draw
axis
two planes
is
traces in
line of intersection.
The
the line
and
its
From
this, it
equal to
But
if
and a
is
both straight
lines,
THEOREM
To
37.
II.]
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
55
There are two methods of procedure (i) Take the solid, and then choose convenient positions
planes of reference.
(2)
for the
solid
in a convenient position.
56
PLANE GEOMETRY
In method
(2), if
[CH.
we begin
with our
XY, we must
then draw a
XY,
19 (3)).
line
In both cases, draw the simple elevation d'b'f'K. Then either (Fig. 19 (2)), take a new h.p. (ground
rotate the
It
all
X'Y)
19 (3)),
cube into
its
required position.
to find the
new
...
projections or plans of
In Fig. 19
the
new plans
a', I),
f,
...lo
from
X'Y
as a,
b,
...are
must
lie
respectively
X'Y and
are the
q.e.f.
is
In Fig. 19
the
to
V.P.,
(3),
be
lines parallel
XY.
The
points where these parallels cut the perpendiculars from the
elevations to
XY will
The second method of obtaining plan and elevation is called Rabatment; it will be useful to consider a few more examples of The following facts should this method; \e.g. Theorems 38, 39].
be kept prominently in view
When
is
the distance
The
planes
of all
the
circles
of rotation
are
parallel
to
one
to the axis.
more
problems on sections.
This
is
illustrated
by the
following example
EXAMPLE.
Given the plan and elevation of a sphere, and the elevation of
a point on
its
surface,
it
is
Take a
Its elevation is
a horizontal
II.]
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
57
line through /', cutting the elevation of the sphere in n, say, a vertical diameter in m.
and
Then
is
circle,
sphere.
Fig. 19
(4).
The plan p oi P lies (i) on the perpendicular from p' to XY, and (2) on the plan of the section, just drawn and is therefore at one of the points / in the figure. [If the projector from /' be first drawn, the points / may be marked off, without drawing
:
q.e.f.
146. A regular hexagonal pyramid rests with one face on the H.P., and the plan of its axis makes an angle of 20 with the v.P. find its plan and elevation, given that its height is i'' and the length of a side
;
of the base
147.
is ^".
the plan of a circle, radius 2", if its plane makes an angle of 60 with, the H.P. [Construct the plan of a number of points on the circle and join them up free-hand.]
given the angle this 148. A cube rests with one edge in the H.P. edge makes with and the angle one face through this edge makes
;
Draw
XY
its
elevation.
;
given regular tetrahedron rests with one edge in the H.P. and the angle one face through the angle this edge makes with
XY
this
150.
Draw
is vertical.
58
151.
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
Draw
in the H.P., inclined at
[CH
a given angle to
XY,
fit
if
the plane of
thi
is
find a
side of
thi
one
v.P.
whose base is an equilateral triangle rests witl Determine the sectional elevation on any givei an elevation of the plane surface intercepted by the prism oi
right prism
V.P.].
the given
154.
determin<
plane of section
draw a
sectional plan on
centre.
156. The diagonal of a cuboid is vertical ; draw a sectional plan or a horizontal plane (i) through its centre, (2) through its lowest cornei but two.
157.
its
base on the
Given the plan and elevation of a circular cone resting with H.P;, and the plan of a point P on the cone, find the
plan of a square
elevation of P.
158.
-a
The
is
a given rhombus
o)
THEOREM
To draw
H.P.,
38.
the plan
its
of a given triangle
is
ABC,
situated
in
the
when
plane
II.]
ORTHOGONA*. PROJECTION
perpendiculars
59
The
AA',
BB\ CC,
circles,
is
from A, B,
to
FQ
are
described by A, B, C.
[In the
extreme position,
mirror FQJ]
A'B'C
the reflection of
ABC
in a vertical
ABC.
Fig. 20
(2).
The
plan of B-^
is
the foot
lies
b-^
of the perpendicular
to
BB'
on a
BB", centre O, and such that B.^OB=d. This point b^ is the same point as the foot of the perpendicular from a similar point on any semi-circle on BB' as diameter. Draw, therefore, a semicircle in the plane of the paper, on as diameter; make
BB
to
BOB-^ = d, and draw B-J)-^ perpendicular The plans of A-^ and Cj and of any
BB'.
however,
be
saved
Z,
by the
use
of
Let
AB, CB meet
.'.
PQ
at
Z,
M.
Then
are stationary
produced
lies
is
.'.
it
is
and
similarly
of C.
q.e.f.
i".
159.
160.
Construct the angle which one edge of a regular tetrahedron makes with the plane containing the two edges, concurrent with it.
161.
-at
a point
situated in a given 162. abc is the given plan of a triangle plane perpendicular to the v.p. if the trace of this plane on the v.p. makes a given angle 6 with XV, construct the true size of ABC.
;
ABC
6o
163.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Find the trace on the H.P. of a plane inclined if its trace on the V.P. is given.
at
[CE
a givei
30 about a diagonal.
;
if
one diagonal
lies
ii
the H.P., find the angle of inclination of the rectangle to the H.P.
166.
P,
AB, CD
of a given parallelo
givei
gram
angle.
167.
ABCD
and
H.P.,
find
it;
plan of a horizontal
Given the traces of a plane on the v.P. and H.P., draw thi line, which is at a height of 2" above the H.P.
the given plane.
and
lies in
Given the plan of a triangle whose traces th, tv on the H.P. and
169.
ABC
V.P.
wMcli
lies
in a plane
(1
(2) its
elevation on a
new
v.P.
perpendicula)
horizontal rabatment.
HORIZONTAL PROJECTION.
is sometimes known as the Index System. Only one plane of projection is used, viz. the horizontal plane A point is represented by its indexed plan,
This
which
is
to
inch].
it,
line is represented
as
Fig. 21
(i).
A
into
plane
is
is
lines, abbreviated
what
This
may be
explained as follows
Let
v.P.
5,
;
AB
and
15,
let it
10,
20,
...
be cut by a series of horizontal planes at heights units above the h.p. These horizontal lines ol
contours.
section
are
called
The
plans
of these contours
are
perpendicular Xa
therefore
XY, and
They ma)
at
righl
be completely represented by a
It
drawn
is
This
called the
must be remembered
11.]
ORTHOGONAl PROJECTION
all
The scale is formed by two parallel lines, one made thicker than the other. In order to visualise
of
which
is
it
the plane,
10
15
20
25
(2).
Fig. 21
is
line,
is
plane:
if
of greatest slope of the you stand, looking up the plane, the line of the scale
line
on your
the scale.
170.
to
b-jC-^-^.
left-hand
side
is
line
through
!,
171. Given the indexed plans of three points A, B, 0, find the indexed plan of a horizontal line through A in the plane ABC.
172.
Given
the
indexed
plan
of
line,
find
its
inclination
to
the H.P.
173.
a,,,
byi,
;
parallelogram
174.
Cn, are the indexed plans of three vertices determine the index of the remaining vertex.
lines,
of
find
its
angle of
index.
parallel to a plane of 177. Construct the scale of slope of a plane, given scale of slope and passing through a point of given indexed
plan.
62
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
178. Find the point of intersection of a plane of given scale of slope with a line of given indexed plan.
179.
the plane
Given the scale of slope of a plane, find the plan of a line in which passes through a given point and makes a given
THEOREM
To
plan, ag^i/io
is
39.
ABC, when
its
indexed
given.
C'
Fig.
The
figure is
drawn
and the
floVs-
plane
would
therefore
be
Produce
cb to
so that
= 3
then
is
BC, and
horizontal
zontal
ap,
is
AP
to
is
line.
Rabat the
triangle
ABC
3.
about
AP
into a horito
position
bB-^
AB'C.
To do
and m,
this,
draw bm perpendicular
equal
in
and
perpendicular to
bm and
i.e.
length
the
difference of level of
Now mb
of level of
is
the plan of
to the difference
(3),
w^j
traces
equals
mB
and
is
But,
circle,
when
the
out
Consequentlj
mb
at
b:
[Th. 38.]
"]
ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION
/g
is
63.
Now
a stationary point on
.'.
BC,
c to
BC
Therefore
Bp^
Then aB'
is
ag'^u'^ie'
Q-e.f.
THEOREM
To
find
40.
of two planes,,
Fig. 23.
Draw through
contours
of
the
plans
level)
of
in
the
'5'
contours
(or
two
other
to
the-
equal
These contours
the given planes,
similarly
The
parallel
case
is
where the
omitted and
scales
left
of
slope
of
the
as
Ex. 182.
4
180.
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
In Fig. 23,
is Cg
[CH.
ll
slopi
perpen
dicular from
182.
the plane.
for
Give a construction
Theorem
a point C, find
185.
index
if
AC,
BC
plan of their
186.
common
point.
feet
northward path on the plane face of an embankment rise vertically in a horizontal distance of 4 feet, and a westwari
5 feet in
its
path rises
path,
187.
12 feet
and
Draw
solution,
and
if so,
how many ?
ceiling, is
;
;
The
floor of
its
give;
the heights of three of the top corners, find the height of the remainin]
top corner.
190.
its
given
its
plai
and
pyramid again.
line paralle
lin
both planes of reference, find the points of intersection of the with the sphere. [Take an auxiliary plan w.r.t. a ground line, pendicular to the given ground line.]
192.
pei
lines
AB, AC,
of the
angle
BAC.
CHAPTER
III.
CONICAL PROJECTION.
is first found, in an elementary form, Serenus (circa 450 a.d.). But no real use was made of it before the time of Desargues (1593-1662), a French architect and engineer, who served under Richelieu at the siege
The
in the writings of
of Rochelle.
The
and the
fertility
all
of his
among
time.
The
modern theory of
to
projective geometry
only a development of
:
and
it is
interesting
the
its
non-metrical
Geometry of Position
its
of
Von
Staudt takes as
triangles.
true yalue
by
the
chiefly because
new
it
consequences.
And
By
Carnot (1753-1823), Poncelet (1788-1867), and Chasles (i 793-1880) to perceive its merits and develop its principles.
left to
was
his
infinity,"
and
and by
conies, elevating
it
from a collection
The
a professor at Bonri,
who was
the
first
by
their isotropic
characteristic,
methods a theory of
basis for Poncelet's
while by his
method of
reciprocal polars.
66
PLANE GEOMETRY
are a system of points in a plane 2.
[ci
Definitions.
(i) /*!, P^,
...
is
ar
2; the
lines
OP^, OP^,
...
meet a second
give
plane
is
<t
Then
said to
w.r.t.
be the conical projection of the given system in 2 on the point O, which is called the vertex of projection.
(2)
The
line
of intersection of
2 and
o:
cr
is
projection.
(3)
If a plane through
parallel to
meets 2 in the
line 1
then
is
2 and
similarly, if a plan
through
2 meet "
o-.
is
calle
An example
Each
the screen
:
of conical projection
is
by the source of light on t and the picture thus formed is the conical projectio: of the slide. To form an accurate representation, the planes c the screen and slide must be parallel otherwise the picture is
detail of the slide is projected
:
i.e.
and the
consequently
Such a But
distortioi
invariabi
1
correspond uniquely to
point and a line in the slide, and the joins of corresponding point
:
and
it
is
We
letters
will
to
the givei
thi
and small
letters
to
the corresponding
elements of
projected figure.
THEOREM
(i)
41.
(2)
The meet
The
of two
straight
lines
projects
jections.
(4)
Any Any
is
unaltered in positioi
by projection.
(5)
straight
line
and
its
projection
meet on the
axis
projection.
III.]
CONICA PROJECTION
O
67
Fig. 24.
The proof
is
left to
the reader.
THEOREM
(1)
42.
is
The
and
in particular
jects into a
(2)
ratio
harmonic range.
is
The
of their projections
and
in
particular
a harmonic pencil
projects into a
harmonic
left
pencil.
The proof
is
to the reader.
THEOREM
(i) If a
43.
system
of concurrent lines
meet
at
a point on
the
an ideal point
called the
or point
figure.
ideal line, (3) The vanishing line projects into an line at infinity, in the plane of the projected figure.
68
(i)
PLANE GEOMETRY
Let
2,
o-
[CH.
The
A.
vanishing line
of
o-.
is
the intersection of
with a plane
through O, parallel to
Let
at P.
be the point on
at
DP
of the
which the system of lines concur. system meet the axis of projection
Then by
DP
is
of the planes
ODP,
o-
a-.
Now X
.'.
.'.
and
the plane
ODP
cuts X,
<r
in
parallel lines.
the projection of
DP
is
parallel to
OD.
Q.e.d.
.'.
parallel to
(2)
OD.
definition,
Now, by
common
to each
member
of the
system.
D determined by a system of
by the system
q.e.d.
all
of
which they
project.
determined by taking
all
possible systems
line
of parallel lines.
into
projects
an ideal point.
The
any
lines
To any
(finite)
Consequently a system of
of lines having
no
(finite)
form a system of
on the vanishing
It
may be
be
would, however,
illogical,
in
and
liiie
This
line
concurring at a point of
HI.]
CONICAL*PROJECTION
of any line of
69
Definition.
The meet
is
called
THEOEEM
(i) If
44.
D
is
is
FD, and
is
if
is
I'D
parallel
lines
to
OD.
If If,
Qlf,
QK;
and
if
jections of
QH, QK,
is
HOK.
Fig. 26.
(i)
(2)
This has been already proved in the course of Theorem 43. Denoting elements of the projected figure by small letters,
qh,
we have
.'.
OH, OK.
the angle
makes with
q/i
is
HOK.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
Given any geometrical system
projection O,
line
it
45.
in
a plane
is
PQ
in for
2
a-
Take
any plane
line
OIQ;
then
IQ
is
the vanishing
infinity in
cr.
70
It
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
convenient to express
[CH.
more
briefly
PQ
is
to be projected to infinity.
The
may
b.e
illustrated
at this stage
EXAMPLE.
To
establish the
quadrilateral.
Fig. 28.
Fig. 27,
it is
\^AECP^
harmonic.
Project
FG
to infinity
F;
.'.
at
G;
is
.'.
ab are
parallel.
abed
a parallelogram
Since
lies
on FG,
.'.
is
a point at
is
infinity
{aecp)
harmonic
is
.'.
{AFCP}
46.
harmonic.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
ABC, A'B'C
If
[Desargues' Theorem.]
same or
different planes.
AA', BB',
BC,
(i)
BC
Let
CC
the meets L,
M,
of
CA, C'A'
AB, AB'
lie
are collinear.
different planes 2, 2';
ABC, A'B'C
in
two
and
let
AA', BB',
CC
concur
at
O.
"'0
CONICAI^PROJECTION
71
Then
w.r.t.
'
BC
on
the
projections
of
C, CA,
AB
2'.
by Theorem 41 (5), meets B'C on the axis of projection. Z, and similarly M, N, lie on the axis of projection, i.e. the line of intersection of 2, 2'. q.e.d.
..
BC
Fig. 30.
(2)
Let
ABC,
A'B'
Project
LM to
BC,
lie in
the
same
be,
plane.
infinity.
BC
meet
at
L;
.'.
b'c
at
M\
ob
ob'
.'.
ca,
dd
oc
oc
oa
oa'
.'.
.'.
.'.
q.e.d.
THEOREM
ABC, AB' C
If the
47.
[Desargues' Theorem.]
meets L,
M,
of
BC,
BC
different planes.
;
AB, A'B'
are
collinear, then
(i)
AA',
BB,
CC
lie
are concurrent.
Let
ABC, A'B'C
/3,
in different planes.
Since
BC, B'C
intersect,
7,
BB',
CC
lie in
a plane, a
say.
Similarly, let
AA'BB.
72
PLANE GEOMETRY
Then AA', BB',
[CH.
CC
;
i
of planes
y,
their lines
y have one common point, so that of intersection with each other are concurrent;
a,
.'.
AA:, BB',
lie
CC
are concurrent.
Q.e.d.
(2)
Let
ABC, A'B'C
in the
same
plane.
Project
LMN
is
The
1. 2.
proof
left
42.
(2).
3. 4.
Prove Theorem 47
Prove that any three collinear points can be projected into two
points
If the
C,
draw a
figure to
show
how C may be
5.
AB.
three points a,
6.
c so that 7-
be
to project
7.
ABC.
or
a-
is parallel
lines
sides
BC, CA,
AB
oi
a.
triangle at
P, Q,
R; P, Q,
CA,
10.
AB
w.r.t. BC, R' are the harmonic conjugates of P, Q, prove that AP', BQ', CR! are concurrent. respectively
;
:
Generalise by projection
P, Q,
BC, CA,
AB of
'
a triangle, prove
PC QA RB
-p^-
-pr-=
is
unaltered by projection.
.
12.
polygon.
13.
Use Ex.
Use Ex.
II
to
versal to infinity.
III.]
CONICAL jgROJECTION
73
15.
If 1
1,
tliis
relation is unaltered by projection. [This is a generalisation of the theorem that the cross ratio of any four collinear points is unaltered by projection.]
16.
is
AB
is
is
the reflection of
AB
in
CD
CD is the vanishing line of 2 A'B' prove that the length of any segment of
;
;
A'B'
17.
unaltered by projection.
Prove from first principles, by projection, that the third diagonal of a complete quadrilateral is divided harmonically by the two other
diagonals.
18.
A, B,
A', B',
C, are two
prove
is
AB
ef.
from
CD
is
equal
AB
from
20. A, B, C are three fixed collinear points; PQS is a variable triangle such that P, Q lie on fixed lines and QR, RP, PQ pass respectively prove that the locus of R is a straight through A, B,
;
line.
21.
Each of
the vertices of a variable quadrangle lies on a fixed line, and three of the sides pass through
:
on
at least
prove that the remaining three sides pass through fixed points.
22.
23.
ABCD
PK, BD,
24.
a parallelogram
through any point O lines are drawn at P, Q, H, then meet AB, CD, BC,
;
AD
HQ
line
;
are concurrent.
:
Generalise by projection
of Ex.
2,3,
AQ, KC, OB
are concurrent.
meets the sides AD, DC, CB, EA of a quadrilateral at 25. Any P, Q, R', S' are the harmonic conjugates of P, Q, R, S P, Q, R, S prove that PQ, P'Q, R'S' are concurrent. w.r.t. AB, DC, CB, BA
;
Three triangles are such that their vertices lie on the same concurrent straight lines, prove that the axes of perspective three of the triangles, taken in pairs, are concurrent. 27. Three triangles are such that, when taken in pairs, they are in perspective and have the same axis of perspective prove that the three
26.
;
concurrent lines
with
A'B'.,
six
meets
of
AB,
AC, BC,
BC
74
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH,
THEOREM
It
is
48.
containing angles of given magnitudes, and at the other given line into the line at infinity.
Let HAH', KAK' ; PBP' be the two pairs of lines which are to be projected into pairs of lines containing angles
,
QBQ
a,
/3
respectively.
CD
lines at
H, K, P, Q.
In any other plane, through
of circles containing angles
of intersection of these circles.
CD,
:
describe on
let
HK, PQ
segments
a, y8
and
O
on
With
any plane
parallel
to the plane
OCD.
it
Then, by Theorem 44, since H, K, P, Q are vanishing points, follows from the construction that the projected pairs of lines
a, j8
:
contain angles
and the
line
CD
is
projected to
infinity.
Q.E.D.
It
real points.
76), it may still be regarded as accordance with the Principle of Continuity. Any results
still
be true
even
if
The
III.]
CONICAL JfROJECTION
75
THEOREM
Given a
project
straight line
49.
PQ
PQ
and a
triangle
ABC,
it
is
possible to
ABC
into a triangle
line
similar to a given
triangle,
and
at
the
to infinity.
The proof
left to
the reader.
THEOREM
If a line
50.
APB
touches a curve
S'
.S
APB
The
at the projection of P.
is
PQ, when
Q^P.
And
.'.
the tangent
at/
is
when q-^pQ.E.D.
the tangent at
is
29.
Prove Theorem
49.
in
30.
is
a variable point
H,
is
K are
vanishing line of
31.
constant.
Prove that a quadrilateral can be projected into a rhombus, having one diagonal equal to a side.
32.
of given size.
33. Prove that any three concurrent lines and a transversal can be projected into three parallel lines and a transversal perpendicular to them and cut into two equal segments.
34.
35.
If
What
the projection of a
common
common
third diagonal
any point O is taken XY, which bisect /3 as vertex of projection the angle between 2, o- the perpendiculars from O to a, /? meet 2 at and (t at m, n. If A, B are any two points in 2, and a, b their M. A A
is
XF
the
common hne
;
of two planes 2,
<j
<x,
'
projections in
o",
prove that
AMB=amb.
[Produce
it
MA,
MB
o-
coincides with
until rotate 2 about at A', B' meet and show that MA', MB' then coincide with mA',
to
XY
XY
mB'.]
76
38.
(1)
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
ABCD
liarmonically conjugate to B,
of points at
which AB,
CD
are a pair of points tliat the locus subtend egual angles is the circle on
;
P,
C and
to A,
prove
PQ
as diameter.
(2) Hence show how to project any three angles into three equal angles and any line to infinity.
39.
Show how
to project
and any
40.
line to infinity.
points,
in, perspective
triangles,
triangle.
41.
into
Prove that two curves Si, S2 intersecting at A, B can be projected two curves jj, s^ cutting each other orthogonally at a, b, and any
hne
to infinity.
42.
w.r.t.
which a given
B <^0
Fig. 32.
is
BD
parallel
perpendicular to
BD
meets
BD,
AC
B, A. is any point
as origin
in 2,
VP
meets
cr
at /.
Take
any point
on
BD.
For axes take, in 2, Ox, Oy along and perpendicular to and in cr, O^, Orj along and perpendicular to OD. Let {x, y), ($, 1)) be the coordinates of P, p referred to these Let AP meet at m.
OD;
axes.
BD
pin
VA
78
PLANE GEOMETRY
in
this
[CH
And
way we
are
analysis.
circles
Any two
by a real projection,
purel]
wit!
there
into circles.
possible.
is
no
longei
But analysis makes no distinction between the two cases and therefore the transmitted property must still hold good. Again, in Theorem 48, it was proved that two angles could b projected into angles of given size, and also a given line to infinity by taking the vertex of projection at a point of intersection o two known circles. If these circles do not meet at real points the vertex of projection is no longer real but it is convenient stil
:
as
now
refers
to nothing
more than
ar
b, c of which are obtainec from a consideration of the equations of the two circles in question In other words, the geometrical language affords a simple meani
Th<
leadi
it
it
be predicted,
it
is
usual to omit
with
the assurance
that
it
could be effected;
and
refer to th(
name
of conical projection.
The
is
notatioi
stated,
that
32.
THEOREM
(i) (2)
51.
is
a conic.
five points
One
conic,
and one
only, can
be drawn through
collinear.
ai
Any
x = -^^,
y -3-J
on
p.
77).
I"-]
CONICAL PROJECTION
curve becomes
2hpq^y\
circle,
79
The
This
if
ap%^ +
is
+ bqS^ + ( 2gp^ +
if
frj
2/^rj)
the coefficients
is
the coefficient of
zero.
if
This
will
be the
case,
ap'^-=bq^
+ 2fq + c and
7.hpq-^2gp
= o;
?= -f
and
p"^
in this way,
into
a circle and
therefore
q.e.d.
by
The
general equation
independent constants,
they can
therefore
be chosen so as
to
make
and
this,
in only
one way,
the
vanishing
line
project
into
The equation of the vanishing line AC is y = b. Any system of lines intersecting ox^ y = b can be
px-^qy^-'K{^y-b')
Putting
this
represented by
= o,
where A
varies.
x=-^;
J'
= ^.
becomes
varies.
q.e.d.
The
is
degree of a curve
unaltered by projection.
This
(C)
system of concentric
a system of conies
line at
infinity
and the
Any
circle of the
{x-ff^{y-gf = ^,
where r
varies.
its
projection
is
)'> \a^ -A-n + aW + [h -g{n + )]' '^i'n which represents a system of conies touching each other at their meets with ri + a = o, which, either by analysis or on referring to
Fig. 32, is at
once seen
to
at infinity.
Q.E.D.
8o
PLANE GEOMETRY
(D)
[CH
othe;
at
F can
line
centric circles
and the
EF
Fig. 33.
of the
common
x-a.ias,
tangents at E, F,
['..
the poU
parallel to
EF.
Any
is
represented by
o,
Apply
[This
to this conic
is
the transformation
it
Tj
br) O] y= + a +a
rj
chosen because
makes
^-^ =
X{br)
a vanishing
line.]
The
or
conic becomes
J>(a^
cr]f
-btj- baf = o,
pa^^ This
is
2a^r, {pc
\i
- qb) + if {pc^ -
2qbc +
rb"^)
- \aW = o.
rb'^,
a circle
- 2qbc +
which give
And
the
conic becomes
i.e.
Xb^ ^ + = -,
-n^
which
is
'
circle,
wit)
the pole of
EF.
q.e.d.
projectioi
real.
We
coefficients
"!]
CONICAL PROJECTION
c
8i
Since
-r, = U^
c \% always real.
Since a"
is
-g
lines
is
real,
only
if
pr - q^
is
positive
which
2qxy + ry^
=o
are imaginary.
if
lies
Hence
If
the
projection
real
or
imaginary,
according as
real.
the
pr-q^ = o,
the lines
OE,
OF are
coincident,
and the
points
line joining
two of the
is
real
at least
real.
two of the
is
common
being
The proof
left to
the reader.
axes,
\-ry''--'r^{^y
44. Prove that any conic can be projected into a same time any given line to infinity. 45.
and
at the
circle
having the
is
unaltered
by
projection.
47.
its
polar
w.r.t.
point
48.
and
its
polar
w.r.t.
in the plane
projects into
w.r.t.
the conic
s.
a parabola.
50.
size,
and
If
Prove that any two angles can be projected into angles of given at the same time any given line can be projected to infinity. two variable lines make with two fixed lines a pencil of constant prove that the variable lines can be projected into lines
51.
cross ratio,
82
52.
PLANE GEOMETRY
line to infinity.
[CH,
and a given
53.
into a
circle,
directrix
x^
= 2y
into circles;
find
conies
jr^-2y+i=o;
into
that
= 2x ^;
T^j/^
2x+4=o
if
may be
60.
at
B, and
ox makes an angle 9
with
BD,
_
'
-a sin
6. ^+i^cos O.r]
r]
_ '
^~
+a
where 0$
is,
ABEAL COOBDINATES.
The use
of areal coordinates supplies another simple analytical
treatment of projection.
Definition.
If
ABC
is
if /' is
A BFC
A CI"A
ABAC
are called the areal
AAPB
triangle;
triangle
and
is
will
is
-r),
any
XYZ
if
Thus,
for
example,
anti-
It follows at once,
I,
r],
f of
III.]
CONICAL PROJECTION
83
THEOREM.
Ox, Oy, Oz are three mutually perpendicular lines
cuts
;
any plane
x, y, z are
them
at
A, B, C.
P is
the coordinates of
x
;
is
the length
rj,
F to
z
^,
^ are the
l>,
ABC.
If
OA = a, OB =
i.
OC=c,
then x = a^,
y = dr],
= c(; and
-+^ + - =
Fig. 34
Let
CF
the plane
AB OCC
cut
at
C.
Draw FJV
.'.
perpendicular to
OC
since
per-
is
BOA, FJV
is
BOA;
FJV
FIV=z.
T CO" CC
z
FC
/\BFA
t.BCA'
x = a^, y =
lyf\.
= c^; and
similarly
Q.E.D.
But
It
+ + f=i;
'?
X y z - + ^ + -=1.
a
c
Q.E.D.
should be noted
that,
may
ABC.
84
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
Fig. 35.
O
to
at
2',
or
is
be projected,
etc.
C.
OA = a, OA'^a,
^,
rj,
f
/]',
w.r.t.
the triangle
ABC
P
w.r.t
z'
Then
,=, =
X
but x = at, X *
,
=at, ^
.
etc.
a^
tn
ct
f.
.,
b'
a'
b'
c'
s,
which
It
is
Q.E.D.
is
is
affected
very slightly
if
an
fixed point
in Cartesians,
m.]
CONrCAL PROJECTION
is
85
whose equation
connection,
if
of the
same form,
in areals.
curve
^^
^ ij^ = C^ ?
who
is is acquainted with the theory of homogeneous aware that a large number of formulae, proved in
The
the
reader,
coordinates,
first
instance
for
Cartesians,
apply equally
to
generalised
coordinates.
The equation
monic
In
fact,
descriptive
properties
It is
change of coordinates.
connection
is
of a projective nature.
Fig. 36.
draw OX,
OY
x+y + z=
of
be the coordinates of any point P in the plane and let ^, -q, be the areal coordinates
:
F
Let
w.r.t.
AJBO.
oF
plane
w.r.t.
XOY
r
at
F'
and
let
X^,
Y-^
be the
coordinates of P'
OX, OY.
Then
Also
X,
Xi
Y,
= ii,
Fi
171,
yi
= ni,
I-
2i
= Ci.
by the theorem on
p.
83;
X,
Therefore,
Jfj,
if ^1,
fi
traces
-q,
= .
then
86
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH. r
Therefore the curve /(|, jj, C) = o may be regarded as the conic projection of the curve /{x,y, i) = o, which establishes the coi
nection mentioned above.
61.
(Cartesians),
62.
(areals).
What
between
U
$
V
V
w
C
ABO)
w.r.t. 0,
on the plan
z=J,
64.
is
a rectangular hyperbola.
grounds.
\/^
+ \/w^= ABO)
w.r.t.
O, on
the plan
z=l,
65.
is
a parabola.
In Fig. 36, the position of any point P in the plane OBA obtain a geometrical construction to determine the point which oP meets the plane XOY, which is parallel to xoy.
given
66.
in the plane
ABC
OB
67.
AB
AC, Al
a poin
obtain
;
represent
is
;
is
CAB
VP
DAB.
CHAPTER
THE
To
find the first
IV.
CONIC.
it
is
necessary to go bacl?
is
discovery
attributed to
a disciple of employed it to
Duplication
Plato,
solve
named Menaechmus (350-330 b.c), who the famous Delian problem, known as the
His researches were, however, very
to the barest elements
c'',
of the
Cube.
of
the parabola
y'^
= ax, and
with
its asymptotes. The earliest writer known to have regarded the conic as a section of a cone was Aristaeus (circa 320 B.C.); while the first systematic treatment was given by Euclid (323-284 B.C.),
in a book now lost. This formed the basis of the famous Kwvi/ca of ApoUonius (247-205 b.c), which deservedly gained him among the ancients the title of the " Great Geometer." It contains a
conic,
The
sense
example by
at
which
is
a point
infinity,
was developed
by the ,genius
infinity,
of
Desargues.
By
and the
at
infinity,
conjugate lines
special
case
of
88
PLANE GEOMETRY
The
principal value of the process of projection
is
[CH.
the link
it
affording, as
does,
category of
to the conic,
Much
method
is
due
which
is
identified
with the
name
It is
57],
(p.
163),
The method adopted due to Chasles, who, acting on the suggestion of M. Delbalat, one of his former pupils, was the first to point out the ease with which the descriptive properties of the conic can be developed from this basis. For more detailed
unnoticed for another two thousand years.
in
the
present
chapter
is
historical
information,
the
reader
is
referred
to
Chasles' Aper^u
Historique,
Conies.
and
Dr.
Taylor's
Geometry of
Definition.
Any
(i)
it
The
conic
is
called a hyperbola,
if
of projection
is
real,
this
case
arises
when the
The
conic
is
called a parabola,
if
the conic.
This
circle.
will
happen
if
the vanishing
line
(3)
The
conic
is
called an ellipse,
if
it
at
imaginary points.
If the vertex of projection is real, this case arises when the vanishing line cuts the generating circle at imaginary points.
This definition
may be put
circle,
in another form
Imagine a cone,
whose base
cone.
O Z
let
is
a plane
cut the
a conic.
If the
plane
is
called
an
ellipse;
IV.]
THE.CONIC
89
conic
if
is an open curve, with one branch, and is called a parabola the plane through O, parallel to L, meets the base circle at real
Fig. 37.
is
is
called
a hyperbola.
Any
circle
is
which may be
imaginary [see p. 3]. And from any point, there can be drawn to any circle two, and only two tangents, which may be real, coincident or imaginary. Both these
properties are easily proved by analysis
:
and owing
to the analytical
I.,
any method
a curve
as defined above,
it
is
at
only two
to
Moreover
it
proved, in
Theorem
:
second degree
necessarily a conic
and
it
may be shown,
fairly easily,
by analysis
degree (see
p.
202),
but
it
does
is
not
agree
with
the
development of the'
subject, as
deals with the theory of the foci, from which this important property-
may be
[p.
136].
9
Definition.
.
PLANE GEOMETRY
If
[CH
a variable line
is
fixed conic
/"w.r.t.
at
H, K; then
is
the locus of
is
and
THEOREM
(i)
52.
cr,
If the
conic
2
is
is
any pole
w.r.t.
ir.
and
polar
w.r.t.
(2)
The
polar of a point
w.r.t.
a conic
is
a straight
line
real or imaginary, of
Fig. 39.
Let a variable line through T' cut 2 at K: and let Q be the harmonic conjugate of P w.r.t. H, K. Then, by definition,
(i)
the locus of
is
the polar of P.
for
o-,
{HK; PQ]
is
Therefore since
harmonic, {kk; pq) is also harmonic. is a fixed point, q traces out the polar of /.
w.r.t.
is
ol
w.r.t.
tr.
'v]
(2)
THE^CONIC
The
polar of P, being the projection of a straight line,
91
viz.
the polar
of/
:
w.r.t.
o-,
is
of
PHK touches
therefore
coincides with
K at
the point
on the polar
locus.
from a geometrical standpoint, applies only to outside 2 but since the theorem admits of an analytical treatment, which takes no account of whether P lies
this proof,
Now
lies
outside 2,
it
follows that
is
the theorem
is
true for
all
positions of P.
[This
Continuity.]
point
point
(2,
through a
a line
on a
on p.
proof
is
The
left
to the reader.
circle.
See Part
I.,
Definitions.
(i)
Two
Two
If A,
w.r.t.
a conic, passes
the conic.
lies
w.r.t.
lines
on
the conic.
(3)
w.r.t.
B,
PQP
conic,
the
ABC,
PQR
are
called
conjugate
vertices of a
of the opposite
the conic.
THEOREM
Two
conjugate
lines,
54.
which meet
at T, are
;
harmonically conjugate
to the conic
to the tangents
it.
w.r.t.
The proof
[See Part
is I.,
left
to the reader.
74.]
92
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
The
is
55.
formed by any four collinear points of the pencil formed by their polars
w.r.t.
any conic.
is
The proof
[In Part
angular.]
left
to the reader.
75,
I.,
THEOREM
56.
:
T
is
is
other point
meets TA.
harmonic.
_T
Fig. 40.
Let
TC
cut
The
.'.
polar
AB of T
at
{i.e.
Q.
AB)
passes through
D.
is
the polar of
and
therefore
TC.
by the
definition,
.'.
QB>}
is
is
is
harmonic.
a harmonic pencil.
a harmonic range.
q.e.d.
NOTE ON METHOD.
The
to
way
in
which
of
The
application
some
however>
been read.
is
and
to
if it
required to prove
that
{
that
PQ = QR,
may be
simplest
show
PQRv>
is
IV.]
THECONIC
co
93
harmonic, where
PQ;
and more
^ QR
is
constant,
it
may be
easiest to prove
.
that
if
or again, FQ FS = FJi'^, { PQRco } is of constant cross ratio QFF^} = {RFS'x,]. { To prove two or more lines parallel, it may be useful to employ
;
the idea that they concur at a point at infinity, or that their poles
w.r.t.
it
some conic
lie
on a diameter.
To
prove a range
is
harmonic,
sometimes possible to connect it by a pencil with a harnionic system of points on a conic, which are formed by any two conjugate
is
chords.
[Theorem
58.]
If a property is
it
may be
suggestive
draw an
ideal
figure
at
containing
the
in
infinity
drawn
chord of contact.
represented as an actual tangent to the curve which every diameter must pass, is sometimes
it
is
at a point, through
helpful.
Or,
may
be taken to represent a projection of the actual figure, with the If the property is of line at infinity projected into a finite line. figure then indicates a more general a projective nature, this new
theorem, of which the given property
this general theorem
is
is
a particular case;
and
been removed.
Prove Theorem
53. 54.
2.
3.
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem
P,
;
55.
4.
are
w.r.t. a conic
is
the pole
of
PQ
prove that
a conic passes through a fixed point 5. A variable prove that the tangents at P, Q meet on a fixed line.
6.
PQK is a chord PQ of
self-conjugate triangle.
TA,
TB
line to
a given conic
are the tangents from a variable point 7" on a fixed passes through a fixed point. prove that ;
AB
a given point on the base BC of a fixed triangle ABC; 7. at B, C w.r.t. any conic touching AB, prove that the polar of
is
AC
is
a fixed
8.
line.
2" is
FQ
TQ
of a conic
is
if
tangent intercepted by
TB,
bisected at
point of contact,
prove that
it
is
parallel to
FQ.
94
9.
PLANE GEOMETRY
QR
;
[CH.
conic
is a fixed chord of a conic ; /" is a variable point on the prove that the harmonic conjugate of the tangent at P w.r.t.
PQ,
10.
PR
The hypotenuse
if Z? is is
BC
H,
K;
the pole of
AC, prove
that
w.r.t.
AC
bisects
;
HAK.
if
11.
PQR
a self-conjugate triangle
a conic
lies
is
inside
parallel to
QR
bisected
P.
12.
Given a point
and a
number
of self-conjugate triangles
13.
PQR
can be drawn.
w.r.t.
PA,
PB
a conic
the polar of
at
PB
B
H,
K;
S
is
on Z2
15.
w.r.t.
is
concurrent with
AB,
-
OA,
OB
;
are
tangent at
at 0.
16.
T' is
of a conic eoLually inclined to the prove that the pole of lies on the normal
two chords
AB
A A
AT;
P,
P,
to a given
a.t
conic
w.r.t.
angle
T is PTQ
PQ
is
of a conic
meets
PQ
at
//;
RS
prove that
Tff
RTS.
;
18.
at
will
is a quadrangle; AB, CD meet at . AC, meet prove that a conic drawn through G to touch AD, BC at A, B touch EG.
;
ABCD
BD
AB,
Three conies are drawn through a common point to touch at B, C; BC, BA at C, A CA, CB at A, B prove that the tangents at to the conies meet BC, CA, AB respectively in
19.
AC
T\s
;
PQ of a
conic
point
{
K of the
}
H; QK
meets
TP
at
prove that
TH PL
21.
is
harmonic.
variable chord
PQ
RS
at
of a given conic
at
a fixed point
's
the tangents at P,
cut
RS
H,
prove that
ffff-^jfT'
IV.]
THE 4ONIC
B
meet
at right angles at at Q,
95
22. Two tangents to a conic at A, the tangent at any other point meets
D
A
AB,
AD
;
R;
prove that
DR
bisects
PDQ.
23.
meets
lies
T is the pole of a chord PQ of a conic the bisector of PTQ PQ at /T; prove that the pole of any other chord through If
24. conic touches tlie sides BC, CA, AB of a triangle at P, Q, prove that AP, BQ, CR are concurrent.
25.
ABC
is
tangents at
points.
26.
Cj, C2
its vertices
a triangle inscribed in a conic prove that the meet the opposite sides in three coUinear
;
A
;
AB of a triangle a.\.Ai,A^;
Bi,B2;
are concurrent.
27.
the conic
line.
a fixed line L cuts a fixed cone in prove that the locus of the pole of L w.r.t. cr is a straight
28.
;
B,
are conjugate points w.r.t. a conic S; P is any point R ; prove that QR passes through
ABC,
PQ,
PR T
is
cut
PQR are tv^'o triangles self-conjugate w.r.t. the same conic BC at Q, R' AB, AC cut QR at B', C prove that
;
;
;.
RB'C'Q]= R'BCQ}.
30.
is
PQ
of a circle 2, which
is
projected
into a conic
/ of
being the vanishing line. Prove that the projection a point such that every chord through / of cr is bisected at t.
30,
PQ
31. 32.
what
will
TP,
;
TQ
\i
project into?
AC,
BD are
;
at .5 in
X AB
M,
M N
;
^C;^
prove that L,
33.
N are
A
coUinear.
Two
chords PQ,
any chord
RT meets
RS of a PQ aX H\
w.r.t.
the conic
;.
PSQ = go,
SQ
are
the bisectors of
HST.
57.
THEOREM
A, B, C,
[Chasles' Theorem.]
a,
b,
c,
D
:
d are
a variable point
on the conic
^ is
Then the
96
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
cros;
P{ABCD]
is
is
:
constant:
of the
range t{abcd}
constant
thes(
two cross
Regard the conic as the projection of a circle. Denote by dashes corresponding points in the plane of
circle.
the
If
is
the
point of contact of
are equiangular
\i.e.
/,
the pencils
F{A'B'CD'],
are
T{A'B'CD'}
.-.
the
corresponding angles
equicross.
and therefore
.'.
q.e.d.
ta. th<
TA
is
the meet of
t,
a,
is
i.e.
the point
by Theorem
55,
the range
f{aicd}
equicross
with
pencil
T{ABCD}
or
P{ABCD},
and
is
therefore constant.
Q.E.D.
And
P{ABCD\
q.e.d.
IV-]
THE
If
t:ONIC
97
Definition.
(i)
^, B,
is
C,
are
P{ABCD]
conic, such that any other point on are called a harmonic system of points
on.
four
points
is
on the conic.
(2) If a, b,
is
then
conic.
tha.t p{aicd} any other tangent to the conic, d are called a harmonic system of tangents to the
c,
is
THEOEEM
(i) If
58.
then A, B, C,
(2)
two chords AC, are conjugate Hnes w.r.t. the conic; form a harmonic system of points on the conic. Conversely, if A, B, C, form a harmonic system of points
BD
on the
conic, then
AC,
BD
(i)
A
lies
meet
BD
at
T: and
and
let
be any
point
^C
:.
both on
is
BD
AT and
therefore
is
{TBED)
harmonic.
[Th. 57]
Now
P{ABCD]=A{ABCD)
= A{TBED\;
.'.
P{ABCD]
is
is
harmonic.
to the reader.
q.e.d.
(2)
34.
The proof
of the converse
(2).
left
Prove Theorem 58
P,
35.
tangents from P,
to the conic. D.G.
II.
to the conic
98
PLANE GEOMETRY
[C
THEOREM
59.
is
MN of TN, MN
a conic
any
line cuts
tl
then
By
Chasles'
Theorem,
:.
M{MP^P^N}=N{MP^P^N).
}
M{ Q^P^P^R
.
= N{RP,P^Q^ }
,
:.
Q^P,.P^R.RQ^=-Q^P^.P^R.RQ^.
case of a
p.
This
is
special
Desargues (see
36. 37.
298).
is
59.
BC,
38.
ABC CA, AB
{
is
prove that
M, N; TLBC\ = {PQ,NM\.
;
PQ BC
meei
at 7
PQ,
chord
PP
39.
PP at P
O
is
PQ,
w.r.
the conic at
bisects
(2
BA
is
PQ.
IV.]
THE eONIC
PP\
to
99
40.
line
through
parallel
the tangent at
cuts
PH=HK.
41.
QQ,
QP
at
H,
K
^
prove that
BC;
5
conies 5i, 52 touch each other at 5, C; is the pole of S are four points on AB, the tangents from which to S^ meet at P^, Q^, P S^ and P^, 02, .ffj, ^g prove that
Two
P, Q, P,
^C
\PiQiB^S,}
42.
= {P,Q,R,S,
are five points on a given circle, prove that
ABODE
A{BCDE}=g^.
43.
PP, QQ'
QQ!
is
a line through
at If,
parallel to
PB
cuts
prove that
Qff=ffQ:.
a triangle inscribed in a conic; Oj is the pole of through Cj cuts BC, AC at M, N prove that M, N are conjugate points w.r.t. the conic.
44.
;
ABC
PQ
AB
any
line
45.
is
a chord of a conic
MN of O
is
any point on
a parallel through
O
;
to
MQ cuts MP, MN
the normal
PQ
is
any
B,
46.
A;
prove that
is
OB = BA.
if
at
M are conjugate
M.
OP, OP'
LMN
NM are
LN and
equally inclined to
the normal at
47.
are
is
chord
OB
if
OA
two chords of a conic, equally inclined to the the chord perpendicular to OB, prove that
PP
AB.
T A
is
MA^
conic parallel to
MN at
of a conic
//,
a chord
PQ
of the
B, prove that
HI^ = HP.HQ.
49.
conic
is
inscribed in a parallelogram
is
cut harmonically
PQ
is
the tangents at P,
51.
AB
AB
A
A
sides
of a
quadrilateral.
Deduce from
at
M, M'
prove that
PM.PM
of the conic
constant.
51.]
is
BC of a
;
conic
a chord
QR
cuts
AB, AC, BC
M, N, P
prove that
PLANE GEOMETRY
54.
[CH
;
A, B,
C,
D,
u.,
/8,
y, S represen
to
DA
provi
thatPi^PCZ.}=^.^g^.
[Pappus' Theorem.] A, B, C, D are four fixed points on a P is a variable point on the conic ; a, /?, y, S are the lengths of the perpendiculars from P to AB, BC, CD, DA, prove thai
55.
conic
^^
56.
is
constant.
[Desargues' Theorem.]
ABCD
is
= {PR'Q'P'} = {P'Q'R'P};
57.
ABC,
PQR
PQ,
PR
cut
BC
at
Q, R'; AB,
AC
OPP'
cut
QR
at B',
prove that
58.
{rb'cq\={r:bcq}. AA' of
is
a conic
is
another
Q{AA'PP'}={AA'00'},
CENTRAL PROPERTIES.
When
a circle
is
cr,
vanishing line
infinity w.r.t.
will
w.r.t.
cr.
now be
proved.
THEOREM
60.
Fig. 45.
If
is
w.r.t.
chord through
is
bisected at C.
IV.]
THE ONIC
dots.]
by
Let
HCK
line
at
infinity
in
the
(ideal) point Y.
Then
Definitions.
(i)
{^HCKY^
..
is
harmonic;
Q.E.D.
HC=CK.
w.r.t.
The
a conic
is
called the
(3)
Any chord through the centre of a conic is called The tangents to a conic from its centre are
a diameter.
called
the
asymptotes of the conic. are called (4) Conjugate lines through the centre of a conic
conjugate diameters.
(5)
is
conjugate to a diameter
is
called
at right angles,
it
is
THEOREM
The
on a diameter.
61.
lie
Fig. 46.
Let concur
Let
HK
F
parallel
chords,
which
be the mid point of HK. Since {HVKa.} is harmonic, the polar of a passes through V. V lies on a fixed line, viz. the polar of a, which is a diameter,
since a
is
a point at infinity.
q.e.d.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
THEOREM
(i) If
62.
conic,
PCP\ BCD'
IfK
is
is
are
centre C, then
(2) If
PCI'' bisects
chords parallel to
DCD'.
it
then
HK
bisected at
at
N,
at P,
to the conic,
and
DCD'.
'P:
x-^y,
Fig. 47.
(i)
HK
DCD
.'.
meet the
line at infinity at
/?,
7.
7.
parallel to Z'CZ)'
Now
of /Sy
C^
is
.'.
{HJVKy}
.-.
harmonic;
Q.E.D.
HN=NK.
(i),
(2)
since
is
HK passes
CP and
.'.
And
at
since y
is
the pole of
If to'CP is bisected by CP, by (i). PCP', yP and yP' are the tangents
P, P'.
But the lines yP, yP', yCD, and are therefore parallel.
Definition.
If the
yKH concur
chord
at
HK
is
PP' and
meets
it
N, then
HN
PP.
IV.]
THE CONIC
103
59.
Prove by projection that the centre of a conic is inside, on, or outis an ellipse, parabola or hyperbola.
60. If two chords of a conic bisect each other, prove that each must be a diameter.
61.
C is T
;
CP
bisects
one chord
parallel to
CD
CD
pole of a chord
of
PQ
63.
prove that
is
TE
The
that
PQ
/",
prove
64. Prove that the cross ratio of the pencil formed by four diameters of a conic is equal to that of the pencil formed by the four conjugate diameters. 65. PP' is a diameter of a conic, Q is any point on the curve; prove that QP, QP' are parallel to a pair of conjugate diameters.
66. PGP' is a diameter of a conic, centre QV is the ordinate from any point Q on the curve to PP'; the tangent at Q meets CP at T; prove that CV.CT=CP2.
;
67.
Given a point
and a
circle 2,
prove that
as centre.
2 can be
pi-ojected
CA,
[
CB
conic
T' is the
pole of a chord
PQ
is
from
69.
a line
CA; prove that PN, QN are equally inclined to TN. QV\% the ordinate from a point g on a conic to a diameter PP through P parallel to the tangent at Q cuts QV, QP' ^\. H, K
to
prove that
70.
PH=HK.
is
PP'
the tangent at
71.
a diameter of a conic ; the tangent at any point R meets at Q; prove that PN=NQ. ; meets P in
PR
is
PN
is
the polar of
w.r.t.
a conic, centre
diameter conjugate to
72.
CP
parallel to p.
The normal
QR
at a point
on a conic
is
an ordinate
diameter
73.
PP;
is
prove that
QR
bisects
PQP-
QQ
Two
is
prove that
74.
CL
CM= CP".
a fixed diameter PP, meet the tangent at P in K, K' prove that the other tangents from K, K' to the conic intersect on a fixed line.
75.
CA,
AB of
a triangle at
P,Q,R;
lies
A'
is
the mid-point of
BC
prove that
(2)
line
through
parallel to
BC,
AA',
QR
AA'
are concurrent.-
104
76.
ri^flLiML
<jr.wivijms.i
L*-"-
AB,
AC
AB meets
to
.<4C at Z)
if /" is
the pole of
BC, prove
PD
;
is parallel
AB.
77.
is
a variable
line
through
R,
ax
PR. PR is constant. the line joining P to 78. T is the pole of a chord PQ of a conic K prove any point R cuts the conic at H; QH cuts the polar oi R
Pm
Q,
PQ,
PQ
;
prove that
aX.
on TR.
fixed point 6* is
From a
;
drawn a
at P, (2
Z*^,
2^ are
is
that
--i_+LP,
Q,
ON OM
constant.
80.
w.r.t.
a conic
if
the mid-point of
S.
i".
PQ,
lies
on S, prove that
is
PQ
is
parallel to
an asymptote of
;
81.
PQ
fixed diameter of
a conic
Z)
is
a fixed point on
if
Two variable
chords
DH,
DK cut pole of HK
PQ
is
at
H', A";
Pff^QK',
prove
a straight
line.
THE PARABOLA.
If the vanishing line touches the generating circle, the projected
is
and the centre of the parabola, defined as the pole of the line at
infinity,
is
a point at
infinity,
viz.
the
point of
contact
infinity.
By
taking account of
infinity,
is
it.
From Theorem
of parallel chords
of a
parabola
lie
on a
straight
line
passing
a point at
infinity.
Consequently
all
of a parabola concur at a
common
point at infinity
and are
therefore parallel.
THEOREM
63.
chord
at
FQ of a parabola
and
PQ
at
N;
then
TV= VN
and
IV.]
THE ^ONIC
(ideal) line at infinity
los
at the (ideal)
and
let
I'Q meet A
at
e.
Fig. 48.
Since
TVa
T at
JV,
TN;
Vo. } is
harmonic.
Q.E.D.
TV=VN.
through
.
T
,
.
passes
,
i,
the polar of
passes
through T\
. .
the polar of
is
To.;
{PQ
.-.
iVe}
is
harmonic.
Q.E.D.
at P,
PN=NQ.
82. If PQ is a chord of a parabola, prove that the tangents meet on the diameter bisecting PQ.
83.
If
PQ, P'Q
PP",
84.
are two parallel chords of a parabola, prove meet on the diameter bisecting PQ.
that
What
property
is
HCKD
THA
What
property
is
finite parallel
tangents.
:
87.
if
Deduce a property of
circumscribes a conic, the three lines joining pairs of opposite vertices are concurrent.
88.
is
a hexagon
the theorem
ABC
/' is
conic
PL,
PM, PN,
at C, then
PL
.
,, PN.PX
,'
PM
P to BC,
CA,
AB
is
constant.
io6
89.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[c
T is
PQ
must be a parabola.
90.
A, B,
is
a variab
at B', C
PB,
PC
prove that
91.
AB' -^^
is
constant.
of a parabola; any diamet( the pole of a chord at P, Q, R and the curve at V; prove thi VP.VQ=VR^. [Let a be the point at infinity on the curve, and no
is
HK
HK
that ff{//VJ^u.}=JC{//VJi:a}.']
92.
r
TP,
is
PQ PQ
PQ
of a parabola
any other
tangei
cuts
TQ
PQ.
is
H,
K;
prove that
HK
T
is
parallel to
93.
TP,
that
94.
T TQ
T
any diameter cu
at
P\
and a
line
through
parallel to
PQa.tR;
pro\
PR = RQ.
is
of a parabola
a line through
parallel to
at
H;
[If
95.
at
TR
is
meets Pi
harmonic.
y is PQ
it
PQ, prove
that
{PH
VQ\
bisecting
that
T \% its pole any tangent cuts TP, TQ at H, K prov TH=KQ. [Use Chasles' Theorem.] 96. ABC is a fixed triangle circumscribing a parabola a variabl
;
AB
at X, Y, Z
prove that
XV ^ YZ
is
constani
a triangle circumscribing a parabola ; BC is bisecte prove that any other tangent to the parabol cut in two equal segments by the sides of the triangle.
is
;
ABC
98.
parabola
is
ABC,
;
touching B^
construct
its
AB.
is
PQ
a diameter meet
at
through
A
Y
;
at X,
line.
variable tangent to a parabola cuts two fixed tangent prove that the locus of the mid-point of XY is a straigh
101.
PQ
is
a chord of a parabola
at
PQ
in
N,
th
curve in
in if
prove that
-pT7-=-X77)-
1V-]
THE CONIC
THE HYPERBOLA.
107
is
infinity.
Consequently an ellipse has two imaginary asymptotes, and a hyperbola has two real asymptotes. In the case of the parabola,
the two asymptotes are each coincident with the line at infinity.
The
existence
of the asymptotes
is
perceived
most simply by
A number
of elementary properties
may be
THEOREM
Any two
conjugate
to
64.
asymptotes
and,
conversely,
any
two
lines
Fig. 49.
This
is
THEOREM
If a tangent at a point
at
65.
H, K; then
This
is
HP=PK.
Theorem
56.
io8
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
THEOREM
Conjugate diameters
of a
inclined to the asymptotes.
66.
rectangular
hyperbola
are
equallj
The
proof
is
left
to the reader.
[Use Theorem
64.]
THEOREM
at
67.
F, P'
then
CP. CP'
is
constant.
<.*'
^*,T'I
Fig.
'50.
Let
/8,
on the hyperbola, so
that C/3,
Cy
are tangents.
Draw any
close to
CP,
Cy
Cy
we have
{CPpQ} = {yPCQ};
.
CP.I3Q
yP'.CQ'
/3p-'-yQ"
" CQ~ CP" cp.cp'=cq.cq:
CP. CP'
is
CP _CQ
:.
:.
constant.
Q.E.D.
IV.]
THECONIC
109
Corollary.
A variable tangent to a hyperbola makes with the asymptotes a triangle of constant area.
102.
103. 104.
Prove Theorem
66.
67.
is
Prove that
each,
asymptote of a hyperbola
;
a self-conjugate
diameter.
105.
T is
H and PQ
at
R, so that
.
TH=HR. What
the
PP' is a diameter of a rectangular hyperbola; Q is any point on the curve; i)rove that PQ, P'Q are equally inclined to the asymptotes.
107.
is
HK of a
;
hyperbola
TH, TK,
HK
one
prove that
PR=RQ.
;
ABC
is
a variable
PB, PC meet
A
;
parallel to
prove that
AB'
-^-^, is constant.
A,
B
is
is
a variable
;
PA,
PB
at A', B'
prove
of constant length.
is
PP'
any chord
PQ
meets the
through
P
Q
RQ=QT.
111.
A A
line
through
parallel to an
the curve at
112.
K, K'
if
is
the mid-point of
RR\
prove that
OR^=OK.OK'.
113.
T
P,
is
MN of
K
line parallel to
MN
curve at
114.
prove that
BP .BQ=BR\ P
\
are two points on a hyperbola, centre C; lines through CQ^. prove that CH. parallel to the asymptotes cut CQ at H,
CK=
115. P, Q are two points on a hyperbola, whose asymptotes are OPjQi, OP2Q2; if OP1PP2, OQ1QQ2 are parallelograms, prove that
OPi.OP2=OQi.OQ2.
[Let
;S,
y be
and note
that
116. 117.
Deduce Ex.
is
115 from
Theorems
65, 67.
its
asymptotes
as axes,
xy = c^.
no
PLANE GEOMETRY
THE QUADRANGLE AND QUADRILATERAL.
[Cl
THEOREM
If
68.
system
of conies
is
eircumscribe
given quadrangle,
w.r.t.
th
a self-conjugate triangle
each coni
Fig. 51.
Q
Theorem
76,
The
Part
I.
proof
is
page 168,
ir
THEOREM
69.
Fig. 52.
'^]
THE CONIC
III
If a system of conies are inscribed in a given quadrilateral, the diagonal line triangle is a self-conjugate triangle w.r.t. each conic of the system.
The proof
Part
I.
is
Theorem
70.
77,'
page 169, in
THEOREM
If a quadrangle
is
is
inscribed in a conic,
and
if
a quadrilateral
Fig. 53.
-VQ
The proof
Part
I.
is
Theorem
78,
page 168, in
It is interesting to see
can be deduced from the general theory of the complete quadrilateral circumscribing
Let A, B, C,
u.
let
P'QR' be
PLANE GEOMETRY
Let P,
Since
^-j
[CH
the
quadrilateral.
FQ
meets
PQ
Similarly
QF,
FF
at 7,
P'Q
is
parallel to
FQ;
are parallel to
QR, RP.
Fig. 54.
Since
FAa; QBa;
Co.
are
collinear
sets
of points,
FA,
QB, R'C
Hence we have
THEOREM
Through
a triangle
the the
vertices
71.
of
triangle
FQR,
circumscribing
sides
FQF
the opposite
forming
w.r.t.
then
FQF
is
a self-conjugate triangle
parabola;
its
meet
the
curve at
118. 119. 120. 121.
69.
70.
What theorem
that, in Fig.
54,
A,
Q',
C and
IV.]
THE CONIC
*
113
THEOREM
72.
self-
If a conic passes
conjugate triangle
C,
D, which
lie
PQR
is
ABCD.
A, B, C,
has
PQR
as a self-conjugate triangle.
Fig. 55-
Join
AP, AQ,
AR
C,
cutting
QR, RP,
PQ
at
P, Q,
R'.
w.r.t.
Take points ,
A.
is
Now
is
the pole
QR;
therefore
it
since
{PP' ;
AB)
harmonic, as the conic passes through A, Similarly the conic passes through C, D.
Since
[APBP')=-i^{AQCQ),
.'.
PQ
BC
i
BC, P'Q
are concurrent.
.'.
passes through R.
Similarly
BD
passes through Q.
Since
:.
.'.
{AQCQ} =
= {ARDR'},
are concurrent.
triangle of the quadrangle
.'.
ABCD.
.".
has
PQR
as a
Q.e.d.
*
If
THEOREM
a,
73.
and has a
diagonal
fixed self-conjugate
d,
c,
d,
which
of the
touch
the
and p^r
first
is
the
line
triangle
*At
D.G.
II.
may be
omitted.
114
quadrilateral abed.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Further, every conic
triangle.
touching
a,
b,
c,
the reader.
Part
I.,
pages 168-9.]
Prove Theorem 73. Prove that two conies, which do not have double coni have one and only one common self-conjugate triangle.
124.
ABCD
AD ED
at in
a variable conic touches is a given quadrilateral prove that m and cuts EC, DC again at ^, B, a fixed point.
;
.
HK
125.
prove
AECD
any
line
is
ED
E
ri
through
cuts
AE, CD
at
Q,
R;
prove that
and
perpendiculars from R, P,
between
is
EC, CA,
w.r.t.
AE
any point inside the triangle AEC AO, EO, CO n at D, E, F; prove that DEF\% a self-conjugate triai
;
AECO.
;
chords AB, CD of a conic intersect at P, Q the poles of AD, EC prove that P, 0, Q are coUinear.
128.
Two
129.
What theorem
Given a
conic,
is
EC
as
line at infinity?
130.
show how to
ri
132.
Two
on a
fixed line.
133.
Two
;
variable chords
PQ,
RS
fi
point
cuts
PS,
QR
at Z,
prove
WL^-m
134.
'="^'""'-
chord to BE'.
;
AA', BE' axe two conjugate diameters of a conic AP, AQ meet A'Q, A'P aX H, prove that
PQ
is
is
HK
para
135.
is
common
and S^
chords
at Pi,
'
two conies
prove that ^
6"i,
52
line
through
cuts S^ at /"j, Qi
OPjOQi OPjOQ^
IV.]
THE CONIC
T is
the pole of a chord
at Q,
115
136.
HK of a hyperbola, centre C
at
TH,
TK
QR.
QR,
HK are
If
Q, R'
parallel.
137. 138.
With the
QR and
a parallelogram
a parallelogram
is
two quadrangles have the same diagonal points, prove that their eight vertices lie either on a conic or four by four on two straight lines. [Use Ex. 123.]
141.
If
142.
A,
conic
BP,
is
/',
PQ
Two
same
on a
conic.
[Use Ex.
141.]
What
is
.''
PQR
;
are chords
145.
outside
it,
from
146.
ABC
is
ti-iangle inscribed in
a conic
PQR can be
that
AP, BQ, CR
P, Q,
of a
triangle,
self-
conjugate
w.r.t.
a parabola
PQR
circumscribes
the parabola.
148.
is
ABC;
of the mid-point of
;
BC w.r.t.
is
the join
of the mid-points of
AB, AC.
of the cross-ratio theory of the conic arises
the converse of
**
The importance
largely from the
)i;
(I
Theorem 57 is true; which accordingly supplies a simple and fundamental descriptive test as to whether or not a given locus or envelope is a conic.
fact that
purely geometrical
method of proof
later
is
not at
all
easy,
and
is
i*therefore reserved to a
is,
ii6
character.
PLANE GEOMETRY
The
analysis of the dual
five
is
somewhat
longer,
how
a point equatioi
be determined from a given line equation ; and by the aid o piece of work, it is easy to complete the theorem (see also p. 2j
THEOREM
A, B, C,
Z' is
74.
D are
is
no three of which
is
are colli
;
P {ABCD\
constant
thei
locus of Z'
a conic through A, B, C, D.
-
'-
"
Let
^^
D, and be Q.
if it
does not
Then
But
.'. .'.
Q{ABCD}=P{ABCD) = Q{ABCD)
have a
is
Q{ABCD^, Q'{ABCD}
B, C,
common
corresponding
contrary to hypothesis.
q.e,
the locus of
Q is
This theorem
may be
which
is
H, Kax& two fixed points; HP^, HP^, HP^, ... and KP^, meeting at /"j KP^, ... are two pencils of lines throagh H, If the cross ratio of any four rays of the first peni P^, ....
se
lie
on a conic through H,
149.
is
indicated in Ex.
IV-]
THE
COiJIC
75.
117
THEOREM
a, b,
c,
are four fixed lines, no three of which are concurrent is a variable line such that p{abcd) is' constant; then /> the envelope of/ is a conic touching a, b, c, d.
Fig. 57.
Draw a
q,
d,
and
if
it
Then
q {abed]
by Chasles' theorem. But q{abcd], q {abed} have a common corresponding point. .'. b, c, d are concurrent, which is contrary to hypothesis.
.'.
= p {abed} q'{abd]
by hypothesis
the envelope of q
is
b,
e,
d.
Q.E.D.
This theorem
may be
stated
in
is
more
kp^,
/a,
...
k are two fixed lines; hp^, hp^, hp^, ... and kp-^, kp^, are two ranges of points on h, k whose joins are /j, /gj If the cross ratio of any four points of the first range is
envelope a conic touching
/>j,
p^ip^-,
ii8
PLANE GEOMETRY
following important property illustrates
The
in
the
application
will
Further examples
be
foi
Chapter IX.
THEOREM
A,
76.
/"
is
PB
is
a conic through A, B.
Fig. 58.
Draw any
line
let A-^
;
be
its
pole.
BA^ and
Similarly,
produce
to
meet
lines, for
AP^ BP^
at P-^
then AP^,
BP^
A,^ of
construct any
number
of pairs of lines
AP^, BA^.
polar of
all
the points
A-^^,
A^, A^,
...
lie
on the polar
/ of
A.
is
eq
formed by
their poles,
A{P,P,P,...}
is
a conic through A, B.
Q.E.I
IV.]
THE CONIC
taking A,
11,
119
at
infinity
By
The
149.
as
the
circular
points
and using
Theorems
54,
we have the
:
following:
k = o,
u-Xv = o,
of the lines
HA, HB,
the equations of
HP,
HP are
HA,
is
HC
If
H{ABCD}=K{ABCH},
H, K, A, B, C touches
151.
152.
HD
at H.
The
sides
is
AB,
AC
oi the triangle
ABC
and
AB^AC
A
is
153.
BC envelopes SC of a given
a parabola.
conic
;
on a
fixed conic,
a variable
prove that
BM, CL
meet
C.
;
154.
ABC is
a given triangle
/" is
AB
sX
Q,R;
BC
or
CA ?
L
envelopes a parabola.
A
;
variahle line
if
X, Y, Z
156.
^^
is
The
sides
AB,
AC
PP'
BC
Q;
BC.
-P,
is
any
is
drawn
parallel to
OQ
envelopes a parabola.
-P is a variable point on the base BC of a fixed triangle ABC R are the feet of the perpendiculars from P to AB, AC; prove QR envelopes a parabola. PQ, PR pass through fixed points 159. PQR is a variable triangle QR touches a fixed conic, and Q, R lie on fixed tangents to the conic
158.
Q, that
160.
A
A,
variable line,
drawn from a
;
AB,
AC
of a given triangle
161.
ABC at P, Q
its
PQ
on a fixed
line
prove that
AP,
BQ
asymptotes.
I20
162.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
line
is a segment of a is a. variable point on a fixed line ; passing through a fixed point, which subtends a constant angle find the locus of Q. at another fixed point
;
PQ
163.
The
D, E, P)
conic through , F;
D
;
prove that
lies
on a
fixed
164. [Newton's Theorem.] POQ, PO'Q are two angles of constant magnitudes 0, 0' are fixed points P moves on a fixed line prove tliat Q traces out a conic through 0, 0'.
;
165.
all
All the vertices, save one, of a polygon lie on fixed lines, and
;
so that
167.
ABC is a given triangle a variable line cuts AB, AC at X, Y, BX=Ay; find the envelope of XY. ABCD a trapezium of constant area A^ D are fixed points,
;
is
CD
AB
;
is
PQ
is
a chord of given
length
169.
prove that
AP,
BQ
meet on a
fixed conic.
ABC, PQK are two triangles inscribed in a conic; prove that their six sides touch a conic. and cut QR at B', [Let PQ, PR cut BC at Q, R' and AB, prove that {BQRC) = {B'QRC'}.1
^C
170.
/
;
is
L; A,
;
points
of
2 is
171.
prove that the locus and Z. a hyperbola, whose asymptotes are perpendicular to a diameter of the circle
PQ
ABP
AB
Z,
ABC
A
is
a triangle inscribed
in
a conic
vertices
meet the opposite sides in three points on a line moves on the conic, B, C being fixed, prove that L envelopes a
172.
if
conic.
line,
joining
poles w.r.t.
inscribed in the
173.
common
;
prove that the two given conies, touches a fixed conic self-conjugate triangle of the two conies.
;
is
w.r.t.
a given conic S^
Zj is the polar of P w.r.t. another given conic S^ prove that Zj, L^ meet on a fixed conic circumscribing the common self-conjugate triangle of S-^ and S^.
174.
lines,
A
and
a
variable line
its
is
moves so
lie
on two
fixed
find
its
envelope.
a variable chord of a given hyperbola. .<4 is a fixed through A perpendicular to cuts a line through P parallel to an asymptote at Z"; find the locus of P'
175.
AP
point
line
AP
'^]
THE ^ONIC
points on a fixed line, parallels are a given conic find their envelope.
;
,31
176.
w.r.t.
From
drawn
to their polars
177.
The
sides
AB,
AC
lies
of
a.
circumcentre of a parabola.
ABC
If the
on a fixed
prove that
BC
envelopes
178. Given the base and the difference of the base angles of triangle, find the locus of the vertex.
179.
lines
is
variable line
is
drawn from a
AB,
A,
AC B
Q
at P,
Q; prove
its
fixed point O to cut two fixed that the locus of the mid-point of
PQ
a hyperbola, having
180.
asymptotes parallel to
;
A. AC.
a.
is
variable point on
find the
the conic;
locus of Q.
a point on
PB
such that
PAQ
;
is
constant;
181. is a variable point on a fixed line the polar of P w.r.t. a given conic meets another given line at Q find the envelope of PQ.
;
182. P, Q are conjugate points w.r.t. a given conic ; PQ passes through a fixed point, and lies on a fixed line find the locus of Q.
183.
What theorem
Hne
is
obtained from
Ex.
182,
by regarding the
a
at infinity?
;
184.
P
;
is
is
fixed point
OP
is
harmonic
185.
at
JI
is
QR}
The
polars of a point
P w.r.t.
;
Prove that
in general
two straight lines can be drawn, parallel segments intercepted on either by two
variable
fixed lines
circle
and
two
AC,
188.
The
sides
AB,
envelope of PQ.
are given in position
and
BC
passes through
in
is
dividing
189.
BC PQR
a given
a self-conjugate triangle
a given conic
P,
lie
on
CP2, CP^ are two variable pairs of conjugate semithe order of points on the curve being /j, P^, P3, -P4 ; If P^P^P^P^ subtend a pencil of constant cross ratio at any point on the curve, prove that PxP<i envelopes a homothetic
190.
CP^, CP^
of an
diameters
ellipse,
ellipse.
122
191.
PLANE GEOMETRY
From
lines
[CH.
iv.
a variable point
H on
ABC,
HP,
HQ
;
are
;
drawn
to cut
BC,
(2)
touching
line
AC,
BC
mid-point R' of
(4)
L
is
PQR
and
192.
all
a variable triangle PQR of given shape is inscribed in a prove that the locus of the mean centre of constant masses at P, Q, R is in general six straight lines. What interesting
fixed
triangle,
theorem?
191.]
CHAPTER
V.
GENERAL PROJECTION.
The
contents of this chapter summarise the application to the geometry of the conic of the theory of the circular points first developed systematically by Poncelet, in the light of his discovery
of their connection with the foci.
of a central conic, the
to Apollonius,
The
is
name
of which
due
to Kepler,
was known
who proved
on the curve
The
a parabola
is
found
who
enunciates the
fundamental theorem that the distance of any point on the curve from the focus is proportional to its perpendicular distance from
a fixed line
(the
directrix).
Strange to say,
however,
it
this
was
by Newton
Lahire,
An
made by De
be regarded as the polar of the focus, and the focus as a point through which conjugate lines are at right angles. These ideas were elaborated
a pupil of Desargues,
that the directrix could
who saw
Steiner
Pliicker,
The
They were defined on an analytical basis, plained in Chapter I. and were employed to give expression to a definite analytical In view of this definition, their phenomenon (see page 26). geometrical usage is intelligible only in so far as it connotes an
analytical operation.
It is
been established.
The
be denoted
by
0),
<u'.
124
(i)
m,
0)'
PLANE GEOMETRY
Every
circle cuts the line at infinity at the
[CH.
same two
points
[page 25].
(2)
w, w', is
circle.
[Theorem
20.]
(3)
each other at
(4)
w'.
[Theorem
18.]
Any
meet
[Theorem
11.]
of
perpendicular
lines
are
each
must be
[Theorem
pair
lines
12.]
variable
and conversely,
two variable
lines
a constant angle.
[Theorem
11.
THEOREM
If
77.
C
is
is
Cm
of the circle.
C
.'. .'.
C(i),
Cw
to,
<o'.
by
definition,
Co,
C(o'
It
this supplies
another proof of
C<u' at
(o,
(3).
For every
all circles,
C touches
Cw,
w'
and
o),
therefore
having
to'.
THEOUEM
If a conic has
it
78.
two
pairs of perpendicular
conjugate diameters,
must be a
circle.
The asymptotes
.'.
[Theorem
64.]
the asymptotes must be the isotropic lines, by (5) .'. the conic passes through to, to'
.'.
the conic
is
circle.
q.e.d
v.]
GENERALPROJECTION
By assuming
that two conies cannot cut at
I2S
points,
it
is
C be the centre of the conic, and any point on the conic. Let PP^, PP^, PP^, PP^ be the double ordinates to the two pairs of perpendicular conjugate diameters. Then, since these
Let
ordinates are perpendicular to the diameters,
triangles,
.'.
we
have, by congruent
the circle centre C, radius CP, cuts the conic at five points; the conic must coincide with the circle.
q.e.d.
THEOREM
(i)
79.
Any
on the
circle) as centre.
circle,
Any
and
at the
same
time
any given
(not
infinity.
(3)
Any two
<o,
Fig. 59.
(i)
Let
AB
its
polar
w.r.t.
the conic.
;
of conjugate
lines
OA, OA'
OB,
OB
line
AOA', BOB'
and the
conic.
AB
O
to infinity.
is
new
Therefore
OA, OA'
OB, OB'
78, the
Theorem
as centre.
new conic
is
circle,
having the
q.e.d.
126
(2)
PLANE GEOMETRY
Let
[CH.
(i),
AB
we obtain
(3)
Let
points F, Q.
and the
AB
to infinity.
Then F,
at infinity,
Q
i.e.
project
id,
<d'.
into the
meets of a
circle with
the line
q.e.d.
THEOREM
(i)
80.
If a system of conies
have two
common
same two
is
concentric circles.
The proof
Corollary.
left
to the reader.
Any two
In
method of
general
projection,
is
best
first
of
all
to
Starting with a
known property
of the circle,
we proceed
to deduce
from
it
the
of the conic.
The
EXAMPLE.
GeneraUse by projection the theorem
:
if
two
FlG. 60.
circles are
conjugate points
w.r.t.
the other.
v.]
GENERAL WIOJECTION
Let A,
127
B be
orthogonally at C, Z>;
CJI,
CK
be the tangents
at
C.
Fm.
61.
Let
PBQ
shall
be any diameter of
S,^.
We
figure.
in the generalised
Now
C",
^1,
^2,
C,
and the
circular points
S-^,
coj,
w^,
and may
S^
cutting at
D\
0)/,
CK project into the tangents C H', CK' A harmonic Since HCK= 90, C{HK; (UjWj}
CH,
is
to 52', S-^.
therefore '{11',
K'
Oi'wj'}
is
also harmonic.
w.r.t. S^,
is
is
therefore
the
pole
of
<^{<^2
w.r.t.
S^.
intersection F',
of any line
w.r.t.
become the points of through B' with ^'2' and P', Q'
P,
S{.
Hence
Two
pole of
D,
aij,
w^;
if
the tangents at
Ccog,
and
if
is
the
w.r.t. S2,
is
cut by ^2 in two
S^.
Prove Theorem
80.
:
2.
What
and
if
at
if two circles touch conic-property can be deduced from meets them again at P, Q, then the any line through
tangents at P,
are parallel.
128
3.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Generalise by projection
:
[CH.
line
if
two
circles
Generalise by projection
if
two
circles intersect at
A, B,
the
AB
if
at right angles.
Generalise by projection
other two, then the tangents at their points of contact are concurrent.
6. Generalise by projection angle between the tangents at
:
if
two
is
circles intersect at
A, B,
the
tangents at .
7.
Generalise by projection
angles in the
same segment
of a circle
are equal.
8.
Generalise by projection
is
a right
angle.
if a variable circle touches externally 9. Generalise by projection two fixed circles at P, Q, then the tangents at P, Q to the fixed circles meet on a line, viz. the radical axis of the fixed circles.
r
10.
Generalise by projection
viz.
9,
PQ
passes
circles.
Generalise by projection
the locus of
its
if
fixed
circles,
centre
is
:
two conies.
if
12.
Generalise by projection
is
a con-
centric circle.
13. If three conies
have one
common
common
14.
Two
divided harmonically by
common
chord.
:
15.
Generalise by projection
if
PQ,
L,
PS
M,
S
:
are concyclic.
if
Generalise by projection
N are
points
on the
sides
BC, CA,
one
17.
AB
have
common
Generalise by projection
ABC is
C O
line.
;
a fixed triangle
if
a variable
circle passes
through
is
and has B,
locus of
18.
its
centre
is
a straight
{ABCD}
a harmonic range
in
is
AD
two
the
triangles
;
OBC, OAB,
respectively, and
two points on
OD
common
tangents
meet
at
D.
V-]
GENERAL PROJECTION
129
a fixed chord of a given conic 5 a variable line through A cuts S sx P, and ^C at Q; is the harmonic conjugate of Q w.r.t. P, P' prove that the locus of is a conic through A, B, C.
19.
is
;
BC
fixed point
Q Q
20. variable conic passes through two fixed points A, touches two fixed lines prove that the locus of the pole of
;
B
is
AB
and two
straight lines.
21.
common
22.
Prove that each pair of common chords of two conies meets a tangent in points which are harmonic conjugates w.r.t. the
fixed conies
;
points of contact.
have double contact with each other at the prove that any line touching one of them is cut by the others in a constant cross ratio.
Three
23. Prove that a system of conies circumscribing a given triangle can be transformed by projection and inversion into a system of straight lines. 24. A, B are two fixed points on a fixed conic P is a variable point on a fixed straight line PA, PB meet the conic again sA R, S find
; ;
;
the envelope of
25.
RS.
w.r.t.
Two
;
a conic S
is
AB
O, project A,
27.
into o,
cd'.]
polygon of 2 sides is inscribed in a conic if the joins of its opposite vertices concur at a point G, prove that the joins of the opposite vertices of the polygon, formed by the tangents to the conic at the vertices of the first polygon, also concur at G.
;
28.
Generalise by projection
lies
if
PQ
of a circle
on a fixed
line,
then
PQ
envelopes a parabola.
;
29. A triangle is inscribed in a conic S two of its sides pass through fixed points A, B if AB meets S at C, D, prove that the third side envelopes a conic, having double contact with S at C, D.
;
30.
point
Generalise by projection a variable circle passes through a fixed and touches a fixed line, then the envelope of the polar of another
:
fixed point
is
a conic.
possible to
and
to touch
a given
line /
which intersects
I
and
i".
I30
PLANE GEOMETRY
:
[CH
two circles touch at A PJi, QS an 32. Generalise by projection two chords such that A, P, Q and A, R, S are coUinear, then PR, Qt
;
are parallel.
33.
Two
conies
have
double contact
at
that
th(
the meets of
through four fixed points, prove tha lie on three fixed lines.
35. ABC is a triangle inscribed in a conic; prove that thi tangents at the vertices meet the opposite sides in three collineai
points.
circle
points
and
PQ
to infinity.]
36. H, are the poles of two chords PQ, that H, E, F, Q, B, S lie on a conic.
RS
of a conic
prov<
37.
Two
conies touch at
at
P
;
and cut
at
Q,
the tangent at /
meets
QR
T;
a.
line
through
PL,
T.
PM
M'
Generalise by projection
at
A,
at C,
a line cuts two concentric circles, the then AB, CD have the same
raid-point.
39.
circle
Generalise by projection
if
and cuts a given line at a given angle, then it touches a second fixed circle and the line is the radical axis of the two fixec
:
circles.
40.
fixed
points
A,
and passes through twc prove that the chord of contact passes througl:
and that
{AB
HK}
is
harmonic.
C,
system of conies pass through four fixed points A, B, to the system that the locus of the points of contact is a conic through Write down the dual theorem.
D
D
AB
prove
C,
42. C is the centre of a conic if Cu, Cw' are conjugate prove that the conic is a rectangular hyperbola.
;
lines,
43.
Three
conies
pass
through four
is
fixed
points
prove
that
common
44.
P,
a variable
conic
o-
5
//,
passes through P,
prove that
HK passes
fixed points,
and meets
45. Through a fixed point D, a variable conic is drawn havin; double contact with a fixed conic 5 prove that the chord of contac meets the tangent at Z) on a fixed line, viz. the polar of w.r.t. S.
;
v.]
GENERAL PHOJECTION
131
46.
AB
is
a.
common
;
if
P, P,
RS
inscribed
Prove by projection the harmonic properties of a conic in a quadrilateral and circumscribing a quadrangle. [Project the inscribed quadrangle into a parallelogram and the conic into a circle, and note that a cyclic parallelogram must be a rectangle.]
48. [Brianchon's theorem.] If a hexagon circumscribes a conic, prove that the joins of opposite vertices are concurrent. [If two of the joins meet at O, project the conic into a circle, having the
projection of
49.
as centre.]
PAQ, PER
;
points
RS
is
are chords of a fixed circle PQR; A, B are fixed a chord parallel to prove that QS passes through
AB
a fixed point.
50.
Two
a.t
conies touch
a.t
/" is
common
tangent
/-'
Q,
;
to the conies
51.
prove that
QR
The chords
;
concurrent
TW, WP,
RS', S'T,
52.
of a conic are PP", QQ', RR', SS', TT, a conic can be drawn to touch PQ, QR, RS, ST, prove that a conic can also be drawn to touch P'Q!, QR,
if
WW
TW'.
is
W'P'.
;
PQR
fixed in direction
PQ, PR are a triangle inscribed in a fixed conic prove that QR envelopes a conic having the same ;
The
sides
PQ,
PR
of a triangle
self-conjugate
w.r.t.
a given
H,
H',
K'
are harmonic
conjugates of H,
w.r.t.
PQ,
PR
respectively.
Deduce a
Write down
hyperbolas passing through 54. Prove that the locus of the centres of two fixed points and having their asymptotes parallel to two given hnes is a straight line.
55.
\5
s.
fixed point
a.t
Z' is
Q,
R;
AP
of
P
56.
w.r.t.
Q, R.
;
a conic ^2 is drawn a pole of a chord PQ of a conic 5; prove that one pair of common chords as asymptotes having TP, TQ of 5i and 52 is parallel to PQ.
is
132
57.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Two
and
conies S^,
w.r.t.
is
[a
AB
point
CD
six points
58.
is
which A, B,
is the pole c S^ cut at A, B, C, D; \i 5j and ^j respectively, prove that there exists w.r.t. 5i, S,^, and that th the pole of CD,
AB
C,
D, H,
lie
on a conic.
;
A variable conic touches two fixed lines at fixed points P\ find the locus c a chord of the conic, the pole of which is fixed
;
and Q.
59.
PQR
A
is
a triangle, self-conjugate
w.r.t.
a conic
in
prove tha
S, which ar
PQR.
and
variable conic passes through four fixed points A, B, C, 1 meet prove that z.i H, cuts two fixed lines AE,
BF
HK
CD
at
a fixed point.
i
The three pairs of opposite sides of 61. [Pascal's theorem.] hexagon, inscribed in a conic, meet at P, Q, E; prove that P Q, E are coUinear. [Project the conic into a circle and PQ t
infinity.]
62.
secants
prove
tangents
of
at
any
twi
PR, QS
meet on one of the common chords of, the twi two possible positions, o
is
chosen.
63.
two
variable conic passes through three fixed points and ha prove that it passes throug]
;
Two
is
;
their
common
chords
the fourth
common
tangent meets
ABC; PQ is BC
one
at
AF
66. C,
the harmonic
is
conjugate oi
AD
line
w.r.t.
AB, AC;
prove tha
A{FD PQ)
Two
;
harmonic.
same
at
C,
P,
Q and
cut
at
A, h
c
D
67.
PQ
A
;
AB,
AC
w.r.i
the conic, at B,
at
D
68.
C; the other Jangents from B, C to the conic mee prove that A, D are conjugate points w.r.t. the conic.
PR
Two parabolas touch at prove that PQ and cut at Q, ; are harmonically conjugate to the diameters through P of th
two curves.
v.]
GENERAL I%.OJECTION
PQ,
133
69.
noraial
PQ
70.
are two chords of a conic equally inclined to the chord prove by projecting Q, into oi, in!, that PQ, are harmonically conjugate w.r.t. and the tangent at P.
;
PQ PP
that
PP
Prove
can
be projected
B are two fixed points ; F is a variable point such that are conjugate lines w.r.t. a fixed conic o- prove that the locus of P is a conic through A, B. [Project cr into a circle having
71.
A,
PA,
PB
the projection of
as centre.]
Deduce, by taking A, B as the circular points, that the locus of a point from which the tangents to a conic are at right angles is a circle.
72.
polygon
is
^2
inscribed in a conic 5i and circumscribes a conic its vertices to any given point cut S^ at the
;
vertices of a
new polygon
this
polygon also
touch a conic.
73.
T
is
is
PQ
of a conic
a variable
HK
74.
prove that the locus of the mid-point a conic, having double contact with S.
sX.
TQ
H,
Generalise by projection
is a fixed point on CD is a given quadrilateral a variable point such that P{ACBE] = P{AEBD); prove that- the is locus of Z' is a conic circumscribing the triangle ABE, and having
ABCD
C,
as conjugate points.
THE
Definition.
(i) If a quadrilateral
is
FOCI.
from
to a conic,
and
if S,
H;
S, H' are the other two pairs of opposite vertices, then S, S', H' are called the foci of the conic.
(2) Further, the
lines
H and
axes
SH, S'H'
of the conic.
directrices polars of the foci w.r.t. the conic are called the parallel to the correof the conic ; and the chord through a focus sponding directrix is called the latus rectum.
(3)
The
(4) If
foci,
be confocal.
134
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
THEOREM
(i)
81.
Every Every
real
foci,
real
which are
lines through any focus of a conic and conversely two perpendicular lines through
lines.
Fig. 62.
(i)
0),
0)'
(hH
li'S^
real.
lines
meet
at a real point.
<oS,
[Th.
<o'S
i.]
(o'ff; toff,
meet
at real points, but not all four pairs, since the lines SS', etc., are
imaginary.
first
S,
pair
meet
at real points;
are real.
i^'S.
In that case,
foS,
(2) Since S,
ff
are real
and
S',
H'
Sff'
[Th.
V-]
GENERAL pfojECTION
the theory of the circumscribed quadrilateral, the meet is the pole of iota', i.e. the line at infinity, and
135
From
C
is
of SII, S'H'
Also Clf,
Therefore
CH'
[Th. 69.]
CH, CH"
But C{HH' ; coto'} is harmonic, therefore HCH' = ^0. Therefore the two principal axes are a real pair of perpendicular conjugate diameters. q.e.d.
(3) If
SP,
SQ
S{PQ_\
uiia)
PSQ = go.
Q.E.D.
q.e.d.
Conversely,
\{
tow'}
is
harmonic;
[Th. 54.J
and
therefore SP,
Fig. 63.
Corollary
i.
The
whose
The proof
Corollary
is
left to
the reader.
2.
is
conic
a curve which
is
slightly,
if
is
136
PLANE GEOMETRY
say.
[CH.
at
The
lines
i^HH\
iaHS',
H'CS'
with
0)0)';
ta
and
coincides
with If.
finite point,
one focus
at its centre,
which
is
is
79).
As has been
said
analysis.
simply a statement of an
which can be expressed more briefly, and is while more easily apprehended, if geometrical terms are used the figures merely serve the purpose of indicating the substance of the arguments employed.
;
THEOREM
82.
[Pappus' Theorem.]
^S is
is
is
respondmg
S; then
FM
SP --
is
constant.
Fig. 64.
Let
N be the
on the curve
to the directrix.
V-]
GENERAL I*kOJECTION
Let
137
PQ
meet the
.'.
Now
the polar of
R, and let be the pole of the directrix) passes through the polar of passes through ^S.
directrix in
>S (viz.
PQ.
passes through
the polar of i?
is
TS
(3).]
.'.
ST,
SP
:.
PST= go'.
is
[Theorem 81
But
S{PT;PQ}
.".
harmonic, since
ST is
the polar of
P;
bisectors of
PSQ;
SPPP
SQ~QP
SPSQ
PM~ QN'
SP ' -FT^^
PM
is
constant.
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
If the conic
is
a parabola, -^t>=
5'
SP
i-
cut
the
directrix
at
and the
i.
[a being at infinity].
SA
is
Theorem
81,
Cor.
SX}
>
is
AX
76. 77.
Prove Theorem
81,
Cor
i.
two
78.
foci
Prove that the centre of a conic bisects the on either principal axis.
Prove that
all
line joining
the
parabolas,
in
having
common
focus,
may be
centre.
62.
regarded as inscribed
79.
common
foci
triangle.
of a circle
figure,
coincide with
its
Where
80. 81.
Draw a
analogous to Fig.
is
finite
a real point.
a conic must be
a rectangular hyperbola.
82.
It
is
orthocentre.
said that the four foci of a conic form a triangle and its Discuss the validity of this statement.
138
83.
PLANE GEOMETRY
;
[CH.
may
84.
The centre S of a circle is a focus of a conic prove that S be regarded as a meet of two of the common tangents of the
and
conic.
;
circle
two conies inscribed in a quadrilateral ABCD S^ is If 5i, S^, are projected into confocal C, D. conies, prove that 53 will become either a circle or a rectangular
Si, Sj are
side
EC
of a triangle
at
ABC,
self
conjugate
w.r.t.
a conic,
meets a directrix
if
is
PSA=f^.
86.
AC,
87.
ABCD BD meet
is
at
a quadrilateral circumscribing a conic ; if the diagonals a focus, prove that they are at right angles, and
is
a directrix.
off
it,
can be projected
into
a conic and
88.
conies.
into
89. Prove that a conic, and two points a conic, its centre and one focus.
90.
can be projected
Given a point
zs vertex
on
a.
conic,
and a point
off
it,
prove that
A,
and
focus.
91. If the tangents at two points F, Q of a conic, focus S, meet at T, prove that TP, TQ subtend equal or supplementary angles at S. 92.
PQ
is
a variable chord of an
;
ellipse,
through a focus
the bisector of
PHQ
\s
is
at
prove
91.]
is
perpendicular from
PQ of a conic ; is the foot of the are a principal axis prove that NP,
;
NQ
to
SK.
95.
thfe
focus
that
R; prove
prove that
-Fp+-^
remains constant as
PQ
turns about 5.
[Use
Theorem
96.
82.]
The tangent
that
PR
at /" to a conic meets a directrix at subtends a right angle at the corresponding focus.
prove
v.]
GENERAL l^ROJECTION
The
directrix
139
97.
of a hyperbola
meets an asymptote
CT
at
the corresponding focus ; the other tangent from touches it at prove that SP is parallel to CT. ;
is
to the curve
98. PSP, QSQ' are two focal chords of a conic; QQ' cuts the tangents at P, /" in ff, and the corresponding directrix in prove that NS} is harmonic.
{HK
99.
directrix
can be
Two
;
conies have a
common
H and
P
focus
and
directrix
at
a chord PQ prove
{PQ HK)
is
harmonic.
for the
101.
Deduce a theorem
parabola from
is
the foot of
axis
on an
ellipse
to a principal
AA'
at
C
;
is
the centre
NQ
is
drawn
parallel to
AP
and meets
CP
then
AQ
is
102. If a system of conies pass through, four given points, prove that the polars of a given point w.r.t. the system are concurrent. What is the dual theorem? By taking a special case of the dual theorem, obtain a property of the centres of the system of conies. By projecting the dual theorem, obtain a property of confocal
conies.
103.
straight line
of the points
104.
is
prove that the locus of the pole of the line joining two a conic touching each of the joins of the fixed points.
it
Prove that
is
lines into
a parabola,
its
and
latus rectum.
cir-
the circumcircle of a triangle 105. Generalise by projection cumscribing a parabola passes through the focus of the parabola.
106. into
Prove that it is possible to project a conic, and a point a rectangular hyperbola and its focus.
If a conic
off
it,
107. its
centre,
and one of its foci is projected into a circle and prove that any angle at the focus is unaltered in
magnitude by projection. Use this method of projection to deduce angle properties of a conic from a circle, [e.^. Ex. 91, 96, 112, etc.]
108.
Assuming
first
that the locus of a point from which a parabola is is a parabola having double contact
parabola, explain
why
the
;
position
of the points of
special case
contact
^ = 90.-
I40
109.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Generalise by projection
:
[CH
Generalise by projection
if
fixed
circles, centres
centre
is
having A,
111.
as foci.
foci of
any curve are defined as the points from which two of the tangents to the curve are isotropic lines. Prove that the inverse of a focus of a curve is a focus of the inverse curve.
112.
The
focus
Two chords PQ, QR of a conic subtend equal angles at a prove that PR meets the tangent at Q on the directrix.
;
113. A line drawn through the focus 5 of a hyperbola, parallel to an asymptote, meets the curve at Q prove that ^SQ is equal to the
latus rectum.
114.
If in Ex.
113,
SQ
that
aQR
is
115.
asymptote
The tangent at a point P on a hyperbola, focus S, meets CT at T; SP meets CT at Q; prove that QT=QS.
an
THEOREM
A
83.
lines,
can
be pro-
by
definition,
is
then confocal.
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
Any two
common
tangents.]
THEOREM
84.
common
^S
focus
and a common
corresponding directrix L, can be projected into a system of concentric circles, having the projection of
as centre.
cut
at F,
Q.
Then
as focus
and
as directrix, by
Q.
as centre.
Q.E.D.
v.]
GENERAL J-ROJECTION
NOTE ON METHOD.
For
rider work,
it is
141
useful to
bear in
mind
to
what extent
cross-
by projection.
A, B,
C
00
are
three collinear
figure,
points,
CB
by writing
it
in the form
{ABCa:i
},
where
is
AB.
in the
And
(3)
in particular, if
}
AB = BC,
it
must be restated
form
{ABC ^
allowed
harmonic.
The
for,
fact
that an angle ABC is a right angle can be by saying that the pencil B{AC; ww'} is harmonic.
If the angle
ABC
is
written as
(4)
^{^coCw'} = constant.
condition that a conic
(u,
cu'.
The The
is
a circle
is
satisfied
by saying
hyperbola
that
it
passes through
(5)
condition
to, to'
that
conic
is
rectangular
w.r.t.
it.
requires that
(6)
The
^
is
is
a focus of a conic
is
noted,
is
it
it
frequently easier to
see
how
first
special terms.
Consequently
may be
desirable sometimes
method.
and then project it afresh by a The following example illustrates these remarks.
EXAMPLE.
Any
circle
the curve at H, K; then one pair of common chords circle, and a conic through H, K, which circumscribes any
self-conjugate
w.r.t.
the
w.r.t.
the
hyperbola.
Now
it
Cfobi
is
is
The
given theorem
is
a special
case,
by projection,
of the following
S-^,
a third conic
2,
and two of
common
points IT,
lie
142
PLANE GEOMETRY
their
[CH.
common
2.
H,
K become
the circular
We
w.r.t.
then obtain
circles
S-^,
Each of two
line
at
conjugate to the
their
2,
or
in
other
words,
radical
axis
This
last
theorem
is
easily proved.
Fig. 65.
Fig. 66.
Let
PQR,
is
ABC
be the two
triangles,
and
r the radius of 2.
Then O
Let
the orthocentre of
OC
meet
AB
at
Th.
23,
OD = DE
.-.
71.
and
OC.OD = r^;
O
to
S-^^
0C.0E=20C.0D=^2r^,
the square of the tangent from
.-.
= 2r^,
q.e.d.
and
lies
is
on the
radical axis of
S-^
and
S^.
This theorem
116. Four conies pass through the points A, B, C, D; prove that the cross-ratio of the pencil formed by the tangents at to the conies is the same as that at B or C or D.
V-]
GENERAL PROJECTION
From
;
143
T, the tangents TA, TB, are drawn to a fixed conic Pg is a variable chord, such that T{PQ AB} is constant find the envelope of PQ.
; ;
117.
a fixed point
118.
circle
;
Generalise by projection
is
is
a fixed point
CP
is
is
produced to
circle.
so that
-^
is
con-
stant
another
system of conies have double contact with each other at two fixed points A, prove that the poles of a given line PQ w.r.t. the system he on another line PR such that P{AB QR} is harmonic.
119.
120. Generalise by projection the nine-point circle of a triangle touches each of the four circles which touch the sides of the triangle.
:
121.
Generalise
by projection
the
locus
of the
foci
is
of
ellipses
a rectangular
AB
in
prove that
5^, 52, S^
w.r.t.
are concurrent,
if
is
the line
AB
Further,
2 meets
123.
P,p;A,B
p, prove that
2.
Generalise by projection
The base
the
move on
fixed
to the conic
axe. the tangents from A remaining sides touch the conic; AP, prove that the locus of the third vertex of the triangle is a conic having double contact with the given conic at P, Q.
;
AQ
125. If two triangles ABO, PQR are such that the sides of one are the polars of the vertices of the other w.r.t. a conic, prove that the triangles are in perspective. [Project the conic into a as centre.] circle having the projection of
126.
Generalise by projection
if
it
a variable circle touches a fixed again at P, Q, then PQ is fixed in a circle has double contact with a one of the axes of the conic.
is
127.
Generalise by projection
is
if
parallel to
:
128.
Generalise by projection
;
a variable conic
inscribed in a
given triangle
one focus lies on a fixed line, then in general, the other focus lies on a fixed conic. If, however, the fixed line passes through a vertex of the triangle, the other focus lies on another straight line through the same vertex.
if
144
129.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Generalise by projection
:
[CH.
directrix,
if
then their
circles.
common
Two
A,
conies cut at
at /",
A, B,
C,
Z>
Q;
prove that
;
B{PCQD}
C
is
\
constant.
B
is
conic; PQ,
prove that
PQ
PQ)
is
harmonic;
What theorem
obtained by taking A,
at u, w'?
132. K variable parabola touches the sides of a fixed triangle prove that each chord of contact passes through a fixed point. What theorem is obtained by projecting B, C into u), eo'?
133.
ABC
is
AA', BB', CC, DD' are four concurrent chords of a conic any other point on the conic, prove that P{ABCD}=P{A'B'C'D'}.
if
134.
The
B-fi^i
joins of the
A^A^i
meet H of two common tangents of two conies A, B, C, D on one of the conies cut the other at CjCs, D-JD^; P, P\ are any two points on the conies,
P{ABCD\ =P^{A^B^C,D,}=P^{A^B^C^D^}.
135.
Generalise by projection
circle 5, at
A, B, and
parallel to
then
AB
5
is
PQ
is
two fixed lines, touching a given conic ^ ; a variable touches p, q and two other fixed lines prove that the other two common tangents of 5, S meet on a fixed line. [Project the dual theorem.]
136. p, q are
conic
Si, S^, S^ are three conies inscribed in the same quadrilateral a point of intersection of S-^ and S^ prove that the tangents at /" to 5i, ^2 are harmonic conjugates w.r.t. the tangents from P to ^3. [Project the dual theorem.]
-P is
;
137.
A straight line cuts one conic in A, B and another conic in D. The tangents at A, B meet the tangents at C, va. F, G and H, K. If the conies cut each other at P, Q, P, S, prove that the eight points PQRSFGHK lie on a conic.
138.
C,
139.
Generalise by projection
;
centric circles
a given conic
of 5.
140.
O is the centre of a system of conthen the mid points of their chords of intersection with lie on a rectangular hyperbola through O and the centre
:
:
Generalise by projection
directrix,
if, from two variable points on the which subtend a constant angle at the focus, tangents are
V-]
GENERALwPROJECTION
intersect
145
a,
Three conies a, fi, y circumscribe a triangle BEF"; yS, y y, a meet again at ^, ^, C; a fourth conic through E, F cuts a in G, H; P m K, L; y m M, N; if the conies ADEFG, BDEFK, CDEFM have four common points, prove that the conies ADEFH, BDEFL, CDEFN also have four common points.
;
142. Generalise by projection the director circles of all conies touching four fixed lines are coaxal. [The director circle of a conic is the locus of points, from which the tangents to a conic are at right angles ; see Theorem 76.]
:
143. Generalise by projection if a variable conic has double contact with each of two circles, centres A, ; then the locus of its centre is the line and' the circle on as diameter.
:
AB
AB
144.
triangle
move on
7' to
fixed lines
;
the conic
circumscribed to a given conic two of its vertices which meet at T TP, TQ are the tangents from prove that the locus of the third vertex is a conic
is
;
at P, Q.
all
H,
TP,
K are fixed
TQ
;
conic
is
harmonic
147.
points on the tangent at a point i^ on a given are a pair of variable tangents, such that T{PQ find the locus of T..
;
HK}
M',
ABCP
two
lines
through P,
Z',
AB
at L,
M,
N and
prove that
j^=j^r
into
ta, co',
[Project
148.
A,
common tangents to two conies meet at H; prove that is one of the diagonal points of the quadrangle formed by the points of intersection of the conies.
of contact of two
The chords
149.
Generalise by projection
touch
in
A system of BC at a fixed
conies
is
ABC,
so as to
point D.
line
Prove that the tangents at the points, through cuts the conies again, envelope a
conic.
151.
lateral,
A,
to
in
the
line.
quadrilateral
meet
at
a straight
146
152.
PLANE GEOMETRY
TP,
[CH.
of intersection
lateral
are the tangents to two conies at one of their poir A, A' are any pair of opposite vertices of the quad formed by their common tangents; prove that T{PQ\ A A'}
;
TQ
harmonic.
153.
[Hesse's Theorem.]
If
two
complete guadrilateral are coiuugate points w.r.t. a conic, pro^ that the third pair are also conjugate points. [Part I., Th. 86 ( and p. i6i, Ex. 12.]
154.
The asymptotes
is
common chord
155.
parallel to
fixed in direction
locus of /"
156.
is
is a chord of a given circl in a given ratio then tl a point P divides a conic having double contact with the circle.
: ;
AB AB
Genei-alise
circles is
a variable circle cuts a fixed circ then the locus of a parabola, and the envelope of the radical axis of the tw a conic.
:
by projection
157.
Generalise by projection
tvi
fixed points
circles at
is
A,
;
3.
fixed line
it
P then the tangent B. Write down the dual of the generalised theorem, and deduce a theorem for a system of parabaks.
158.
AC at P
through
Generalise by projection
;
PQR
P'QR'
is
an equilateral triangle
its
ii
scribed in a circle
circle again
vertices cut
tl
then
is
an equilateral
triangle, an
AB
P, Q,
R; AP, BQ, CR
;
concur at
a conic circumscribing the triangle B, C into 10, a note that R{AO QP}=-i, and assume that the foot of the perpei dicular from the focus of a parabola to any tangent lies on the tangei
at the vertex.]
the locus of
160.
PQ
is
fin
161. Two conies have four-point contact at A any line through meets the conies at /", Q; prove that the locus of the meet of tV tangents at P, Q is n straight line.
.
CHAPTER
VI.
CONIC.
The initial theorem of this chapter was first enunciated, in complete generality, by Pascal (1623-1662), at the age of sixteen, under the name of the Mystic Hexagram. Having established it
first
as
a property of the
circle,
he then extended
it,
by pro-
The
degenerates
to
two straight
later.
six
centuries
But the
credit of
must be ascribed partly to Desargues, in whose work, as we shall see (page 318), the theorem is really implicitly contained, and upon whose ideas the fundamental principles of modern descriptive geometry are based. The dual theorem was discovered by
Brianchon (i8o6), by an apphcation of polar properties.
interesting,
It
is
and consequently the forerunner of the important extensions made by Gergonne, Poncelet and Pliicker. The property known as Pappus' theorem, or the "Locus ad quatuor Hneas," has an interesting but It is mentioned by Pappus as well-known historical record. no proof was given until Descartes solved it in 1659 by means
as
being the
earliest
professedly
dual property,
of his
discovery
and was published in the Principia. Evidence of the value of the ideas of Desargues and Pascal is readily obtained from the two great works of Carnot, the Geometry Carnot of Fosition (1803), and the Theory of Transversals (1806).
took a leading political part in the revolutionary changes in France at the end of the eighteenth century, and after his banishment
in
1796
devoted
his
time
to
mechanics
and
geometry.
The
148
PLANE GEOMETRY
of this chapter
m
:
1
Newton* (1642-1727).
He may
be
justly conside
known
and theology.
in those
Owing
which publicat
was with the greatest difficulty that could be persuaded by his friends to announce his discover The Principia itself was not communicated to the Royal Soci
until
days involved,
it
was written.
Either
this,
or his
THEOREM
If a
85.
[Pascal's Mystic
Hexagram.]
hexagon
is
5_
I,
2,
3,
4,
s,
12,
45;
23,
56; 34, 61
Let Z,
M, iVbe tNow
But and
.-.
But
5 is a
X, Fbe the meets of 16, 54; = 3(2456}, by Chasles' theorem. 1(2456} = {Z4sX}, base 45, 3(2456} = {yJ/"F56}, base 56; (Z45X} = (J/F56}. common point of the two ranges LM, 4Y, X6 are concurrent.
their meets; let
i{2456}
.'.
Now iV
is
L,
M, JV
are collinear.
q.e.d,
*It has been pointed out however by the Rev. J. J. Milne that this theoi was employed by Pappus, and in essence is due to Apollonius.
t In order to remember this proof, the reader should note that the verticef the two pencils employed are two vertices of the hexagon, separated by one verl
VI.]
149
optical discoveries, would alone place him in As a geometer, judged .by the nature of his methods, he is to be classed among the last of the ancients rather than with the first of the modern school. The modesty of
on Fluxions, or
the
front
rank.
illustrated
" I
by the European fame of his achievements, by the following extracts from his correspondence: seem to have been only like a boy playing on the sea shore,
in now and then finding a smoother pebble or a prettier shell than ordinary, whilst the great ocean of truth
undiscovered before
it
me;" and
I
other men,
giants."
is
only because
THEOREM
If a
86.
[Brianchon's Theorem.]
circumscribed about a conic, then the joins of the three pairs of opposite vertices are concurrent.
is
hexagon
'^'
2,
3,
j
^^1
45
/,
Let
6 are the sides of the hexagon. 56; 34, 61; are the pairs of opposite vertices. m, n be their joins ; let a;, y be the joins of i6, 54 ; 34,
4,
5,
23,
56.
*Now
But and
.'.
{2456}
= 3(2456}, by
Chasles' theorem.
1(2456} 3(2456}
5
is
But
common
Now
*
is
x6 x6
;
are collinear.
/,
m, n are concurrent.
q.e.d.
In order to remember this proof, the reader should note that the bases of
the
two ranges employed are two sides of the hexagon, separated by one
side.
150
PLANE GEOMETRY
PASCAL'S THEOREM (Second Proof).
67,
LM
to
infii
Then
in the
new
figure,
12,
A
.'.
180
=
.'.
A 416;
-456 by
parallels
16
is
parallel to 43
lie
.'.
on the
line at infini
M, TV
are collinear.
q.e.d
Brianchon's
jection
(see
Theorem may be
Ex.
3).
In
order
from Pascal's, by the use of poles and polars, which was the
which
it
ABCDEF
d,
e,
be the circumscribing hexagon ; then the pol f of its vertices form an inscribed hexagon. Since c
.^,
the point
ad
be,
is
the pole of
AD.
cf are collinear
are concurrent,
q.e.d
their polars
AD, BE, CF
PASCAL'S
The
following
THEOREM
is
(Third Proof).
method
due
to Dr. Salmon.
Let a, b, c, d, e, f be the vertices of the inscribed hexagon. Denote the equation of the join of a, b by ab = o, etc.
Since the given conic circumscribes the quadrangles abed,
its
aj
ab.cdX.bc.ado
so that
or de ./a
nad .fe = o,
where
v are constants
..
ab .cd-vde .fa
.".
= ad{\ .be-
fi-v
.fe).
Now
ab .cdvde .fa = o
straight lines,
cd, cd,
ab,
af or a;
de or d;
fa
is
the
cd,
line
kbc- ixv
.fe =
fa;
fe are collinear.
q.e.d
VI.]
151
Fig. 69.
Fig. 70,
Fig. 71.
152
PLANE GEOMETRY
Prove that the Pascal lines of th 1. [Steiner's Theorem.] hexagons abcdef, adcfeb, afcbed are concurrent. [The odd vertices ar kept fixed, and the even vertices are permuted in cyclic order. Identif the two forms of the equation of the conic, given above, with
be .cf-f>bc .ef=o.
The
\s
kbc-fxv .fe = o;
87.
and
similarly
for
th
others.]
THEOREM
(i) If the
on a conic.
a hexagoi
six sides
touch a conic.
The
[It
first
proof
is
left
to the reader.
may be
proved,
th(
method, or by a reductio ad absurdum method, assuming tha one and only one conic can be drav^n to pass through five givei
Prove Theorem 87. Prove Brianchon's theorem, by projecting the conic into a circle having the projection of the meet of two of the diagonals as centre. 4. Prove that there are 60 Pascal lines associated with any si> points on a conic. Deduce a theorem from Pascal's property, by making two con 5. secutive vertices of the hexagon coincide. 6. Deduce a property of a triangle inscribed in a conic fron
2.
3.
Pascal's theorem,
7.
by making consecutive vertices coincide, in pairs Deduce from Brianchon a property of a triangle circumscrib
ing a conic.
is a hexagon inscribed in a conic, prove that th( 8. If ; DE, BC AE, are collinear, meets of AC, 9. Prove that the 60 Pascal lines associated with six points on ; conic form sets of four concurrent lines. What is the dual theorem?
;
ABCDEF DF
BF
10.
If the
ABCDEF
P, Q, prove that
11.
A{AECP}='A{DBFP\.
Given six collinear points A, E, C, D, B, F, construct a poin on the line, such that {AECP} = { DBfP}. Prove that there are tw(
real, coincident or imaginary. [Use Ex. 10.] Four points P, Q, P, S are taken on a conic PP meets QS a L; Mis any point PM, meet the conic at r, U prove that 57
such positions of P,
12.
QM
PU,
13.
LM are
concurrent.
of a pentagoi
circumscribing a parabola.
VI.]
153
14.
ABCDEF
What
is
deduce from
AB,
if
BC
and
DE,
EF
of a hexagon, circumscribing a conic, coincide with the line at infinity? two is a fixed quadrilateral circumscribing a given conic 16.
ABCD
;
variable
tangents
PQ,
respectively
17.
prove
DC, BA,
on a fixed
DA
line.
at
P, g, R,
.<4,
AP,
AQ
a.t
P,
Q;
\i
CP
meets
BQ
at
the locus of
A'' is
a straight
line.
THEOREM
(i) li
88.
A, C,
e;
E; B, B,
b, d,
a.xe
two
sets of three
EB are collinear.
concurrent lines
;
f are
cf,
two
of,
sets of three
ed;
eb are concurrent.
Fig. 72-
^"=- 73-
(i)
The hexagon
ADEBCFis
the lines
ACE, BDF;
is
are collinear.
(2)
It
(q.e.d.)
This
independently, from Brianchon, by regarding the finite line joining the vertices of the pencils a, c, e; b, d, f, as
may be deduced
a conic
flattened ellipse.
is
Another proof
given, in
Theorems
122,
123.
(54
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
THEOREM
If
89.
its
a quadrangle
in pairs
is
vertices
meet
triangle.
Fig. 74.
The
proof
is
left
to the reader.
A ABC CD.]
THEOREM
90.
if
pentagon adcef circumscribes a conic, and the conic at d, then ad, be, cf are concurrent.
If
ce
touches
Fig. 75.
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
abcdef.]
[Con.sider the
18. 19.
hexagon
89. 90.
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem
20.
A, B,
pairs of lines
B, C are six points in a plane, such that the AB', A'B BC, B'C; CA', C'A are parallel. If A', B', C,
C, A',
;
VI.]
155
21.
parallel to
TQ,
TP
prove that
PQ PQ
of a conic
is
parallel to
PH, QK HK.
are chords
22. If a triangle is inscribed in a conic, prove that the tangents at the vertices meet the opposite sides in three collinear points.
through through
QR meets the line asymptote at 5 PQ meets the line parallel to the other asymptote at T; prove that ST is parallel to the tangent at Q.
23.
P, Q,
P P
parallel
one
24.
P, Q, P,
Q,
R
25.
meet PR,
is
PS.
0^0^, O2O3, O^Px of 'he triangle OiOgOj pass respectively through the vertices f/3, U^, U2 of the triangle UxU^U^;
sides
The
Ax
is
at
A^, A.^\
A^
are collinear.
;
at T,
RT
points on a conic QR, meet the tangents prove that CD, PQ, are concurrent. By taking as the line at infinity, deduce a theorem for a hyperbola. P, Q, R,
\n C,
T are four
PT
D\
RT
;
27.
is
the extremities P,
prove that
28.
LM
oi a variable chord to
meet.PQ,
BP
at L,
is
fixed in direction.
The corresponding
;
parallel
29.
sides of two triangles inscribed in a conic are prove that the joins of corresponding vertices are diameters.
.5 is
PH,
30.
QK are
b,
a fixed point on a conic ; BP, BQ are two variable chords is fixed in two chords parallel to BQ, BP prove that
\
HK
direction.
and
P is a variable point on a fixed line L; C, E are two fixed points d two fixed lines X, Y, Z are the meets oi b,d; b, CE d, CP prove that the conic through E, P, X, Y, Z cuts L at n fixed point. three concurrent lines AO, BO, CO meet BC, 31. ABC is a triangle CA, AB at A', B', C any line through A meets A'B', A'C at B", C"
\
B'C
are concurrent.
Any
;
laterals
straight line divides a quadrilateral into two other quadriprove that the points of intersection of the internal diagonals of
parabola
is
inscribed in a triangle
ABC,
touching
BC at D
its
if
the parallelogram
34.
BACN\%
A
;
point
35.
conic is inscribed in a triangle, touching one side at prove that the centre of the conic lies on a median. conic inscribed in the triangle
to the conic cuts
mid-
BC,
QH,
AP are concurrent.
156
36.
PLANE GEOMETRY
The
sides
[CH.
AB, BC, CD, DA of a quadrilateral touch a conic at CS meet AQ, AR at X, V; prove that XV passes
37.
7' is
PQ
of a parabola
is
on the curve
prove that
38.
Q
;
meet QR,
PR
at //,
T is the mid-point
C are
is
of HK.
A, B,
;
BC meets
is
one asymptote
at ZJ
a straight line
through
D parallel
AE dravim parallel to this asymptote to cut a line paiiallel to the other Prove that CE to AB at E.
MN, NL,
asymptote.
39.
LP, MQ, JVR meet at O parallels through O to MJV, NL, QR, RP, PQ at X, Y, Z prove that X, Y, Z are collinear.
;
LM of a triangle at P, Q, R LM meet
40.
PQ
is
Pa
line is
a chord of a parabola through a point T' on the tangent at drawn parallel to PQ meeting the diameter through P aX
;
-,
is
a diameter.
;
AB, BC, CA 41. ABC, PQR are two triangles inscribed in a conic meet QR, RP, PQ at P^, P^, P^ Q Q^, Q3 Ri, R2, ^3 prove that P1Q2 is a Pascal line for the si.'c points A, B, C, P, Q, R. 42. Deduce from Pascal's theorem that if a rectangular hyperbola circumscribes a triangle ABC, it passes through the orthocentre. [Let a, 13 be the points at infinity on the curve, and let the perpendicular from A to BC cut the curve at // consider the hexagon BAHajBC]
; ; ; ;
43.
ABC,
axe.
DEF
C,
if
AD,.
BE, CF
44.
respectively parallel to
of the centroids of
ABC,
A, B,
D, E,
is
AF,
EC
BF, CD; AD, BE are collinear; prove that the meets of AE, CF; DF, BE BC, AD are also collinear. 45. From any point on the circumcircle of a triangle ABC, perpendiculars are drawn to BC, CA, AB and meet the circle again at D,E,F; prove that a conic can be drawn to touch AB, BC, CD, DE, EF, FA.
;
46.
If
in perspective,
on a conic.
S,
S]
a conic prove ttat its Pascal line w.r.t. Sj and its Brianchon point w.r.t. form a side and vertex of the common self-conjugate triangle of Sx
S^ and. is inscribed in
S.2.
and
48.
49.
Given
five
What
DA
at P, Q, B, S, prove that
VI.]
157
51.
At
H,
52.
Q on a. hyperbola cut one asymptote prove that HK', H'K, PQ are parallel.
of a hyperbola
at
;
PQ
TP,
asymptote to^A".
53.
H,
K KP
\
cuts
QH
TQ
meet one
is
parallel
tangent at a point
prove that
C,
cuts the
parallel
the
HP = PK.
54.
H,
K are
CH,
tangents from
point
H,
K to
CK of
a hyperbola
the
P on
TK aX
L,
prove that
HM, KL, CP
are concurrent.
55.
two
The
sides of a parallelogram
;
prove that BA^ BC and DA, extremities of two chords which meet on AC.
of a conic
Constructions. A number of important constructions can be effected by means of Pascal's and Brianchon's theorems. The general method is
illustrated
The
to
build
fundamental
figures.
EXAMPLE
Given
five points
I.
on a
number
of other
"~.P
158
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
Let
ABCDE
AP
be the given
line
points.
AP;
it
is
which
B, C, D, E.
AP at N. Let AB, DE meet at L LN and produce to cut EC at M. Join to cut AP at Z. Join EM and produce
and CD,
it it
Then
.-. ..
ABCDEZ
[Th. 87.]
q.e.f.
are coUinear.
the points A, B, C,
D, E,
lie
on
a- conic.
is
EXAMPLE
Given
five
IL
Fig. 77.
Let A, B, C, D,
[We
Let
Join
hexagon
AABCDE.]
NA.
q.e.f.
AB,
DE
is
LM
EA
2X
at
M.
Join
DC
N.
the reader.
EXAMPLE
Given
contact.
five
in.
to
tangents
to
a conic,
construct
their
points
0I
This
is
VI.]
159.
EXAMPLE
Given
three
IV.
points
on
hyperbola
to.
construct any
number of
points
on the
curve.
Fig. 78.
Let B, C,
Draw any
line
in
which
AB,
DC
is
the meet of
DC with
BP with
X.
B
C
parallel to
The meet
Join
N of BP, CA
OA.
produce
it it
OA.
is
the meet of
a hne through
parallel to
MN and
LD
to cut
OA
at L.
Join
and produce
to cut point.
BP
at
reader.
q.e.f.
Prove Example
II.
Given four points on a hyperbola, and the direction of one Given three points on a hyperbola and the directions of both
asymptotes, construct (i) another point on the curve, (2) one of the asymptotes.
62.
i6o
64. 65.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Given
five points
[Cl
on a conic, construct
its
centre.
Given three points on a parabola and a diameter, constru the tangent at one of the given points.
66. Given three points on a hyperbola and one asymptote, constru the tangent at one of the given points.
67.
Given
five
the polar of
anothi
given point.
68.
ther
to
parabola,
construct
their
points
contact.
70.
at
two of
thet
and
the direction of the axis, construct the tangent at the other poir
oi
72. Given four tangents to a conic and the point of contact of of them, construct the point of contact of one of the others.
73. Given one asymptote of a hyperbola, two tangents, and the poi: of contact of one of them, construct the point of contact of the othe 74.
parabola
find
is
and
its
axis
is
give
tl
in direction,
triangle.
its
THEOREM
91.
[Carnot's Theorem.]
Fig. 7g.
Fig. So.
If the sides
BC, CA,
.
AB
^j, Q^\
R-^,
R.J respectively;
then
.
AR^ AR^ BP^ BP^ CQ^ CQ^ AQi AQ^ BR^ BR^ CP^ CP^ ~
. . .
'
''
VI.]
i6i
Denote by /, /, K, the points at infinity on BC, CA, AB. Project the conic into a circle, and use small letters for corresponding points in the new
I,
figure.
/,
J,
K project
/,
k.
N^
-^ = {BB^CI},
'
BJ^
since
is
at infinity,
^^
cp^
bi
Similarly
d
bi' cp\
cg^
BP^.BP^ ^ bp^.bp^ cP
cp^
cq^
.
bPaj^^
Similarly
^Qi CQ^ ^
BR-^
But
.
bp^
bp^
= br-^ = =
l/Z
br^,
etc.
^ ^
.
7^
QiH
Cj
r,
by Menelaus' theorem,
q.e.d.
since
i,
j\
k are
collinear.
Corollary.
If Rx,
R^; Qi,
,
Qi',
V,
JB AB
.u
-^^^-^^
^^-^ ^^-^=
.
.
on a conic.
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
Prove Theorem
91, Corollary.
if
;
What
and the
line
at
infinity
two coincident
straight lines
78.
79. 80.
to
apply to a quadrilateral.
to
any polygon.
AB
of a triangle
at
V P,
n Q,
R, prove that
BP CQ AR pQ--^- ;^=''^
i62
PLANE GEOMETRY
81. By applying Carnot's theorem to the triangle formed by asymptotes and one tangent of a hyperbola, deduce a property of
hyperbola.
82.
sin BAPi
With the notation of Carnot's theorem, prove that sin BAP2 sin CBQi sin CBQ2 sin ACRj sin ACR2 =sin CAFi sin CAP2 sin ABQi sin ABQ2 sin BCB, sin BC]
.
83.
The
in-circle
of an
isosceles
triangle
ABC
touches BC,
AB
CE
84.
prove
tl
ABC;
pre
on a conic.
that, if
86. Deduce from Carnot's theorem meets the asymptotes at //, K, then
PQ of a hyperbc
HP=KQ.
a hyperbola cuts an asympt(
87.
The tangent
at
at
any point
Z> of
BE
88.
E, and a
line
BH parallel
BH cuts
A
;
EU = -0-^. Br
_.
,,.,
BC, CA,
AB
of a triangle at A^,
A
J.
^11
-^2
Q)
if
O, lines are
drawn
triangle .^.5C; prove that their six meets with the sides
90.
on a con
meet the sides BC, CA, of a triang at A^, A2, Agi Bi, B^, B3; Ci, C^, C3 if A^, B^, C3 are colline; prove that A2, A^, B^, B-^, Q, C^ lie on a conic.
;
AB
Tangents are drawn from the vertices A, B, C of a triang and meet the opposite sides at Pj, Pj Qi, Q2 Ki, B Prove that these six points lie on a conic. Generalise this theorem; and enunciate the dual property. [Let be the centre, and r the radius of the circle note th
91.
to a circle,
s\nBAPj.smBAP2=sm'BA0-sm'B^A0=~^,
perpendicular from
92.
where
OF
is
tl
to
AB
82.]
79 coincide with A, deduce tl following: a conic touches at A and passes through three givi points /"i, 7?2, P2 its circle of curvature at A cuts AB2 at p P^P^ ct
Q^,
By making B^,
;
Q^
AC
AB AC
at B,
prove that
a point
Ap=AP,.^^^.
on a conic
is
^^.
[Tl
circle of curvature at
VI.]
163
93.
to
AC ax A
B
;
PiP<i
is
AC;
;
P^P,. cuts
AP2
at
prove that
93,
-J^^ g2 BR
by taking
'
94.
at the centre of
the conic.
THEOREM
A, , C,
point on the conic;
92.
[Pappus' Theorem.]
;
is
a variable
P to
PH PK
"
-cA.
.. is
Fig. 81.
Now
similarly
PIf.A-=2^APB = PA.Ps,i\iAPB;
PX.AD==PA PDsmAPD AB.CD sin APE sin CPD ' PH.PK AD.CB ^ sin APD sin CPB _ p[ AvrD\ ^ PX.PY'
. .
'
'
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
A, B, C,
D
p^
perpendiculars
PY are
drawn
to
is
BC\
if
'^^
A, B, C, D.
i64
PLANE GEOMETRY
THEOBEM
AB, BC, CD,
93.
DA
to
is
BX, CK,
D Y are
.
the perpendicul,
from A, B, C,
^ D
p; then
AH. CK
let
is
constant.
The
proof
is
left to
the reader.
;
p, p' meet
AB
.
in
Q,
CD
to
in
R,
let
AH', BX'
CK',
DY'
be the perpendicul;
,
/;
AH AQ CK
to Chasles.
CR
,,,
DY^DR'
{AQBQ) = {DRCR!).\
Theorem 93
95. 96. 97.
is
due
A, B, C,
to a variable line p
is
constant
prove th
DA.
PL, PM,
PN are
PL?
;
if
-^-j-f
g-r-
is
point
PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF are the perpendiculars from a varial f on a conic to consecutive sides of a given hexagon, inscrib
;
in the conic
PA -= -=-=, PC PE PB PD PF
.
r; .
is
constant.
100.
in
to
a conic.
101.
is
PH,
.
PK
a parallelogram
MN
is
PH
them
M, N,
prove that
MN
is
of consta
taking B,
103.
AB
is
parallels through
A,
B
frc
'
P//,
PK,
to
PL
a variable point
is
on the curve
CA, CB,
AB
prove that
Pff P
constant.
VI.]
165
104.
the conic
is
circle,
prove
that
PH.PK=PX.PY.
The
tangents at the vertices of a triangle
105.
ABC
inscribed in a
AB
a variable point on the curve, prove that the product of the lengths of the perpendiculars from P to BC, CA, is proportional to that of the perpendiculars from P to YZ, ZX, XY.
/" is
XYZ;
Extend Theorem 93
to a
2sided polygon
circumscribing a
conic. 107.
of
.
prove that
108.
AH CK=BX
.
Theorem DY.
93, if
the conic
is
a parabola,
is
BC
of a conic
a,
diculars from
A, B,
to
a.
prove that
'^^
is
constant.
oc
109.
triangle
A variable line cuts two fixed lines OPQ is of constant area, find the
The tangent
at at
OA,
OB
a.t
P,
Q;
if
the
110.
a fixed point
C,
>,
.5
of a hyperbola
meets the
asymptotes, OC,
OD
D
O
b,
c,
d,
pendiculars from B, C,
is
to
a variable tangent
prove that
^r^
a
constant.
111.
ABCD
in Z,
is
in a conic
/" is
variable point
AB, CD
112.
on the curve
parallels
through
to the sides
meet
constant.
A
t
a variable tangent
A' from
from
/.
i \s at A' of a triangle conic touthes the side and prove that the product of the distances of and C is proportional to the product of the distances of
;
BC
ABC
113.
conic touches
reference,
prove that,
S'-
conic is iiS=^..
By
at B, C ; if ABC is the triangle of AB, in areal coordinates, the eauation of the as the isotropic lines, deduce taking AB,
AC
AC
Theorem
82.
66
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
If
94.
[Newton's Theorem.]
variable
"
POQ,
ROS
are two
OK
^ C/o
is
Fig. 82.
Take any other position 0' of O. Draw the chords F'O'Q', R'O'S' in the given directions. Let R'S' cut FQ at N; FQ, F'Q' meet at a point at infinity
Since
Q,
Q',
^.
F, F' are
finite
points,
-!i^=i=-^
Apply Carnot
Th ^"
NF.NQ
.
aP
'
NF.NQ
.NS"
Similarly
The standard equations of the ellipse, hyperbola, and parabola can be deduced from Newton's theorem, by making use of the fact (see page 134) that the ellipse and hyperbola have one pair of perpendicular conjugate diameters; while the parabola has one diameter which bisects all chords perpendicular to it.
VI.]
167
Fig. 84.
Let
diameters.
ACA', BCB' be the pair of perpendicular conjugate Draw the double ordinate PNP\ of any point P on
the curve, to
AA
-^^
^^
CB-'
since
PN=NP'
j.r-rj A C - LA.
etc
Pm
Let
Then
s'nce
A-2
y
Q.E.D.
which
is
68
PLANE GEOMETRY
I.,
LCr
From Chapter
where 2
negative;
we know
that,
+ 1^
= ,
so
for
the
hyperbola, either
b"^
a^
or
b'^
are positive.
II.
THE PARABOLA.
pm
-j/iTr
CELEBRATED PROPERTIES OF THE CONIC 169 115. PQ is a variable chord of a parabola, fixed in direction; the diameter bisecting PQ cuts the curve at K and PQa.t N; prove that
VI.]
.
IS
constant.
116. PQ, HK are two parallel chords of a hyperbola, meeting an asymptote at Y, Z respectively; prove that YP.YQ=ZH.ZK.
117. is the pole of a chord PQ of a conic, centre C is another chord such that Cff, CK are parallel to TP, TQ and drawn in the same sense prove that is parallel to PQ.
; ;
HK
HK
118.
Two
chord
PQ
at
H,
'
; '
prove that ^
119. P is a point on an ellipse, centre C, axes ADA', BOB' the perpendicular from P to AA' meets AA' in and the circle on
AA'
as diameter in
prove that
?^= ~.
at iV;
120.
PCP, DCD'
cuts
a chord parallel to
to
DD
R\
fi,xed
PP'
a line through
PD
121.
N parallel
is
CD
is
:
at
prove that
QN'^^DR.RD'.
PP'
principal axis
chord of a parabola, perpendicular to the a variable diameter cuts the curve in Q, PP' in N,
and the
122.
to
circle
on
PP
TQ
as diameter in
prove that
QN
is
constant.
is
PQ
of a conic
a chord
HK parallel
equal to that
TP
123.
meets PQ,
prove that
RV^=RH.RK.
is
ratio of
[Use Ex.
95,
Chapter V.]
124.
P.,
Q,
R
125.
in
H, K.; prove
that
^^, = i2:,
prove that
and a
circle intersect at P, Q, E, S,
that
PQ and RS
QVQ!
is
is
PQ and BS
PP'
126.
that
of a conic
prove
-=^
127.
It
PQ, CH,
CK^'
PR are two chords of a conic, equally inclined to the tangent CK are the semi-diameters parallel to PQ, PR prove that
;
PQCH^
PR
170
128.
axis
PLANE GEOMETRY
PQ
are two points on a conic
;
[CH. v
the ordinate
PN to
BQ
a principi
AA'
meets
is
AQ, A'Q
^\.
H,
prove that
;
PN^ = HN.KN.
129.
chord
130.
AB AP
;
a fixed diameter of a circle Q is the pole of a variabl is a conic. prove that the locus of the meet of AP,
lin
y is
through
7" cuts
a point on the tangent at a point /" of a parabola ; any the parabola at Q, R and the diameter through P m
prove that
131.
JQ.rR= TH\
conies
jj, s^
Two
cut at
A, B,
C,
s^
x-^,
and
^2 parallel to
AB, CD
two Unes
7(^2
Two conies j], Jj cut at A, B, C, D from any PH^K^, PH^K^ are drawn cutting s^, jj a'
;
;
point
on
AL
-'^s
^w
5
^i ^nd
K.^.
respectively
C,
"^ o"
conic.
133.
X
A
is
of a paraboli
to the directrix
PSQ is
a chord
PQ,
cut
the curve at
134.
H,
prove that
XH .XK^PS.SQ.
PQ,
chord
PQ
of a chord
RS
prove that
any chord
135.
parallel to
RS,
if
the meet of
RS
a.
lies
The
of
PA
t(
of the conic at
;r, _>'
PK
prove that
PK -. - = X
7^7,
CHAPTER
VII.
RECIPEOCATION.
The
may be regarded, both as the path of a moving point, and as the envelope of a moving line. The latter less obvious idea appears to be due to De Beaune (1601-1652), one of the many commentators on the work of Descartes. The " Horologium " of Huygens (1629-1695), the inventor of the watch and the earliest writer on the undulatory theory of light, contains some mention of
that a curve
.
(i.e.
while
some
due to Tschirnhausen (1631-1708). A systematic treatment of envelopes was given in 1692 by Leibnitz, who shares with Newton the honour of the discovery of the infinitesimal calculus. The advantage derived from coordinating these two conceptions was first pointed out by Brianchon (1806); while the principle itself was stated very clearly by Gergonne in 1825, to whom the notion
of the class of a curve
is
due.
Poncelet, however,
was mainly
and extensive developments, which have made the theory one of the dominant influences in modern
responsible for the important
geometry.
Some
analytical treatment.
and
Pliicker (1829).
Definition.
A, B, C,
in a plane,
...
;
I,
m,
is
n,
...
and
m.
lines
c,
..
;
and 2
...
L,
M,
JV,
plane,
C,
...
;
a, b,
I,
n,
...
w.r.t.
the conic 2.
Then
the system a,
b,
c,
...;
L,
M,
N,...
is
172
It follows at
PLANE GEOMETRY
once from the definition that the
first
[c
system
is
ah
Moreover the correspondent thus established between the two figures is (i, i). For, to any poii of the first system corresponds one and only one line of the seconc and to any line of the first system corresponds one and only or
the reciprocal of the second w.r.t. 2.
Notation.
Small
letters will
be used to denote
in the
:
lines,
and
capital letters
denote points.
Correspondence
letter
two
figures will
be
indicatei
e.g.
first
systen
in the second.
To
will usually
THEOREM
(i)
95.
If the reciprocals of a,
A,
lii
meet
P is
C,
the recipro-
on /, then p
ab.
If a,
b,
c,
is
the reciprocal o
cal of
AB.
^, B,
c,
(2) If
D,
...lie
on
/,
d,
...
pass
...
through
then
a, b,
d,
...
pass through L.
left
Z, then A, B, C,
lie
on
/.
The proof
is
to the reader,
THEOBEM
(i) If
96.
If
{ABCD)
is
is
harmonic,
{abed)
is
is
harmonic,
ther
then {abed)
(2)
harmonic.
{ABCD}
harmonic.
{abed) equals
Thecrossratioof{^.5CZ'}
{ABCD).
is
Definition.
A
by /,
moving point
is
and
the polar
ol
/'w.r.t. the
It is
of fundamental importance to
S-^,
show
if
that,
if
the curve
^'2
is
then
to say,
S-^ is
that
is
we
its
pole J'
w.r.t.
is
the
S-^
P of
oi
P w.r.t.
2.
Or
we regard S-^ as the locus of a moving point, or the envelope of moving line, the same reciprocal curve is obtained.
VII.]
RECIJpiOCATION
173
THEOREM
If the curve S2
is
97.
S-^
the reciprocal of
2.
w.r.t.
2,
then
S-^
is
the
reciprocal of
^'2
w.r.t.
Fig. 86.
Fig. 87.
Then, by Theorem
two adjacent tangents
In the hmit, when
tangent to
S-^
53,
a,
the reciprocal
H oi
;
B
h
on
\^
S^.
the meet
of
b to S^.
and
H becomes a point on S^
is
of a tangent to
6'j
a point on S^.
S-^
as an
q.e.d.
THEOREM
The
conic
reciprocal of a conic
.So.
6'j
98.
w.r.t.
a base conic
is
another
Fig. 89.
points A, B, C, > on
S-^:
and
let
jP be a variable
d,
be the reciprocals of A, B, C, D, P.
Then
.'.
.
p{abcd\=P{ABCD) [Th. 55.] = constant; [Th. 57.] envelopes a conic; [Th. 75. /
the reciprocal of
.Sj
is
a conic.
q.e.d.
174
PLANE GEOMETRY
analysis), see
[CH.
51, that every curve
By assuming (from
give another proof of
Theorem
is
a conic,
it is
easy to
Theorem
98.
Any
drawn
second
two and only two points. two and only two tangents can be
Therefore ^2
is
S-^.
a curve of the
q.e.d.
and
is
therefore a conic.
will
the base-conic 2.
THEOREM
(r)
If
99.
a hne a meets
;
i'j
from
to ^2
are p, q
(2) If
.^2
;
meet of
a,
b lies on
are the
common
"^ 2
J
a,
b,
c.
d axe
the
common
tangents of ^2>
*"d conversely.
a.
(4) If 5i, S-^ touch at a point A, then a is ^2, S^, at their point of contact.
common
tangent to
The
proof
is
left
to the reader.
THEOREM
If a
is
100.
the polar of
w.r.t. S-^,
then
is
the pole of b
^5
w.r.t. ^j.
/^
a
Fig. 90.
Fig. 91.
Draw through B,
tangents bX If,
a variable line
at
/,
cutting
S-^
eX
H, K;
a.
b,
let
the
K meet
h,
is
X;
then
traces out
In the reciprocal
of these tangents
figure,
is
a variable point on
the tangents
VII]
RECIPROCATION
definition, the reciprocal of a
is
175
Then, by
the envelope of x.
Now
the pole of
.'.
.'
.
X envelopes
the pole of b
a,
viz.
the reciprocal of
A,
is
the pole of
b.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
(') If
101.
Q
S^
;
w.r.t. Sj^,
lines w.r.t.
and conversely.
is
(2) If
PQR
is
a self-conjugate triangle
to the reader.
w.r.t.
then pqr
is
The
proof
left
THEOREM
(i)
102.
If
is
the
centre of S^
w.r.t.
S^,
w.r.t.
is
polar of
(4) ^2
O
is
w.r.t.
S,^.
an
ellipse, parabola, or
S-^.
hyperbola, according as
lies
The proof
1. 2. 3.
is
left
to the reader.
95.
96.
99.
4.
5.
6.
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem
If
loi.
102.
each other.
7.
What
What
is
is
common common
is
8.
9.
Two
What
conies cut at
?
P what
;
to the conies
10.
is
is is
?
.''
11.
12.
What
What
176
13.
PLANE GEOMETRY
P,
[CH.
tangents from P,
14.
the other aie two points on a tangent ^ to a conic 5i Q to Sy meet at 7? construct the reciprocal figure.
; ;
PQR is
;
a conic S\
what
all
descriptive
The
Theorem
98.
The
EXAMPLE.
To
is
a variable conic
line
-4?-.
Fig. 92.
Fig. 93.
S-^
a, b,
c,
d.
line,
of/
w.r.t. S-^.
Then
A, B,
C,
D, and /
is
w.r.t.
Now P
Therefore
Hence we have
fixed point.
four fixed points, then the polars of a given point pass through a
q.e.d.
is
At
first it
by
bit,
^"]
RECIPROCATION
177
becomes clear that the process may be made quite mechanically, without the necessity of referring at each stage to the figure. In the given enunciation, it is merely necessary to make a certain
set of verbal
changes.
in
eit}ier
an element
These are given here in two columns. When column occurs, it must be replaced by the
Point
Line
Collinear
quadrilateral
Concurrent
quadrangle
range
pencil
base of range
join of two points
lie
vertex of pencil
meet of two
pass through
lines
on
locus
envelope
class
degree
point on a conic
tangent to a conic
tangents from a point to a conic
polar
The
points,
move on
third vertex
If
a conic.
fixed points are collinear, then the locus of the third
line.
however the
is
vertex
16.
a straight
If
AB of a triangle at P,
Q, R,
then
17.
AP, BQ, CR
If
a hexagon
are collinear.
18. A variable triangle is inscribed in a fixed conic if two of its sides pass through fixed points, then the third side touches a conic having
;
and
to pass
Two Two
conies can be
line.
drawn
and
to
touch a given
21.
conies touch at
A
Q;
aX
B, C; any
line
through
A
,of
meet on BC.
meets
have two
lie
common
their
common
II.
tangents
D.G.
178
23.
is
PLANE GEOMETRY
If
[c
a quadrangle
is
inscribed in a conic,
its
loci
a conic.
R, then P, Q, R'
QR, RP,
PQ at
P', Q
are two fixed points is a variable point such that tl: 26. A, tangents from /" to a fixed conic are harmonically conjugate to PA, PB
;
is
a conic.
From a
variable point P, on a
common chord
then
UK
passe
PQ is a variabl 28. Two conies S-^, S^ have double contact at A, is any point on S-^, then II{APBQ} chord of Si and touches S^; '\i
;
constant.
two conies ar C, P, Q, R are six fixed points on a conic have double contact with each other and to circumscribe th triangles ABC, PQR respectively then their chord of contact envelope
29.
A, B,
to
drawn
a conic.
30.
If
vertices
31.
lie
w.r.t.
si
A, B,
a variable
lin
{ABCD'} is constant. 32. A system of conies have double contact a.t A, B C is any othe AC, BC cat any one of the conies a.t P, Q then PQ passe fixed point
through
cuts
BC, CD,
DB at
Z>',
B',
then
The
P to
sl
harmon
then
th
from
P to
locus of /"
34.
is
a conic.
conic touches two fixed lines and passes through tw then the locus of the pole of the join of the fixed poini
A variable
;
fixed points
is
two
35.
lines.
P,
w.r.t.
a given conic
If
the tangents
fror
to the conic
meet a
fixed line at
H, K.
is
fixed,
then
PH,
Qi
meet on a
36.
/" is
fixed line.
.S^j, S2, S3 are three conies inscribed in the same quadrilateral a point of intersection of S^ and ^2 then the tangents at P 5i, S^ are harmonically conjugate to the tangents from P to S^.
;
\
37.
fixed lines
and touches tw then the chord of contact passes through one of two fixe
points.
V"-]
38.
If
RECIl^OCATION
'
179
two conies touch at A, and if two lines AP, AR cut the conies at P, R and Q, S, then the chords PR, QS meet on the common chord of the two conies.
39. From two points on a common chord of two conies, tangents are drawn, one to each conic then the diagonals of the quadrilateral thus formed, each pass through a meet of the common tangents.
;
40. Two conies have each double contact with a third conic then the ; chords of contact and a pair of common chords are concurrent, and form
a harmonic pencil.
41. Reciprocate the Example on page 176, taking the centre of the base-conic at a corner of the quadrilateral.
42.
and
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
A,
is
a conic.
If the conic S3 is the reciprocal of the conic Si w.r.t. Sg, prove S2, S3 have a common self-conjugate triangle.
44.
that S],
45.
ABC, and
has A,
line.
46.
36.
POINT REOIPEOCATION.
We
when
circle
circle.
If
is
is
and k
its
and k is called the radius of reciprocation. In general, the value of k is immaterial; for it is easy to see that an alteration in the
value of k merely changes
the
figure
is is
The
utility
of
point-reciprocation
its
focus
into a homothetic figure. due to the fact that the a circle. Three proofs of
be given.
all
The
first
found in
logically
third
is
i8o
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
The
First
reciprocal of a conic w.r.t.
103.
its
one of
foci is
circle.
Method.
,P
,
Fig. 94.
Let
so that
.S
be the
focus,
and
is
to /.
.S
F is
produced to P,
SY .SP^k^i
P
is
.-.
where k
is
Then
the polar of
w.r.t.
is
Now Y moves
conic
is
on the
the
But
S
if
therefore
the locus of /*
is
is
circle,
the conic
a parabola.
q.e.d.
Second Method.
;0
Fig. 95.
Let
infinity
5
by
be the focus of
<d,
<u'.
2,
circular
points at
VII-]
RECIPROCATION
Sui,
i8i
Then
Sot
are tangents to 2.
13,
Now So
.-.
centre S,
is
a.t
to;
w;
<o'.
the reciprocal of
a conic.
[Th. 98.]
co,
a conic through
to';
and
is
q.e.d.
Third Method.
Fig. 96.
Take the
major
axis.
focus
.S
of
as origin
and the
Then
tricity,
the equation of
is
= i + e cos ^,
:
where
e is
the eccen-
and / the semi-latus rectum. Let A = radius of reciprocation P is any point on Produce SF to Q so that SF.SQ^k^; and draw dicular to SQ. Then QJV is the reciprocal of P.
Let
.
{r,
2.
QN perpen-
6)
be the coordinates of F.
k"^
since
/.SO
,^
''^"079'
c =i+ecosO;
.-.
SQ = -T +
7-
COS a; or
SQ- -r-.co&ti = .
ES=z-,
Take a point
centre E, radius
-j,
where
Q.E.D.
at a
distance
r- from
/
the focus.
l82
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOBEM
The
reciprocal of a circle w.r.t.
at
104.
one focus
parabola.
S; and
is
if
6'
lies
The
[It is
proof
left
to the reader.
in either of the
methods given
for
Theorem
103.]
General Properties.
For the sake of
following pages.
brevity,
a definite notation
is
adopted in the
Fig. 97.
The
circle
o-
and the conic 2 are reciprocally related to each fi, whose centre is the focus S of 1, and
,4;
whose radius
is
^
a,
is
the
centre,
and
is
the radius of
a-;
is
the centre
and
2; and
is
the
SL
of 2.
THEOREM
(i)
(2)
105.
The The
point
and the
points at infinity on
<T.
from
(3)
5
(T
to
The asymptotes
of
with
(4)
to
o-.
an
ellipse,
parabola,
o-.
or hyperbola according as
lies
The
proof
is
left
to the reader.
Vll.]
RECIPROCATION
183
THEOREM
(i) (2)
106.
w.r.t.
The The
point
C
left
is
directrix of
is
"
are reciprocals.
are reciprocals.
The proof
[Note that
w.r.t.
2; and
100.]
that
the directrix of
the polar of
S and
;
use
Theorem
47. Use the second method of proof of Theorem 103 to show that the reciprocal of a parabola, focus S, w.r.t. S, is a circle through S.
48.
49. 50.
Prove Theorem
104. 105.
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem
106.
51.
a system
What
w.r.t.
is
conic
53.
a focus
is
S?
;
ABC
5?
a triangle
SA
meets
BC at P
what
is
the reciprocal of
w.r.t.
54.
What
is
w.i'.t.
a diagonal point?
it
;
55.
a point outside
parts of the circle which correspond to the two branches of the reciprocal
hyperbola
56.
?
;
what
is
the reciprocal
base
BC of
a triangle
D,
58. 59.
what
is
is
w.r.t.
What
w.r.t.
a centre of similitude
Reciprocate
two
circles
touch at
a.
line
FAQ
meets
the circles at P,
Q;
Q are parallel.
;
60. Given four points 5, A, B, C, prove that in general, four conies can be drawn through A, B, C having i" as focus and that three of the conies are hyperbolas with A, B, C not all on the same branch ; while the remaining conic may be an ellipse, parabola, or hyperbola having
A, B,
61.
A, cut at B, C, and have a common focus 5 S lies on BC, what is the reciprocal figure w.r.t. 5? 62. O is the circumcentre of the triangle ABC P, Q, P are the poles prove that O is the of BC, CA, AB w.r.t. another circle, centre O incentre or an excentre of the triangle PQP.
conies touch at
if
;
C on Two
the
same branch.
;
63.
find the
locus of
centre.
i84
64.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Three conies have a common focus
;
[CH
the
common
65. If
chords
will
two conies have a common focus, prove that a pair of commor pass through the meet of the directrices corresponding tc
that focus.
66.
prove that
67.
Reciprocate
and
also
a parabola, focus
focus,
intersect at foui
prove that their common chords form four groups of three concurrent lines, each of the three being a common chord of a different
real points
pair of conies.
69.
variable conic
at
variable points P, Q.
that the pole of
70.
have a
common
focus, prove
PQ w.r.t. 2 lies
w.r.t. (i)
on a
fixed line.
:
Reciprocate
A,
(ii)
any point
5,, 52 are
S.^;
two fixed
circles,
its
centres A,
a.
variable circle
touches S^,
centre
71.
is
B being the
foci.
Two
common
same
focus.
From any
point on their
common
last
drawn
focus,
to the parabolas.
72.
PQ
is
if
P to
the
PQ
from the focus 5 to the directrix cuts the curve passes through 5.
A variable
/
of the foci
circle.
parabola touches a fixed conic and has its focus at one of the given conic ; prove that its directrix touches a fixed
74.
is
meet the
directrix in
M, M'.
;
The joins
of
prove that
is
a focal chord.
circle of
PQ
is
an
ellipse,
and
PQ
w.r.t. the
[The auxiliary
two chords PQ,
circle is
the circle
76.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
any point
PR
of a conic are
QR
is
a diameter.
the
If two of the six meets of four tangents to a parabola lie on prove that the remaining four are equidistant from the focus.
VII.]
RECI^OCATION
185
THEOREM
(t)
107.
notation,
f=-y
through
to
meets
a-
sX
H, then
^^
Fu;. 98.
(i)
Produce
SL
to
;
so
is
that
SL.SQ = k^;
and draw
A
QN
perpendicular to
to
" ;
SQ
QN
therefore
by definition a tangent
let
But
QN
iV be the point of contact, so that ENQ = go. is parallel to ES, and is parallel to QS.
..
i:=distance of
from
(2)
axis.
reciprocates into
a tangent to
this
parallel
is
to the
major
line
from
-.
Sri .
b=
SH
k2
Q.E.D.
78.
"c^~ES2-
79.
ES 2?
80. 81.
What
What
i86
82.
PLANE GEOMETRY
What What
is
[CH
J
to the
83.
corresponding directrix?
is
corresponding to 5?
84. 85.
What
What
is
is
S?
w.r.t.
i
a systen:
of conies, having a
87.
common
which
is.
the reciprocal
incircle,
is
equal to the
through a fixed point O, a variable line Reciprocate w.r.t. O drawn, cutting a fixed circle at /", Q; then OP OQ is constant.
:
89.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
OA
is
OPA
;
is
to the tangent at
then
OP^=OY.OA.
90.
Two
common
where
focus
is
.J
sum
91.
one of
common
points.
Two
triangles
conies with the same focus and directrix are such that can be inscribed in one and circumscribed to the other
is
and
latus
fixed point
fixed points.
93.
Two
;
conies,
having a
common focus S, intersect at two and Q; H, K are the poles of PQ w.r.t. the
prove that H, S,
is
K are
coUinear.
ABC;
a hyperbola is drawn to circumscribe the triangle and to have one focus at /; prove that its eccentricity = J, and that its latus rectum = ^r.
95.
lines
OA,
OB
prove that
its
which
96.
5 and
a line through
are focus
and
directrix.
Prove that four conies can be drawn to circumscribe a given triangle, and to have a given point .5" as focus ; and that there exists another conic 2, having 5 as focus, and touching these four conies
;
further,
if
cr
is
as
rectum of
is
double that of
cr.
VII.]
RECIPI^CATION
Reciprocate
;
187
97.
w.r.t.
is
PQR
then
98.
is
PL, PM,
PN are
QR
of a circle
to
QP, TQ,
TR
Pn=PM.PN.
:
Reciprocate w.r.t. O P is a variable point on a fixed circle 2 a fixed point a point is taken on OP such that OP OP' is constant ; then the locus of P' is a circle, unless O lies on 2, in which case it is a straight line.
99.
PQR
is
MR'
is
100. A focal chord PSQ, cuts the corresponding directrix at prove that {PQ,;RS) is harmonic. 101.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
a conic.
102.
O is the circumcentre of the triangle ABC; prove that the major axis of the conic inscribed in ABC with one focus at O is
equal to
103.
OA.
is
PQ,
a variable chord of an ellipse, eccentricity e, subtend5 prove that the locus of the pole of
;
PQ
is
a hyperbola, parabola, or
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
ellipse,
V2
a fixed circle cuts a variable circle belonging to a given coaxal system at P, Q\ then PQ passes through a fixed point situated on the radical axis of the system.
104.
:
any point
A, B, C are the centres of three w.r.t. any point if A', B', C, are the each of which touches the other two corresponding points of contact, then AA', BB', CC, are concurrent.
105.
Reciprocate
circles,
106.
is
as focus and
AB
as directrix
if
and
AC
as directrix;
; 5i is a conic having as focus 52 is a conic having Si, S^, touch BC, prove that their minor ;
ABC
The
ABC, and
having
a point
Aai--;
prove that each of the three conies having 5 as focus, one side of as directrix, and passing through the opposite the triangle
ABC
;
A, A'
B, B'
C,
quadrilateral
circumscribing
.
SA SA'=SB
.
109.
The
sides of a triangle
ABC
touch a parabola at P, Q,
if
is
the' focus,
prove that
88
PLANE GEOMETRY
THEOREM
If the lines /, q are
108.
w.:
PSQ
is
Fig. 99.
SP,
SQ
A
are,
by
definition, perpendicular to /, q.
.,
PSQ = angle
?
between/,
q.
Q.E.D.
110.
is
to
a line
BC
what
What
is
BC of
P,
Q; what
What
(ii) w.r.t.
is
(i) w.r.t.
a point of intersection
is
114.
What
the reciprocal of a parabola w.r.t. a point on t the reciprocal of a conic w.r.t. a point on t
directrix ?
115.
What
O
is
is
director circle ?
116.
the reciprocal of
117.
a point on the circumcircle of the triangle ; A'B'C w.r.t. O ; prove that O, A', B', are concyclic.
ABC
ABC
A', B',
CA,
AB of a triangle, su
common
ai
;
CC
as diameters have a
poir
C are collinear.
CE of a hyperbola
A
prove that
An
asymptote
;
meets a directrix
,
E 5
is
corresponding focus
119.
CES = go.
tangent subtends at
Two parabolas have a common focus S; prove that S an angle equal to the angle between
their
comm
their axes.
VII.]
RECIPHOCATION
Two
chords
189
120.
PR,
;
QR of
is
prove that
LSM=^C) k\PSQ,.
121. Two sides of a triangle are given in position, and the third side subtends a constant angle at a fixed point ; find its envelope.
122.
Reciprocate
fixed line at
is
w.r.t.
/",
two tangents
meet a
Q;\i
PQ subtends
a conic.
Find a point
w.r.t.
similar triangle.
124. Find the envelope of a variable chord of a conic, subtending a constant angle at the focus. Find also the locus of its pole.
125.
PQR
is
if
PSQ,
is
126. If two parabolas have a common focus, prove that their chord bisects the angle formed by their directrices. 127.
7" is
common
is
T to
TQ
subtends
line.
Q is
a straight
;
directrix at
T is the pole of a chord PQ of a conic, focus 5 PQ meets the R prove that SR, ST are the bisectors of the angle PSQ.
;
129.
Two
parabolas, having a
common
focus
^S',
cut sX P,
Q\ prove
that their
130.
common
tangent
point
is
parallel to a bisector oi
PSQ.
From any
have a
common
tangent at Q,
131.
on a common tangent to two ellipses, which drawn to cut the other common A
prove that
QSR is
constant.
if
STP is
132.
If
T is
P on
a parabola
common
focus,
and
133.
to a fixed
parabola
Reciprocate
w.r.t. .^
chord
AB
:
of a circle,
then
TAB= TBA.
Reciprocate (i) w.r t. the focus, (ii) w.r.t. the vertex if a chord a parabola subtends a right angle at the vertex, then the locus of
is
135.
PQ of
its
pole
136.
a straight
line, parallel to
the directrix.
ABC,
touches
BC at A'
if
is
BSA' + ASC=i?>o.
igo
137.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
[c
any point
circle,
concentric with
138.
is
FQ
is
a variable chord.
an
ellipse,
Prove that the opposite sides of a quadrilateral, circumscribii subtend supplementary angles at a focus.
If
140.
common
focus, prove
is
that the
li
perpendicular to
common
141.
tangent.
directions
parabolas have a common focus, and their axes in opposi a straight line parallel to the axis meets them in P, f prove that the tangents at /*, P" intersect on the common chord ai
;
Two
having a
the
common
prove that th
make
143.
sx.
li
through
144.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
then
APB=^.
fro
AB
is
a diameter of a
circle
AOPl
Frove that the locus of the foot of the perpendicular the focus of a parabola to a variable tangent is a straight line.
145. 146.
AC,
circumscribing a conic
that .<4C
is
the diagon;
perpendicular to
BD,
ai
Reciprocate
the orthoceni
is
a focus,
C the
centre,
IS
QST=ECS;
prove that
envelopes a parabola.
149.
The
to
a conic meet
150.
Reciprocate
angle between
PQ
PQ is
at
a chord of a circle
is
then
alternate segment.
151.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
w.r.t.
any point
P, P'
Q,
Q
lie
inverse points
a circle
then P,
F,
Q,
on a
circle, ortl
gonal to 2.
vn.]
RECIftROCATION
if
191
152. PQ, PR are two chords of a rectangular hyperbola; prove that the tangent at is perpendicular to QR.
QPR = ()o,
153.
at
The tangent
and a
;
at
any point
line
through
at
K
154.
prove that
KT
P parallel
focus.
A
;
triangle
drawn through P, Q,
tively
PQR circumscribes a parabola, focus S hnes are R making equal angles with SP, SQ, SR respec;
155. SP is drawn through a focus 5 of a hyperbola, parallel to an asymptote, and cuts the curve at prove that the tangent at P meets the other asymptote on the latus rectum produced.
156.
Two
vertices
of the angle of C.
157.
A, 3 of the triangle APC are fixed. The bisector BAC meets PC at a point on a fixed line. Find the locus
T is
PQ
of a parabola, focus
prove that
the triangles
158.
TPS,
QTS are
w.r.t.
similar.
:
Reciprocate
PQ is
S
two
circles are
;
drawn through
respec-
tively
any point on an ellipse PSQ is a focal chord, PCP' is a prove that the pole of P'Q lies on the auxiliary circle. [Use the property assumed in Th. 103, method (i.)]
159.
is
;
diameter
160.
D
P,
is
prove that a parabola can be described having as focus, and touching AB, BC, CA at their meets with DC, DA, respectively.
ABC;
161.
DB
PH, PK,
QK are the tangents from P, Q to the PHQ, PKQ are equal or supplementary.
QH,
162.
curve
T is
.$
focus
of a conic
;
meets
163.
ST at K
Two
PT
is
parabolas have a
;
common
a straight line
prove that the tangents at its meets with the parabolas form a rectangle, one diagonal of which passes through the
focus, while the other
is
perpendicular to the
axis.
on a conic, a length is subtend a right angle at a fixed point inside the conic prove that the locus of T is the polar reciprocal w.r.t. O of the envelope of normals to the conic.
164.
On
the tangent
to
PT
at
any point
/"
PT
measured so as
192
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CJ
THEOREM
(i)
109.
A
A
common
if
focus,
can be recipn
and
common
corresponding
concentric circles
The
proof
is
left to
[Reciprocate
w.r.t.
Theorems
107,
106.]
THEOREM
(i)
110.
be reciprocated into
w.r.t.
system of coaxal
(2)
A system
a limiting poin
one of the foci; then the conies becom But a system of confoeals have, by definition, four fixe
tangents
common
.".
common
points.
lie
[Two
q.e.d.
(2)
Draw
LH perpendiculs
to
LL.
Then
LH
circles
is
the polar of
w.r.t.
each
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
Z.
conies, having
The
But
become
L H,
w.r.t.
common
focus an
q.e.d.
[p.
Corollary.
The radical axis reciprocates into the second focus and second limiting point reciprocates into the minor axis. [The radical axis is midway between the origin Z and the
;
th
lir
LH,
VU.]
It is interesting to
RECIPROCATION
:io.
t93
to
Theorem
Fig.
Fig. ioi.
;
^,
fl'
H\ S\ H'
fi,
Denote the
Reciprocate
lines SO.,
w.r.t.
.S.
5J2',
HO., HO.' by
the point
a,
b,
c,
d.
The
is
i2.
fi,
touches any
ordinary wiay
centre S, at
We
denote
S^
A,
(or b) is
denote by B.
figure,
and the
h',
s'.
lines
(o,
w' are
w, w'
the reciprocals of
;
0' C,
the lines
c,
d become
are h,
points C,
D on
the joins of C, Z)
A,
D;
Any
confocal, (since
i.e.
it
touches a,b,
c,
d),
A, B, C, D,
a circle through C, D.
is
Hence
CD or h as radical
Moreover
the
The
radical axis
belonging
to
this
system
are
the
A CS, BDS
limiting
and
the point-circle
and the
point-circle
AD, BC,
the
is
minor
axis.
axis.
The
points
of the
coaxal
system
are
and the
reciprocal of the.
minor
Since the figures are reciprocal in every respect, either regarded as generating the other, by reciprocation.
165.
may be
If
two
system of conies have a common focus and a common corresponding directrix; prove that the polars ofany given point w.r.t.
166.
194
167.
PLANE GEOMETRY
directrix,
;
[^
Tangents are drawn to a conic from two variable points which subtend a constant angle at the correspond focus prove that their meets lie on one of two conies, with the sa focus and directrix.
its
168.
A
;
two
a
parallel lines
current
system of conies have a common focus, and touch each prove that the corresponding directrices are ci that the centres are collinear and that the asymptotes enveU
:
circle,
169.
fixed
Reciprocate
circles,
circle.
w.r.t.
any point
its
if
the polar of
centre
w.r.t.
envelopes a
170.
\.o
w.r.t. tangents are drawn from a fixed po system of concentric circles, centre C then the locus of as diameter. points of contact is a circle on
Reciprocate
B.
AC
reciprocal
that focus?
of two
drawn through a limiting point Z of a coaxal system one of the circles at A, B. The tangents 2A A, B another circle of the system at P, Q and R, S respectively prove tl:
line
circles
cuts
(.
PLR=QLS.
173.
if
Two
parabolas have a
is
common
focus
double that of the other, prove that triangl can be inscribed in one and also circumscribed to the other. [Assur the result of Th. 206.]
174.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
&
focus
if
of confocal conies from a fixed point on the major axis, the points contact he on a circle.
175. A system of hyperbolas have a common focus and a corresponding directrix find the envelope of the asymptotes.
;
comm
interse
176.
S: a system of pai abolas have a common foe then the points of contact of the oth tangents from a fixed point on the common tangent, lie on a cin through S.
177.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
6"
178.
Reciprocate
circles of
w.r.t. L: P, Q are conjugate points w.r.t. t\ a given coaxal system then they are conjugate points w.i
;
if /. is
a limiting
point,
PLQ=<)o.
any one
is
common focus 5 ; pro a set of circles, such that the radius proportiona to the distance of its centre from S.
system of similar conies have a
is
VII-]
RECI1IR0CATI0>1
195
a system of similar ellipses with a common focus S touch a prove that the envelope of the corresponding directrix is another similar elhpse, with its centre on; the, given line and one focus
(2) If
fixed
line,
at 5.
180.
Reciprocate
;
w.r.t.
if
any point
line.
centre
is
a straight
w.r.t.
Reciprocate
any point
fixed points, then the polar of a fixed point passes through another fixed
point.
182.
circle of
Prove that the locus of the pole of any tangent to the director a conic w.r.t. that conic is another concentric conic.
conies have a
:
183.
Two
common
ing directrix
that
a tangent at
to
Q,SP = PSR.
184.
SL
is
an ellipse
at
is
;
drawn through
prove that
185.
it
to
A,
and
cuts
two
in /",
Q\
find
the
envelope of PQ.
[Reciprocate
186.
B^
;
of a constant angle passes through a fixed point vertex moves on a fixed line find the envelope of the other arm.
;
One arm
the
187.
5
(Ti,
is
cti
o-g is
directrix
if o-j
188.
if
The
is
common
focus
and equal
eccentricities
the directrix of ^2
of 5i
189.
an asymptote o
variable point
at right angles
P
;
to
a straight
line.
196
PLANE GEOiMETRY
[CK
TEEOEEM m.
If S^ and ^2 are two given conies, there exists conic S, such that 5j, ^2 are reciprocal w.r.t. ^.
in
general
5j and S^ into two conies S\, S'2 having a commoi and the same principal axes. [If FQJi is the common sel conjugate triangle, this is effected by projecting QJ? to infinit A and QPJi into a right angle.] Let A\CAj, B\CB^ and A'^CA^, B'^CB^ be the principal axe
Project
centre
of S\, S\.
Take
points A, A' B, B' on CA^, CB^ such that C^2 = c^'2 = cA^ cA^ and CB'^ = CB"^ = CB^ CB,_. Let S' be the conic having A'CA, B'CB as principal axes. Then the reciprocal of S\ w.r.t. S' passes through A^, A'^, B.^
;
.
.
B\
as principal axes,
and
therefore coincide
with ^'2;
S\ and S\
are reciprocal
w.r.t.
S'
5' w.r.t.
whic
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
The
190.
three conies
If 5], 52 are
S-^,
S^,
S have
common
S-^ is
self-conjugate triangl
its
own
reciprocal w.r,
52, prove that 5j, 52 have double contact with each other.
191.
If
prove that
a rectangular hyperbola is reciprocated w.r.t. a point O lies on the director circle of the reciprocal conic. special case arises, if O lies on the rectangular hyperbola?
is
common
self-conjugate triangU
V"-]
193.
RECIPROCATION
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
is
197
C: a variable
circle is
drawn through a
circle,
fixed
point
and
its
radius
centre
is
then
common chord
a conic, one
at C.
The
;
centre
a circle ^2 hyperbola.
C of a' circle 5i is a vertex of a square circumscribing prove that the reciprocal of S^ w.r.t. S^ is a rectangular
195. PQ is a variable chord of a rectangular hyperbola, subtending a right angle at a fixed point O, not on the curve prove that PQ envelopes a parabola, having O as focus.
;
196.
in
-a
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
H: C
:
the orthocentre
B oi
a.
triangle inscribed
rectangular hyperbola
lies
if
on the curve.
a conic touches the sides of a triangle, its director circle touches
197.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
its
circumcentre O, then
its
director circle
[Use Ex.
196.]
Prove that the reciprocal of a parabola w.r.t. a parabola is a conic with one asymptote parallel to the axis of the second parabola.
199.
200.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
a focus
point w.r.t.
drawn through the vertex A prove that the locus of the pole of the line through their other meets with the conic is a straight line, perpendicular to the axis. [Reciprocate w.r.t. AJ]
201.
of a conic
202. If a fixed line meets a system of concentric circles, prove that the tangents at the points of intersection envelope a parabola.
203.
ellipse
which subtend
a concentric
circle.
hyperbola
Prove that a conic reciprocated w.r.t O becomes a rectangular if, and only if, O lies on its director circle.
205. (1) Prove that any two conies can be reciprocated into rectangular hyperbolas. [Use Ex. 204.] (2) Hence prove that the director circles of a system of conies touching four straight lines are coaxal. 206.
Reciprocate
w.r.t
any point
Z'
is
hyperbola, centre
the tangent at
then
PTC=PCT.
198
207.
circle,
PLANE GEOMETRY
/
is
[CH.
which
a variable tangent to a fixed conic. P is the centre of the prove that the is the inverse oi p w.r.t. a fixed point O
;
locus of
Z' is
a conic.
208. Prove that the reciprocal of a hyperbola, eccentricity e, w.r.t. a parabola having a common focus and directrix, is an ellipse of
eccentricity -, with the
209.
directrix.
Two
conies
S-^,
OA,
nt
OB
the
polar of a variable point on 5i w.r.t. S^ meets is of constant area. that the triangle
OA,
OB
P,
Q; prove
OPQ
210. A hyperbola and a parabola have a common focus and touch one another and their common chord, length 2c, passes through the focus; if 2/=latus rectum of parabola, prove that the eccentricity of
;
the hyperbola
211.
is
What
is
common
is
self-conjugate triangle?
212.
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
if
a conic
centre
is
a conic
Reciprocate
w.r.t.
is
a point inside a
is
circle,
centre
circle,
whose centre
:
at the mid-point of
AO.
the
Reciprocate
lies
w.r.t.
ABCD
215.
on the auxiliary circle of the conic which touches ABC, and of which i? is a focus.
focus" of a hyperbola as
centre, a
w.r.t.
With the
circle
is
drawn,
a
P
this
is
the
pole
the
hyperbola of
at
if
directirix
Q, prove
circle.
PQR
as a self-conjugaK
their
own
reciprocals w.r.t. S.
217.
The
one of the
if
is
prove that the inradius = system of conies have a common focus and correspondinj prove that the normals to the conies at the extremities c the latera recta through the common focus touch a fixed parabola.
218.
directrix
:
VII.]
RECIPROCATION
If the conic ^'
199
the conic
i,
219i
Z,'^
is
reciprocated
;
w.r.t.
S=0; L=0
being the equation of a given line prove that, if the reciprocal of any point P on S=L^ touches the reciprocal conic at P', then PP' passes through a fixed point.
220.
that
xy = c'^ may be
its
own
reciprocal w.r.t.
22V.
Each
of the
conies
5,,
^2
is
its
own
reciprocal
w.r.t.
the
prove that they have double contact with each other, and that they are also self-reciprocal to any conic having double contact with
other
;
S-i
and ^2
Analytical Treatment.
It
is
this
treatise to develop, or
even to
by taking a
possible to indicate
quite
briefly the
manner
in
Fig. 103.
..Ox,
Qy
24, let
f-,^j where
x, y, z are
x+y + z=i.
OB
The equation
Now
If ^,
the line
therefore of AB AB known
is is if |,
a;^
t],
-t-ji'r?
= zf.
AB.
f are given.
Consequently we
Vj
where
a,
b,
c are
constants,
we obtain a system of
lines,
having
200
^,
T),
PLANE GEOMETRY
f as
[Cl
passes throug
x y
a
shall call
T)~ c
a+6 + c
lines.
Consequently,
we
determined by
this
system of concurrent
We now
POINT-COORDINATES.
(/, g,
LINE-COORDINATES.
{f, g,
h)
is
a point.
is
h)
is
a line.
is
fx-Vgy = h%
Further the point
line.
(/,
g,A)lies
a point.
ila/+l>g=c.
while the line (f, g, h) passes through the point a^-^by\=ci af+bg'=ch: for the coordinates of all lines through the poi:
a^-k-b^
= ci mut
i X2
\
hy the
definition.
z^)
;
Zj)
{x^, y^,
(x^, y^,
Zg)
7i y^
coUinear
if
j
=o
(^1, V],
Q;
(^2> '?2'
fi
x^
y^
^1
ni
Cl
(Ig,
173,
fg)
are concurrent
if
ii
V2
ii
It
is
if
is
provi
lines in a plar
an exactly similar reciprocal theorem holds for the correspondi system of lines and points for it is merely necessary to substiti
:
222.
line
whose coordinates
(i
(i)
i. i)-
223.
2^-37,-1-4^=0;
5^=2f.
lines
224.
(i)
whose point-equations
(4)
y = mx+cs
(2)
ax+byo;
(3)
x=o;
;!;cosa-l-/sin
a=^
(5)
!-?=I,
(6)
z=o.
Find the line-equations of the points whose point-coordinates o; (2) 2, 0,-1 (3) the origin; (4) the point at infinity .y = 2x; (5) the point at infinity on jc = ^.
225.
(1) o,
;
VII.]
RECIPROCATION
201
line
226. Find the point-coordinates of the fixed point on the variable whose line-coordinates are ^ = 24^3/,' >j=^3 2Z', where t varies.
227.
point,
Find the line-coordinates of the line traced out by the moving whose point-coordinates are i,\-Vt, i-2t), where / varies.
228.
whose
point-coordinates are
229.
3);. (-'4,
5).
the, hnes,
yc+2y = yz.
line-equations
Prove
that
the
a^ + brj + ci=o,
lines
are parallel
232.
^=
The
plane.
introduction of z and C has been made, in order to secure a finite and ideal, in the x, y
Thus the line at infinity is represented by the equation = 0; It often happens and the line-equation of the origin is C=however that this wider scope of interpretation is of little value to the problem in hand, and merely serves to complicate the analysis. When therefore it is more convenient, z and f will be omitted and
;
in
that case x, y,
234.
(i)
$,
17
will
stand for -,
X y
-,
^
-,
f)
-.,
respectively.
Any
(jti,
can be
^ suitable value of
(,,
;i),
X.
Any
line
{$2, Vs)
can be
represented by
YYTJ^' "T+X'y'
^
,
r-
^^ ^ suitable value of A.
/
235.
(l)
The
/xj+Xxa
(
y,
>
+ Xy.,\
\_^^
\,x' )''
(2)
The
(^1,
,,,),
(^7~X-'. '^-TTk\
{^2,V2), [
j+f,'
1+^
202
PLANE GEOMETRY
POINT BECIPROCATION.
[c
x^+y^i.
be the line-coordinates of the polar of any point {x',/] Then {^, ij') a^re the coordinates of the line xx' +yy' =1.
Let
(^', 7j')
y') traces
(^,
Then
the
coordinates
rj)
/{^, v)-o.
Now
_/(x, y)
this
line
(^,
17)
envelopes
the
reciprocal
cur
=o
w.r.t.
the circle
?)
x^+y^=i.
is
Consequently /(^,
/{x, y) = o
w.r.t.
=o
x^+y^=i.
method
for
The
deducing
EXAMPLE.
To
The
Let
find
the
point-equation
2j}'
of
the
reciprocal
of
the
cor
ax'^+2Axy + liy^+2gx +
+ co
w.r.t.
the circle
is
x^+y^=i.
a^^ + 2h^r)
(^, r])
(x',
y
(
Then
If this line (^,
rf)
^x'
+ ir)y'=i
we have
a^^
Eliminating
^(ay'^
r^
from
and
(2)
we have
if
2hx'y'
Now
{x,
y)
tl:
and
therefo:
roots.
{ay"^
2hx'y'
-t-
bx"^) {cy"^
+ 2^'
Simplifying,
of {x,
y')
x\bc -P) + 2xy{fg - ch) +y^ {ac-g'') - 2x{fh - bg) - 2y{gh - af)+ab ~K- = o\
or, with the usual notation,
2Gx-2Fy+C=o,
VII.]
RECIPJ^OCATION
.4,
203
a,
b,
c,
where
B,
C,
J']
f, g, k, in
the determinant
g f
c
S
If S^{x, .r)
Q.E.F.
conies,
we know
is
points
= ) denote the point-equations of two any given conic through their four corrimon represented by an equation of the form S^^'KS^ = o,
S:^(x, j')
= o,
that
where X
is
2j(f,
it
i\)
= o,
'^^{^,
ij)
=o
denote
two conies,
common
tangents
represented by an equation
ASg = o,
Now
by t
y=
all
ix + d
are given
^. = = ~,
-\
= o,
^^-l->j^
= o.
are,
by
definition, a
=o
is
the line-equation
it
conic,
is
represented by an equation
form
A.
'2{^,
i))
+ X{^^ + -q^) = o,
to
verify
for
constant
It
is
interesting
analytically
theorem
that
the
is
a limiting point
Take the
origin
at
let
{a,
o)
be the
of
the
Then
x^ +y^
= o and
- aY +y^ = o
are
two
circles
coaxal system.
is
represented by
\{x^+y^) +
ix-aY+y^ = o.
w.r.t.
x^-{-y^=i
is
which
represents
one of a system
of
confocal
conies,
by our
q.e.d.
previous work.
The
reader
should
note
that
this
is
simply
the
analytical
statement of the
mode
204
236.
.V-
PLANE GEOMETRY
Find the line-coordinates of the
I
;
[CH.
common
common
tangents of the
cir
+y^ =
237.
X--
2.x-
+y^ = o.
tangents of the co
238.
w.r.t.
the circle
Find the line-equation of the reciprocal of the conic ^x^ jtr2-l-^^= I and deduce its point-equation.
;
3j/'
239.
to the conic
Find the line-coordinates of the tangents from the point whose line-equation is ^^ + i^r) + yq''=l.
(2
240.
w.r.t.
the conic
Find the hne-equation of the rea^rocaX oi x^+^y+-2y^-2x .x' + 2i}^=\ and deduce its point-equation.
;
.'
241.
it
parabola.
[Note
^=0,
>)
= o.]
2=0 is the line-equation of a conic and if a=0, p=0, 7 the line-equations of four points, interpret geometrically equations (l)2-k.ap=0; (2)2-ko2=0; (3)2-ka=0; (4) S-k=
If
8=0 are
(5)
ap-k.78=0; where k
is
a constant.
243.
by
-o^.s -1-75^-^
=1) where X
varies.
244.
w
--
ax2-|-2hxy-l-by2=l
equation of a confocal
it
back
into point-coordinates.]
245. (i) Find the line-equation of the pole of ^, 77 w.r.t. the co whose Hne-equation is a^^ + 2hir) + brf+2gi-^2f'r) + c=o.
(2) (3)
Hence
Taking the general equation of a conic touching four lines the line-form a/3-i .yS=o, prove tliat the locus of the centres of cor
touching four fixed lines
246.
is
a straight
line.
out an analytical proof of Brianchon's theorem, in li coordinates, similar to that of Pascal's theorem in point-coordina
Work
150.
on page
CHAPTER
VIII.
PENCILS.
back to Pappus, but that the general theory of ranges and modern. It is difficult to estimate the precise contribution of Desargues and his followers, few in number but As the method of projection came into more of great ability. general use, greater attention was naturally directed towards the
lines dates
pencils
is
essentially
theory of cross
ratios.
And
these
researches
were crowned by
the comprehensive
1852.
This
treatise,
and a sense of power, His discovery of the double points of cobasal homographic ranges leads him to an ingenious method of solving a wide group of constructions, and the general theory of involution, which is seen to be a special case of homography, provides a new means of introducing imaginary To weigh however the influence of elements into pure geometry.
of
homography a
it
generality of statement
which place
among
it
is
necessary to
account his invaluable historical investigations of the work done in former centuries, contained in his Apergu Historique,
his
own
we
For convenience of
Part
I.
reference,
shall
first
enumerate certain
[See
(i) The cross ratio of the range formed by four collinear points A,
The
cross
ratio
of the
pencil
lihes a,
B,
C,
is
A R CD {ABCD} = -^^j^^.
i3
^^,^^j
^ sin^^^
sm ad. &mcb
makes
A
[ab denotes the angle b
with
a.]
2o6
(2) If the joins
PLANE GEOMETRY
of corresponding
are
equiIf the
[c
rays
of
collinear,
are
eqi
cross.
If
ranges,
self-corresponding
the
two equicross 4-ray penci different vertices, have self-corresponding ray, the mee
If
with
of the other
are collinear.
corresponding ra
{ABCD\
if,
is
unaltered
in
{aicti}
is
unaltered in value,
letters
value,
letters are
are
inte
letters a
{ACBD} = {ADBC}, the range {AB CD] is harmonic. (6) If .4, j5, C are three fixed col(5) If
;
{acdd}={addc},
cd}
a,
is b,
the
peni
{ai
harmonic.
c are three
if
If
fixed
co
linear points,
and
one
if
is
a constant,
point
is
a constai
lii
then there
is
X such that
{ABCX\ = k.
A, B, on
C
/'.
on a base
/;
A,
B',
Ca
whi(
on a base
/';
Jf
is
a variable point on
/;
X'
is
the
point on
/'
for
{ABCX) = {A'BC'X'}.
It is
Let
OA = a, OX=x;
hypothesis,
0'A'
= a',
0'X'
= x';
but
etc.
By
f^^f^-^^r^r,
=k',
a
.
.
CX=.-c,
etc.;
.".
X-
;,
X -a pxx + qx + rx' + s = o,
;
where
k,
k'
are constants.
where /,
q,
r,
s are
constants
which
is
(II.)
O,
on the
fixed lines
/,
/';
X, X'
variable points on
/',
VIII.]
207
Let
x^, Xg, x^
x'^,
and
let
x\,
Now
But
Therefore
{x^x^^^^} J^2-Xi)(Xi-Xsy
(x^
X-^j^X^-X^)
definition.
x-,= V
px\-\-q
+"^
by
'
X
-
-X ^
^-1 +
-^
''^1.
('^^'i
/x\+q
Jix'^
+q
_
:
Similarly bimiarly
x, x
-x - i^Vz^jK^fjlM
^3-(^^,^^^)(^^,^ + ^y
ix X X X
^1) (^2
"" ^3)
(* 4
""^
1) (^ 2
~*
3)
{x\x'^'gX\}.
Q.E.D.
We may
prove
(II.) in
another way
as before, let
^, f'
= {x\x'^'^^'}.
by
.
This relation
is
identically satisfied
^ = ^i\
^ = ^2!
f = *3\
Now
The
by
(I.),
+ Q^ + J?^' + S=o.
axe then determined uniquely, in terms
values -P:
Q:R:S
x'^,
by substituting for
^,
^'
+ qx + rx' + s = o
is
satisfied
by the same
is
~ > !, etc. X = Xi) .. P:Q,:R:S=p:q:r:s. Therefore the value of ^ arising from {x\x^'.^^'\ = {xj^2'*^3'^4} the same as the value of x arising from px^oc + qx^ -\-rx' -Vs = o
is
and
therefore equal to
>
x\
\ tV-i
iXtyjOt^X i
^-^
"1
-1
Oif cyAi
oiA"
aX'
Definition.
4', B\ C, ... X', ..., are two ranges of ppints If ^, ^, C, ... ^, ... on the same or different bases and if the cross ratio of any four
;
:
3o8 points P, Q, a,
PLANE GEOMETRY S
of one range
is
[c
spending points
F, Q, R,
to be liomographic.
In (I.), it is proved that any pair of corresponding points X, of two given homographic ranges are connected by a relation
the form
X, x'
q,
r,
s are constants,
ar
denote the distances of X, X' from fixed origins on the base Conversely, in (II.), it is proved that, if two ranges are generated 1
a pair of points X, X' moving so that their distances 0X=. = X, from fixed origins O, 0' on the two bases are connects
OX
by a relation of the form pxx' + qx + rx' -^5 = 0, where /, g, r, s a: constants, then the two ranges are homographic. These two results may be stated in one theorem The existence of an equation of the form pxx' + qx + rx' + s =
:
is
two
ranges, generate
from
are homographic.
characteristic of the
ft
The fundamental
fact that
it
homographic
relation
is tl
one to-one correspondence. To any point either range, there corresponds one and only one point of the oth range. This is put in evidence very clearly by the relation, whic is linear in each of the variables x, x ; but it is embodied, with equ
sets
up
is
base
OABC, OA'B'C
0^ = i, OB = 2, 0C=
tl
and OA' = i, OB'='i, OC'=i>. Prove that the equation determining homographic ranges {ABC ...\ ,{A' ,B ,C' ,..}f is xxf ^fjx "jx! - '^ o.
2.
In Ex.
I,
if
on the
line,
two ranges.
3.
Two homographic
second range corresponding to CO and .r=-2, -f-2, -3, -t-3. Verify that the cross ratio of each set of four points is the same as cross ratio of the corresponding points.
in the
x=-\,
-M,
o,
tl
4.
With the
relation of Ex.
3, if
infinity
/ and on /', /
/,
/'
whii
and
if
X, X' a
XI .X'J' is
constant
Determine the relation defining two homographic ranges on t same base, such that the points 2,-5 correspond to themselves in tl two ranges and the point -2 in the first corresponds to the point
in the second.
viil.]
209
6. Two homographic ranges, on the same base, with the same origin, are defined by the relation xx" -x-/\sc' + 6=o. Find the points of the
o,
1, 2,00 of the
first,
i,
and
2,00
self-
a,
;S
Two homographic
ranges, on the
same
same
origin,
x 4x' + 6 =
;
base at distance $ from the origin A', A correspond to a according as it is regarded as a point of the
the x'-range
8.
:
.ar-range or
prove that
A'A = -t^
7,
-77
if
the
homographic
s
relation
'
is
A'A=
and
^''y}-f^ t!'lt
Hence prove
also X',
first
Deduce
9.
from
first
principles.
6, if / and /' are the points corresponding regarded as belonging to the jr'-range and jr-range
Two homographic
...}
are connected by
OAB
is
a straight line;
OA=a, OB=b\
defining the
Y,
homographic ranges {OAoi ..,}, {'a BO ...}. Y' are any two pairs of corresponding points, prove that {AXYY'} = {BX'Y'Y}.
result of Ex. 9 holds
X, X'
good
for
If the ;i:-range
by the relation y-range and the ar"-range. If two ranges are homographic homographic to each other.
14.
if
and the ^-range are connected by the relation if the ;ir-range and the;r"-range are connected Pxx"+Qx + Rx" + S=o, find the relation between the
to the
the
With the notation of Ex. 13, if the three ranges are cobasal and same two points are self-corresponding in the two pairs of ranges,
prove that
D.G.
II.
-p=g^^=;^.
O
g+r
210
15.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Two homographic
ranges are determined by the relation,
pxx'+gx+rx' + s=o
prove that the points at other, if and only if/=o.
16.
a,
infinity in the
to e;
P are
same
if
same
origin,
determined by
{j.Xfi^
pxx' + qx+r3r'+s=o X, X' are a variable pair of corresponding points, prove that
constant.
17.
is
With
i6, find
is
harmonic.
18.
Two homographic
xy-x ^+6=o. Find the points P, corresponding to the origin for the two ranges. If R, N' S, S' are any other two pairs of corresponding points, pre that RS', R'S, meet on PQ'. If /, correspond to the points at infinity on the two bases, prove tl
are defined by the relation
;
PQ!
19.
is
parallel to //'.
i8,
if the homographic relation meet on the fixed line px+gy=
R'S,
hypxx'+q(x+x')+s=o if the coordinates of P, P' equation ax^ + 2ix+c=o, prove thiitpc+sa = 2fi.
If -E,
th
\PP'
21.
EF)
Two
harmonic.
{ABC/oo D...\
are defined by xx' + qx+rx' +s=o.
{A'B'C'osfD'...},
If the origin is transferred to
t
mid-point
becomes
x:>^
-g'{x-x^) + s' =
the .r'-ran
E,
F are
DOUBLE POINTS.
Consider two homographic ranges on the same base, defin by the relation pxx +qx + rx' + s = o, referred to the same orig
li
x = x';
in
which
cai
+ {q + r)x + s = o.
x,
which are
real,
coincide;
+ rf-^ps>, =, <o.
vm.]
211
Definition.
corresponds to
on the common base of two homographic ranges itself for the two ranges, it is called a double point. (III.) Two homographic ranges on the same base have always two double points which may be real, coincident or imaginary. And if there are more than two double points, then every point
If a point
is
a double point.
is of the second degree, Since the equation px'- f (^ + /-) + 5 = there are always two double points. If, however, there are more
than two
satisfied
by more
P = q; ^ + r=o; s = becomes
x')
o,
^(x
=o
is
or
x = x',
q.e.d.
(IV.)
If
F are
if
{EAFA\
constant.
Let B, B' be any other pair of corresponding points. With the usual notation (p. 206), from II., we have
{EAFB} = {EA'FB'}
{a-e){b-f) ^b-e)(a-f)
(a-e){a'-/)
(a-e){b'-f)
{b-e)(b'-f)
{b'-e){a'-f)'
_
Q.e.d.
22. 23.
{EAFA']=^^^=-y^.
is
q = r.
(V.)
With the usual notation, if {EAFA'} State and prove the converse.
If
similar,
i.e.
one of the double points is at infinity, the ranges are the line joining any two points is proportional to the
corresponding points.
By
px^
:.
^^o must
satisfy the
= o.
212
If y>
PLANE GEOMETRY
y
>
2,
qy^-ry'-\-s
.-.
q(y-z)+r(j>'-z') = o;
.
.',
y -z
(VI.)
If
7=
=
q
constant.
Q-E.i
infinity is a
double point. Let A, A' be a fixed pair and X, X' a variable pair of
responding points.
X -a
?-,
i'
-;
is
constant
x-rx' = s, where
.'.
are constants;
at infinity.
relation qx-\-rx!
Q.E.i
is
24.
Two
by the
is
= s;
What
is
Two
OA, OA',
are def
1
by the
relation
qx + r.r'=s',
referred to the
common
origin O.
mid-point of PP'.
26. Prove that a variable tangent to a parabola generates sir ranges on two fixed tangents. [With the fixed tangents as axes, equation of the parabola may be written \/ax+\6j'=i.]
properties
of homographic
pencils
may be
treated
similar manner.
To
a variable line
of the second
Y=M^
M^
is
y = m^x
set
of the
first
set,
we make
it
correspond, choosing
so that
cross ratios of the two sets of lines are equal. therefore given
by
{M^ - M^ {M^ - Ms) ^ (w, - m^){m^ - m^) (M, - J/j) ( J/2 - M^) {m, - Wj) (2 - /g)'
This leads to a relation of the form pM^ m^ + qM^ + rm^ + s where /, q, r, s are constants. This relation has the characteristic property, that to any value 01 there corresponds one and only one value of M^,, and conver
.
The correspondence
is
homograph
VIII.]
21^
Conversely, if any two pencils of concurrent lines are connected by a relation of the form
pM
This
is
m + qM+ rm-\-s-o,
is
equal to that
proved
in precisely the
same way
lines
^=i> X=\, ranges whose corresponding points are determined by y = m, Y=M. Hence any theorem relating to ranges can be
transformed into a property of pencils.
Definition.
If
ratio of
corresponding rays of the other, then the two systems are said to form homographic pencils.
previous work we have the following important theorem The existence of an eg.uation of the form pMm + qM + rm + s = the necessary and sufficient condition that two pencils, generated
:
From our
is
from
27.
it,
are homographic.
Determine the homographic relation, for which y=x,y = 2x,y = yc V=;}X, Y=6X are sets of corresponding lines; and find the lines corresponding to y = o and x=o. If the a.xes of reference coincide, find the two rays which are selfcorresponding for the two pencils.
and
Y=X,
28.
The
relation defining
is
Mm + M-m+
find the four rays corresponding to
H-k=^^
Deduce a theorem
30.
pMm
If
'
homographic
to a third pencil,
prove
homographic
are the
to
each other.
pencils,
OE,
OF
defined hy
same axes
OP, OP'
constant.
prove that
0{EPFP'}
is
214
PLANE GEOMETRY
DOUBLE BAYS.
Consider two homographic pencils, with the same vertex, defi
by the relaiion
pMm + ^M+rm + s = o,
pnfi + {^
referred to the
if
same a
which c
M==m,
in
+ r)m + s = o.
real, coincidi
+ rY - 4ps>, =, <o.
vertex of two homographic pen
it
Definition.
If a ray through the
common
corresponds to
(VII.)
itself for
is
called a double
Two
the
same
vertex
may be
real,
coincident, or imagin;
rays,
And
if
there are
ray.
double
The
proof
is
e,
left
page 211).
(VIII.) If
and
is
if
a,
a'
are a varia
constant.
The proof
(IX.)
fixed
is
left
page 211).
An
angle
POP'
of constant
rays
vertex
then
the
pencils, having as
Let
y = Mx, y = mx
hypothesis,
I
By
+ Mm
.-.
-^ = constant =
c,
^
(say) J / \
cMm- M+m + c = o;
by putting
.-.
..
The double
.'.
M=m =
since
ii.;
+ c=o;
fj?=-x
c=\=o.
[If
c=o, the
lines
.-.
y ix;y= -ix
double rays of two homograp pencils with the same vertex, then corresponding rays are inclir
at a constant angle.
pMm + gM+rm + s = o.
+ s = Q.
q
Then
the double rays are given by pfj?-^{q + r)iJ, But by hypothesis, this is the same as /i^ + i = o
..
p = s and
+ r = o;
VIII.]
215
.-.
M- = p = constant. n^ + Mm r
VI
I
p (Mm +
i)
= r{M -m)
q.e.d.
(XI.) (1) If
if is
is a variable angle of constant magnitude, and are the isotropic lines through O, the pencil 0{FIF'J} of constant cross ratio.
POP
if
01,
OJ
(2)
Conversely,
the pencil
0{PIP'J)
is
of constant cross
ratio,
where 01,
is
OJ
POP
of constant magnitude. In either case 01, OJ are the double rays of the homographic pencils generated by OP, OP'. The first part therefore follows
(X.).
reader will find no difficulty in giving a direct analytical proof, see Ex. 32, 33.
32.
The
y=-ix
33.
constant,
\i
-r if
"i m'.is
a harmonic pencil
y = mx, y=m'x
y= ix
is
constant,
prove that
y=mx, y = m'x
constant angle.
34.
prove that the angle between the lines [This result is due to Laguerre.]
35. 37. lines
Prove VII.
If
Prove VIII.
prove that
the pair of
if
A.
u^
= a^x-\b^+c-^,
u-i
u^ =
a^+b^+c^,
Ui
;
\ku2=o,
varies
38. 39.
and that
pencils,
by using
143.
line coordinates.
Use Ex. 37
to prove
Theorem
40. y = inx, y P=m'x are two variable lines OP, AP, passing through the origin and the fixed point (o, yS) respectively. If they make a constant angle with each other, prove that OP, generate homographic pencils, having the isotropic lines in each pencil as corresponding rays. Find the equation of the locus of and interpret
AP
Two homographic
and
(o, /3),
pencils,
whose
vertices
O,
o)
meet at P, prove that the py^ + (g' + r)xy+sx^-pfyr-r^=o, which represents a curve of the second degree, passing through O, A.
If a
is
2i6
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CI
THEOREM
A, B,
112.
C are thrc
on
It is possible to construct in
pairs of points F,
the cross
ratio
of any
four
of the
^, ... is equal to that of the corresponding points of the rang A',B', C", .../", Q,....
Fig. 104.
points F,
V
let
/'.
on AA'.
VB'; FC,
VC
and
/" is th(
F" be
the meet of
VF
and
/",
anc
R,
^S,
...are
any points on
/"
/,
and
Q',
The
construction
is
Again,
{AB'CF') = {ABCP),
^i^=^l^^.
F' -^^,
P
is
is
given,
is
fixed
and
therefore
there
is
Hence
possible in one
VIII.]
217
THEOREM
a, b, c
113.
a', b',
are three
possible to construct in
one and only one way, pairs of lines p, p' q, q such that the cross ratio of any four of the
^, ... is
a',
b',
through L,
a,
b,
c,
L',
lines
...p,
equal to
c', ...
that
of the corresponding
lines
of the
pencil
p\
2i8
PLANE GEOMETRY
[ci
THEOREM
114.
If two ranges {A, B, ... F, ...}, {A', B', ... F', ...} are eac homographic to a third range {A-^, B^,...Fj, ...}, then they ar homographic to each other. or {FQRS}=^{F^Q^Ii^S^} and {F'QF'S'} = {F^Q^R^S^)
;
.-.
{FQRS] = {F'QF'S'};
...
.-.
F,
...},
{A',
...
THEOREM
Homographic ranges reciprocate
116.
into
homographic
pencils.
(2).
The
proof
is
left to
/'
the reader
use
Theorem 96
is
still
If the
bases
/,
coincide,
Theorem 112
l^
true, for
it
a range
...
A-^,
B^,C^,
F^,
...
homographi
/'
the
range A, B,
C,
th
C,
...
homographic
C^,....
Theorem 112 may be stated as follows Homographic ranges on th same or different bases exist and are determined uniquely, whei
:
oi
Definitions.
(i)
Two Two
if
the joins c
(2)
more ranges
range following
it
in the sequence.
VIII.]
219
THEOREM
If
115.
b' , ...p' , ...)
two pencils
{a,
6, ...J>, ...},
{a',
are each
homo-
For
{p'q'rs')
{p^q^r^s^);
...},
THEOREM
Homographic
117.
The proof
is
the reader.
Theorem 113
is
still
true, for
it
only necessary to take an auxiliary vertex Zj (for preference on a), and to construct through it a pencil Oj, \, c-^,...p^, ...homographic to the pencil
Z' the pencil
a',
b',
c, ...p, ... and then to construct through homographic to <2j, 3j, Cj, ... Using the definition of two homographic pencils (page 213), Theorem 113 may be stated as follows: Homographic pencils with the same or different vertices exist and are determined uniquely, when three given lines through one vertex correspond to three
a, b,
...
c,
Definitions.
(i)
Two Two
if
the meets of
if
one or
more
{a^...(a')
is
following
it
in the sequence.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CI-
THEOEEM
Projective ranges are hotnographic
:
118.
The
{A{)
is
proof
is
left
to the reader. If
/,
/'
/'
if
however
coincides with
/,
(^1), (^2)
needed.]
THEOREM
If
120.
self
The
left
to the reader.
THEOREM
If
122.
lies
on
VIII.]
THEOREM
Projective pencils are homographic
pencils are projective.
:
119.
the reader.
If Z,
if
required
L! are distinct, only one auxiliary however Z' coincides with Z, two auxiliary
ranges
(a-^,
THEOREM
If
121.
different
vertices
have one
The
[Use
left
to the reader.
on page 206.]
THEOREM
If
123.
,
...p',
g,
...}
i"l
Fig. 107.
ad,
bb',
.-.//,
line
0,
and
let
harmonic range.
But
.".
vj>,
vo,
vh
is
a fixed point;
q.e.d.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
Case
is
II.
meet of
it
/,
/'
/,
/'
;
by
or Z>' according as
is
regarded
C,
are collinear.
is
PC,
PC C and
is
the meet of
lies
the meet of
line.
PQ,
PQ
on
D.
which
is
a fixed
I.
q.e.d.
:
Case
Since
may
is
the meet of
PP, QQ;
lies
the meet of
P Q, PQ
lies
on
the polar of
w.r.t.
= PQ)
and
l'{
= PQ);
and therefore
on a
fixed line.
Definition.
If
{A,...P,
Q, ..),
{A',...P,
Q',
}
is
are
two homographic
is
the locus of
PQ, P'Q
is
two ranges.
We
ordinarily employed.
VIII.]
223
\.=pd
Fig. log.
Case
is
II.
c or d'
according as
it
is
regarded
belonging to (a) or
c,
(a');
c,
d'.
Now
the joins oi pq', p'q; pc' p'c; pd', p'd are concurrent.
,
is
is
d.
c'd,
which
is
a fixed point.
q.e.d.
Definition.
If {a, ...p, q, ...}, {a, ...p', q, ...} are two homographic pencils with different vertices, the fixed point which lies on the join of
pq', p'q is called the cross-centre of the
two pencils.
is
a more suggestive name than the term " homographic centre," which is ordinarily employed.
follow Dr. Filon in adopting what
We
224
42. 43. 44. 45.
46.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Prove Theorem
ii6.
117. 118.
119.
[c
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem Prove Theorem Prove Theorem Prove Theorem
120. 121.
;
47.
48.
AP,
Z' is a variable point on a fixed hnB meet another fixed line in /"j, P^ prove that P-^, P^ genera nomographic ranges, and find two positions in which P^, P2 coincid 49. {A, B,...P,...}, {A', B',...P',...} are two homographic rang on different bases O, O' are any two fixed points on AA' find i.
A,
BP
OP, O'P.
pencils that
51.
PP
0{A,B,C,...P,...}, 0'{A,B',C',...P',...} aretwohomogmpl pro any two fixed lines AX, AX' cut OP, O'P' at P, passes through a fixed point.
;
sides QR, RP, PQ of a variable triangle pass through fix A, B, C\ P, Q move on fixed straight lines prove that AR, L generate homographic pencils. 52. / is a variable point on the common base of two homograpl ranges {A^, B^, ...}, {A2, B^...} P-i and P^ are the points correspondii
The
points
to
P
53.
according as
;
it
is
range
prove that
P-^
secoi
A,
a line through
meets two
fix
a;
lines at P-y,
P^; prove
pencils,
BP^
coincide.
;
A, B, C;
A', B',
pre
collinear.
concur at 0, and if BC, B'C m< If in Ex. 54, AA', BB', A^, prove that OA^ is divided harmonically by AB, A'B'.
CC
56.
AX,
57.
BX
P,
A, B, H, cut a
is
a variable point on
at
Hi
tl
prove
the locus of
a straight
line,
concurrent with
AB,
A'B'.
t
axe.
circle
prove that P,
58.
two variable points on a fixed line / such that / at a fixed angle, O being a fixed poii generate homographic ranges.
PQR
;
triangle
is a variable triangle of given shape inscribed in a fi> prove that its vertices generate homographic ranges on
AB,
AC of
n given trian
ABC
with
and
AB,
AC
two fixed points prove that its points of cont generate homographic ranges. [Use projection.]
at
;
BC
vill.]
225
60. A variable conic touches four fixed lines prove that its points of contact generate homographic ranges. [Project the dual property.]
OA, OB, OC are three fixed lines F, G, JI are fixed points on a variable line is drawn through // cutting OA, OB in P, Q; JC, Y are the meets of PF, QG and PG, QF respectively prove that X, Y move on fixed lines through O and that 0{XPYQ} = {FOGHY-.
61.
; ;
OC
62. Z is a fixed point on the base of the triangle ABC; prove that the diagonals of the quadrilateral formed by two fixed lines through and two variable lines through B, C, which meet on AD, pass
BC
DOUBLE POINTS.
Notation.
If
{A, B,
...
P,
...],
[A',
B',
...
F', ...}
/,
are two
homographic
denote the
to
/';
we
shall
on
E,
/,
l'
by J,
/'
them on
If
/,
/',
by
J', I.
/'
coincide,
F will
they exist)
THEOREM
(i) li
124.
then
PI.PJ'
/,
is
constant.
lines
/,
and
that
(
if
B,
.
BI
/',
respectively, such
homographic ranges.
{BIQJ} = {B'TQ/) BI.Q/^ BT.Q'/' " PJQI Pf.Ql'' B'J' OT But -^ = 1=-, since y, /' are points at
i)
By
hypothesis,
infinity.
"
:.
.'.
Q.J
P'J"
is
BI.B'f^QI.Qf;
BI.B'f
it is
constant.
q.e.d.
(2)
To
of argument in
Analytically, the
theorem
is
almost self-evident.
Corollary.
If
/,
/
is
coincide,
and
if
is
a point on
such that
the two ranges,
EI.EJ'^AI.A'f,
then .
i.e.
itself in
is
a double point.
226
PLANE GEOMETRY
[C
THEOREM
/,
125.
circle
J' through a right angle, into the positions la, /'a' ; then tl on aa as diameter cuts the common base at two points jE, (real, coincident or imaginary), which are self-corresponding poin
for the
two ranges.
Fig. iio.
Fig. III.
Join a,
Ed
is
.'.
Since aa!
a diameter,
aEd = 90
J'Ed
are similar
la^Ef'
:.
EI.EJ' = Ia.a'J'
= AI.A!J',
Therefore by Theorem
the two ranges.
Similarly
by hypothesis.
is
124 Corollary, .
a double point
is
vni.]
HOMOGRAPHIC
R^JSTGES
AND PENCILS
227
If the circle does not meet the base at real points, the above proof breaks down, but, by the Principle of Continuity, it follows
and
circle yields
two imaginary
q.e.d.
double points of
be
/,
first
determined.
We
I, J'.
shall
due to Professor out, the positions of / and J' must therefore next show how to obtain
if
Construction for
Fig. 112.
C,
C
line
be the given
pairs
of corresponding
on
/.
any
/j,
and cut
off AB-^^,
AC^
equal to
at V.
/,
/j respectively, to
J
meet
/j,
/at/j,
/.
off
J' on A'
equal to 4/1
the reader.
then
/ and /'
The proof is
Professor
yield
left to
Q.e.f.
Lodge has also pointed out how simply Figures no, in a method of generating the homographic ranges, if /, /' and a
Fig.
Take any point it on the circle in Let air, a'lr meet the base in F,
no
or Fig.
ni.
F
;
Then
it is
PI ^J''^ aJ-p'/"
q.e.f.
:.
.'.
P,
228
PLANE GEOMETRY
THEOREM
If
126.
E,
F are
{A, B,...P,
constant.
{PEPF)
By
hypothesis,
.
{PEQF} = {PEQ'F]
'
'
" PF.P'E
:.
:.
QF.Q'E'
q.e.d.
Corollary.
If
E,
F are
P,
is
are a variable
pi
.
of points on
EF, such
{PEPF}
constant, then P,
F as
double points.
f
of the argument in
this.
THEOREM
If the points at infinity
127.
/,
on the bases
...
/'
of the homograph
P,
...}
correspond, then t
By
hypothesis,
.
{PQEk, } = {P'QP'cc
'}
PQ.Pca
P'Q.P'oo' Pca.EQ~P'oo'.Ji'Q'
RQ RQ'
QR'
q.e.d.
similar, the points at infinity
" P'Q
.'.
Corollary.
their bases
If
vin.]
229
THEOREM
Two
rays,
real,
128.
The proof
any
left
to the reader.
THEOREM
If
e,
129.
f
is
are
the
double
rays
of
the
homographic
pencils
{a,
b',
.../' ...},
which have a
common
vertex, then
{pep'f]
constant.
if
e,
are two fixed lines and /, /' a variable such that [pep'f] is constant, then /, /' generate homographic pencils, having e, f as double rays.
And
conversely,
ef,
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
66. 67.
68. 69.
Determine by a ruler and compass construction the positions of (i) I, J' for the cobasal homographic ranges, defined by the (2) E, Compare your pairs of points x=q, x' =% x=6, x' = o x= 2, x'=j^. results with the positions determined by analysis.
;
70.
If
is
a variable tangent to 71. IJ' is a diameter of a circle, centre O the circle cuts the tangents at I and J' to the circle in P, P' prove that (1) the triangles OIP, P'J'O are similar (2) IP J'P' is constant trace out homographic ranges. (3) P,
;
;
.
72. 73.
EI=J'F.
IJ',
.
regarded as belonging
.
00'.
J'
does not
lie
between
points.
230
PLANE GEOMETRY
[c
THEOREM
If {A,
130.
B,
...},
{A',
...}
two positions of a point Z, such that the penc L{A, B,...), Z{A', B',...} can be superposed; i.e. correspond! rays are inclined to each other at a constant angle ; and these t positions of Z are real, if, and only if, the double points of
there
exist
t
.It
Fig. 113.
Let
jE,
F be
and denote by
o),
u>
the circu
points at infinity.
at
and Eni,
Fw meet
at Z'.
Then
pencils
.'.
homograp
L{A,
corresponding rays
make a
[Th. II,
.'.
and
similarly Z'
is
anot
possible position.
if E, are imaginary points, they are conjugate im; and therefore the lines Em, Fi> are conjugate imaginary lii their meet Z, and similarly Z', are real points. But if E, are real, there cannot be any other real point the lines E<a, Fia and therefore Z, and similarly Z', are (c
Further,
naries,
.
.
Q.E.I
In
Theorem
130,
prove that
is
the reflection of
in
common base of the ranges. 76. Two homographic ranges on the jr-axis are determined by relation xx' -2ax+a^ + b'^=o, find the coordinates of the two posit
of the point
of
Theorem
130.
VIII.]
231
77.
78.
= o.
Prove that two tomographic pencils with a common vertex can be projected into pencils in which corresponding rays are inclined at a constant angle.
79.
A,
P,
P are
AP
AB
such that
;
AP -^
AP'
:
-^7^ or (2)
AP' ^p^+l^-pr^
constant
A,
/*
being
constants
Determine
relation connecting
two cobasal
ranges,
82. With the usual notation, prove A'P, where A, A' are fixed. 83.
that
AP.J'F
is
proportional to
With
PE
-pp
is
proportional to -prp-
P'E
84.
With the
AI
A'
85. If {^, B, ... P, ... \, {A', B', ... P', ...'} are two homographic ranges, such that prove that there are two pairs of corresponding points P,
AP, A'P,
86.
^.BC^^,.CA^^.AB=o.
87.
E,
are
the
double
points
of
the
ranges
determined
by
;
xx'-x-2x'-4 = o;
diameters are
o
88.
the points A,
are determined by
x=o
and
x=2
points;
are coaxal.
. With
,
, '
^"'^^
are coaxal.
xx;^-qx-^rxf->rs=o
s
is
the
relation
connecting
the
ranges
g=-B'J', r=-AI,
= AI.B'A'.
if
is
is
to O, prove that
92.
OP - O'P
,
is
constant.
A,
;
on
are two fixed points on a circle 2 ; P is a variable point prove that AP, BP generate homographic pencils. Determine
232
PLANE GEOMETRY
A, corresponding
to the ray
[ci
BA
in th
What
93.
any transversal L is drawn cutting the circle a and cutting AP, BP at /"i, P^ determine the double point of the homographic ranges generated by /"j, P^ on L,
If in Ex. 92,
real points
What
is
imaginary?
94. Deduce, from Ex. 93, that every straight two points (real, coincident, or imaginary). 95.
line
meets a
circle a
fixe(
tangents to the circle at Pi, P^; prove that (i) (2) Pi and P2 generate homographic ranges.
A P^OP^
is
constant
What
tangents
96.
circle,
f5xe(
95, if any point L is taken outside thi determine the double rays of the homographic pencils generate!
by LP^, LP^.
97.
96, that
(real
drawn
to a circle.
I,
one double point of the cobasal homographic ranges {A, B,...} is at infinity, prove that the radical axis of the circles whose diameters are AB', A'B, passes through the other double point
A', B',...\
99.
AAA
^ A'C
"*"
;
CC on a straight
El P /' EP EF
~-
line,
determim
!.
101.
A'ly
The double points of two cobasal homographic ranges coincid Ai is any point on the base A, A' correspond to Ai whei
regarded as belonging to the first and second range respectively prove that {EAi; AA'} is harmonic.
Two constructions for obtaining the double points of cobasa homographic ranges have been given (see page 226 and Ex. 74); third will be found on page 244. The following examples illustrate their use in performing a wid group of constructions.
The method
the
is
known
as construction
method of
false positions.
VIII.]
233
EXAMPLE
To
given points, and
its
L [PoNCELET's Problem].
its
on given
Fig. 114.
Let A, B, C,
four fixed lines.
D be
\,
A^,
A.3,
X^ the
Through A, draw any line cutting \, \^ at /\, P^; join BP^ and produce it to cut A.3 at P^; join CP^ and produce it to cut A^ at P^\ join DP^ and produce it to cut Aj at F. Similarly, take any number of lines through A and construct the
sets of points
R^, R^,
R.^,
R^,
;...
Then
{P^,Q^,...)=A{P^,
(2i,...}
= {A. G2,-}=^{A,
<22,...}
= n{PQ...} = {P',Q',...};
.'.
{P^,
jE,
<2iJ
}>
{-^'j Q'i
Let
Then
either
:
quadrilateral
sides are at
once determined.
Q.E.F.
The method
is
to the case
of an /^-sided polygon,
whose
and
whose ^-corners
lie
on fixed
234
PLANE GEOMETRY
practical application of this
[CI
The
We
give
Poncelet's Problei
X.::
Fig. 115.
ABC
It is
is
a fixed triangle; X, Y,
ABC,
such that
at
its
sid(
pass through X, Y,
respectively.
P
PY,
is
BC;
FY meets AB
P^; XI
lin(
meets
^C
at
BC
at P'.
To
are
drawn
in the figure.
We
ranges, generated by P,
P'
and so we
first
find /,
_/'.
B-t
Through
cuts
Y draw
/2^
a line parallel to
*^"'s
BC BC
to cut
AB ^C
y^; X^
AC AB
at_/2J
-^^
^^ 'h^ required
pointy.
cut
at /j;
Through
cuts
draw a
;
line parallel
to
to
X
rigl
at /j
I-^Y cuts
^C
J'P
Jp'
On
that
BC
aX
E, F,
cut
E,
axe.
Let
EY,
FY cut AB
Ey, F^ and
let
E^X,
F^X
AC
BC
at
E, F.
vni.]
.'.
235
EE~^E^_ and FF-J^^ are the two triangles, which satisfy the
q.e.f.
given conditions.
acquire familiarity with the nature of the construction, the reader is advised to attempt this problem for himself.
To
EXAMPLE
To
IL
Fig. 117.
If
then
FQRS is PQNB is
it is
QN parallel
^
and
lines
to
AB,
Hence
on ^C, such
through
formed by
BA,
BC
off
is
BC, BA,
P-^
is
of given area.
on
BA
and cut
BP^
from
BC
so that
AC
aX
p-^^,
p^.
Similarly construct the sets of points Q^, Q^, Q^, q^, q^; F^, R<i,
...;
.'.
{F^, G3. } are homographic; the ranges {F^, Qi, by parallels, the ranges {pj,qi, {pg, ^3, } are homographic.
:.
},
},
Let
e,
f be
their
double points.
Then
either e ox
rectangle.
103. {A, B,...P,...), {A', B',...P',...} are two homographic ranges on different bases /, /' through a given point, draw a line to cut / and /' in corresponding points. How many solutions are there?
;
104.
With
if a, y8
draw
two
lines
circle
through
a,
/3.
236
105.
PLANE GEOMETRY
With the notation of Ex.
103, find the positions of P,
[CH.
such
that
PF
106.
point O,
A, B are fixed points on the fixed Hnes /, in through a given draw a Hne to cut /, m at P, Q such that AP BQ has a
.
given value.
107.
Through a given
point,
draw a
line to cut
two given
lines at
line,
109.
on two
PQ
subtends
/',
;,
find
two points P,
on
/,
/'
PF
Given four fixed lines /, /', m, in\ construct a line cutting /, /' at P, P', such that the projections of PP' on in, iri are of given lengths.
112.
Find a point
in
the base
BC
of a triangle
ABC,
such that
the incircles of
113.
touch
103,
AD
if
at the
/?
same
point.
With
size.
the notation
a,
construct points P,
Q,
Q such
P'jiQ are
of
given
114.
103,
construct points P,
Q,
P'Q
common
F, such
116.
that {a/3;
PF\
harmonic.
lines to cut
ofif,
on two given
lines,
117.
q, cf
determine a pair of
Through a given
fixed lines,
point, draw two lines which cut off from two segments subtending given angles at given points,
120.
Describe a triangle
PQR,
so that
its
is
points, P,
He on fixed
lines,
and
PPQ
of given magnitude.
121. 122.
/
A,
/,
find a point
on
such that
PA,
PB
VIII.]
237
123.
is
cessively at n lines
path, construct
124.
its
if its final
initial
path.
Given a triangle
ABC,
a point
on
BC and
a point
on
AD,
AB,
AC
E.
triangle
125.
lines,
ABC
>,
Describe a quadrilateral, so that its four corners lie on fixed two of its sides pass through fixed points and the other two are
in
a given direction.
126.
Show how
which
pass through fixed points, and cut two fixed lines in points coUinear
with a given point.
CHAPTER
IX.
CONIC.
on a
conic.
A, B, C, D, E,
...
By
V^{A,B,
are homographic.
It is
C,...},
V,{A,B,
C,...}
<
the point
F on
the conic,
when
of the pencil
V{A, B,
C, ...}.
Definitions.
(i)
is
called a range
two ranges of points on a conic, A, B, ... A', B', ...ai ...}, V{A', B', ...} are homographii being any point on the conic, the ranges are said to be hom(
;
graphic.
THEOREM
131.
Two homographic ranges of points on a conic exist and are dete mined uniquely, when three pairs of corresponding points are given
Let A,
B,
C,
and
Then by Theorem
VC,
113,
exist,
;
VA, VA'
and a VB, VB
V.
VC.
of these pencils with the conic be P, P'.
VP
Then P,
on the
conic.
Q.E.D.
CH.lx.J
239
CHAPTER
IX.
CONIC.
d, e,
...
By
are homographic.
It is therefore
when
Definitions.
(i)
system of tangents
a, b,
...
1o
z.
conic
is
called a pencil of
a, b,
...
a,
b', ...
are
v{a',
b', ...}
are homographic, v
being any tangent to the conic, the pencils are said to be homo-
THEOREM
Two homographic
are given.
132.
and are
Let
a, a'
b,
b'
c,
c'
and
let
Then by Theorem 112, two homographic ranges exist, and are determined uniquely, by the pairs of points va, vd ; vb, vV ; vc, vc'.
Let the other tangents from any other pair of points
vp, vp' of
these ranges to the conic be p, p'. Then /, /' are a pair of corresponding tangents to the conic.
Q.E.D.
240
PLANE GEOMETRY
[c
THEOREM
133.
(i) If {A B, ... P, Q, ...}, {A', B, ... F', Q, ...} are two hom graphic ranges of points on a conic, there exist two points E, .
(real,
on the
conic, which
The meet
of
PQ,
PQ
lies
on the
fixed line
EF.
(i)
V on
the conic.
By Theorem
two double
hai
wii
Then E,
(2) Since
F
E,
are
self-corresponding
points
for
the
tv
q.e.d.
F are
self-corresponding points,
P{FF(^}=F'{FEFQ}.
These two pencils have a self-corresponding ray FF'.
.'.
the meets of
the
are coUinea
.'.
meet of
FQ, F'Q
is
lies
on the
fixed line
EF.
A,B,...F..., A',B',...F'
are assumed real
;
and
therefore
its
points of intersection E, F, wi
Definition.
F axe
EF
is
homographic rang
IX.]
241
(i) If {a,
b,
b',
f, (real,
self-
The
join ol
fixed point
ef.
Fig. 119.
Fig. 120.
(i)
By Theorem
double points.
v{a,
b',
...}
have two
Let the other tangents from these double points to the conic
be
e,
f.
e,
Then
Since
e,
f axe
self-corresponding rays,
Pip'efq'] =p'{pefq].
//'.
.'.
the join of pq, p'q passes through the fixed point is necessarily real, since
a,
b,...p
...,
a,
b',
...p'
...
e,
are
assumed
real
from
it
to the
Definition.
134,
homographic
pencils.
[See page
242
It
PLANE GEOMETRY
should be noted that Pascal's theorem
133.
is
[(
a special case
Theorem
be a hexagon inscribed in a conic. Let Consider the homographic ranges of points on the conic, det
ABCDEF
C,
mined by {A,
By Theorem
lie
AB,
;
CD,
on a
which
Pascal's property
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
135.
double
poii
and the
The proof
is
left to
the reader.
THEOREM
137.
into hoE
poii
double
double
left to
lines
and the
cross-axis
The proof
is
the reader.
IX.]
243
It
a special case
of
Theorem
Fig. 122.
Consider
the
homographic pencils
{a,
c,
of
tangents
to
the
conic
determined by
e],
{d,f, b}.
joins of ab, de;
is
be, ef;
cd,
fa pass through
q.ed.
Brianchon's property,
THEOREM
Homographic
136.
homo-
double lines
cross-centre.
The proof
is
THEOREM
Homographic homographic ranges of
reciprocate
cross-axis.
138.
pencils
of tangents
to
a conic
reciprocate into
:
double
into
lines
into
double
left to
and the
cross-centre
the
The proof
is
the reader.
244
PLANE GEOMETRY
[C
THEOREM
If {A,
is
139.
a range of points on a conic, and if {a, b,c,.. the pencil of the tangents to the conic at these points, the ranj
^, C,
...}
...} is
{A, B, C,
and the pencil {a, b,c,...) are homographic \i.e. ai V{A, B, C, ...} is homographic to the ran]
the reader.
v{a,
b, c, ...}].
THEOREM
If [A,
is
140.
;
B,
C, ...}
is
and
if {a, b,
c,
..
conic;
homographic
range].
{A, B, C, ...} and the pencil {a, b, c,...] any section of the pencil is homographic to
to the reader.
tl
The
proof
is
left
[Use Theorem
55.]
Let {A, B, C,
...},
{A', B',
...)
Draw any
circle or conic,
Fon
it.
ix.l
245
a, b,
c,
VC
a\
meet at 7 and be', b'c meet at a. Let ay cut the Join Ve, Vf, and produce them to meet the base of the given ranges at E, F.
ab',
Let
a'b
conic at
e,
f.
Then E, F are the required double The proof is left to the reader. [Use Theorem 133.]
1.
points.
q.e.f.
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem Prove Theorem
135.
136. 137. 138. 139. 140.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
of a variable triangle inscribed in a given conic prove that the sides generate homographic pencils.
9.
The base
is fixed,
One
;
fixed
10.
vertex of a triangle, self-conjugate w.r.t. a given conic, prove that the other vertices generate homographic ranges.
is
are a variable pair of conjugate lines through a fixed a given conic prove that they generate homographic pencils, and determine the double rays.
AP,
AP
is
point
w.r.t.
11.
PAQ
12.
APQ
is
fixed
and
of constant size
generate
of
Two conies S-^, S2, have double contact at .5, C; ^ is the pole BC; tangents are drawn from a variable point on AB to S^, S^ to
cut aX P^, P^; prove that Pj, determine their double points.
13.
/j,
AC
/'2
Pj
is
a variable point on
;
/j
and P^
is
a point on
conjugate to
P-^
w.r.t.
a fixed conic
The
;
sides
lies
;
A, B,
C P
C,
through
15.
A
is
QR, RP, PQ of a triangle pass through fixed points on a fixed conic through B, C Q lies on a fixed conic prove that BR, generate homographic pencils.
;
AR
AB
A
PQ
is
a variable chord of
constant length
16.
prove that
AP,
BQ
prove that
its
poles w.r.t.
two given
246
17.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CI
is
one of the
common
18.
is
One
;
fixed
19.
vertex of a variable triangle circumscribing a given coni prove that the other vertices generate homographic ranges. conies have double contact sX B,
/",
Two
Q; prove
that CP,
C CQ
;
z.
generate homographi
pencils.
20.
Two
if
eac!
21.
A,
B
;
/" is
a variable point
oi
meet an asymptote at P-^, P^; prove that Pj, / generate homographic ranges. Where are the double points? Deduc
the curve
that P-iP^
22.
is
PA,
PB
of constant length.
are two fixed points on a parabola
; ;
P is a variable poin on the curve parallels to PA, PB are drawn through a fixed point ( prove that F^, P^ generate homo to cut a fixed diameter in P-^, P^ graphic ranges and that P^P^ is of constant length.
A,
;
OP is drawn parallel to a variabL prove that the pencil generated by OP i homographic to the pencil of tangents to the parabola, generated by^.
23.
From a
tangent
of a given parabola
24.
Generalise by projection
circle cuts the circle at
circle.
if
a given
25.
P, P'
Generahse by projection
circle.
if
26. Given five points A, B, C, D, E ; show how to determine thi points in which the conic through A, B, C, D, E cuts a given line 1 [Consider the ranges formed on / by A{C, D, E\, B{C, D, E}.'\
27.
Show how
thi
with a conic,
Show how to determine the points of intersection of a given lim when three points on the conic and the directions of it
;
30.
at P,
that
ranges,
and deduc
HOMOGRAPHIC PROPERTIES OF THE CONIC 247 31. A BCD is a fixed parallelogram, circumscribing a given conic a variable tangent cuts AB, AD aX P, Q; prove that BF DQ is constant.
IX.]
; .
[Use Theorem
32.
124.]
pair of conjugate diameters of a given conic meet the tangent at a fixed point P in Q, Q'; prove that Q, Q' generate homographic ranges, and deduce that PQ.PQ' is constant. [Use Theorem 124.]
33.
A variable
through
BC
fixed conies S^, S^ meet at A, B, C, a. variable line cuts 5i, S^ at Bi, P^; the tangents at P^, P^ to 5i, S^ meet at 2i, ga! prove that gj, Q^ generate homographic ranges.
;
Two
... two homographic ranges of points on a conic, the joins BB', ... of corresponding points envelope a conic having double contact with the given conic at the double points E, of the two ranges.
(i) If
{A, ,
...
F),
{A', B',
AA
(2) Conversely, if
.,
P,
conic, with
Fig. 124.
(i) Project
Then
the
conic
E, 7^ into the circular points at infinity. becomes a circle, and the cross-axis of the
b,
.../, ...},
{a, b\
.../', ...}
is
EF was
=
...
ab',
db
are parallel.
.'.
.'.
ad = bb' = cc' =
in the original
...=pp'
cc
.'.
...
touch a concentric
,
circle.
.'.
figure,
AA
248
(2)
PLANE GEOMETRY
The
proof
is
[c
left
to the reader.
[Project E,
F into
chord
Corollary.
If a variable
PP'
froi
to the conic.
appear
later
THEOREM
(i) If {a,
d, .../>, ...},
142.
...}
{a,
y, .../,
are
,
two
...
homographi
of correspondin
tangents
lie
/c
f at
the point
The proof
[Prove
it
is
left
to the reader.
by
(i)
reciprocating
e,
Theorem
points of contact of
f into
Corollary.
From a
to
a given conic,
variable point -P on a fixed line, tangents p^, p^ are drawi then p^, p^ generate homographic pencils
and the
299) that the homographic pencils ii the Corollary belong to a very special type, viz., involution pencils
later (page
34.
appear
(2).
35. 36.
37.
141.
IX.]
249
S2;
38.
\s
3i
point of intersection
of two
at Pi,
given conies
S^,
P^; prove that P^ and P^ generate homographic ranges of points on S^ and S^-
If cuts
S^,
S^^
39.
5i,
/" is
a variable point on a
common chord
S^;
PP-ii
PP2
are
tangents from
to 6\,
S-y
and
A
;
P,
Q
41.
prove that P,
fixed circle.
B,
a given conic
at
/",,
is
a variable point on
P^
prove
conic.
that
Py, P2 generate homographic ranges of points on the Determine the position of the double points.
42.
variable conic
prove that
on a conic
two homographic ranges of points prove that the tangents at A, A' B, B' etc., meet the
; ;
cross-axis in
44.
homographic ranges.
are two fixed points
;
A,
;
PA Q
is
BP,
BQ
prove that
/",
conic.
system of conies pass through four fixed points; A, B points prove that the polar s of A w.r.t. the system of conies form a pencil^ homographic to the polars of B
are any
w.r.t.
46.
two other
the system.
AB,
AC
variable tangent to
cuts
AB,
AC
aX P,
P'
is
a fixed point;
PQ\^
the circle
APQ
cuts
at a constant angle, 5.
a variable chord of a given circle S prove that P, Q generate a given conic a triangle, such that
Show how
its
to
inscribe
in
each of
sides
[Use Theorem
141
Corollary.]
49.
Show how
PQR
is
in a
given conic
PQ,
PR
on
QR.
;
PQRS
;
is
P, Q,
lie
fixed lines
250
52.
PLANE GEOMETRY
{A, B,...P...}, {A', B',
;
[ci
...
P'
points on a conic
show how
to
whose
53.
A
{a,
variable triangle
;
is
two of
its side
b,,..p...),
;
{a,
are
tangents to a conic
55.
p
li
two of
its
its
vertices
on fixed
sides generat
57.
Two
conies
S-^,
th(
again at P,
prove that P,
58.
ABC
is
A{BCPQ}
is
and p, q, r, s are the common points and commoi 59. A, B, C, tangents of two conies, prove that the range of points A, B, C, or one is equicross with the range of tangents p, q, r, s to the other.
60.
Two
conies
5i,
a variablf
ehord
PQ
of 5] touches S^
It is
of the important converse theorems, relating to homographic ranges and pencils, referred to on pages 116-7. The reader will note thai
no property
is
;
assumed
in their proof,
aftei
Theorem
better to
57
seemed
I.,
make use
easier,
of Chapter
to
secure an
but
logical,
method.
The
are attributed by
are taken from Chasles' treatise on "Conic Sections" (1865), and him to Delbalat.
IX.]
HOMOGRAPHIC
PROl^itRTIES
OF THE CONIC
251
THEOREM
If
143.
two pencils
V{A, B,...P,
lie
(2,
},
W{A,
JB,...F,
Q,
...}
A, ,...F, Q.. of
corresponding rays
V,
on a
conic,
IV of the
pencils.
Fig. 125.
VW
the
is
not
the the
two pencils.
Jf'-pencil.
Let
VT
in
f^pencil
correspond to
WV in
2
Draw any
circle
to touch
VT at V and
let it
cut
VW, VA,
VP
at
W,
A', P'.
Let
at P^.
by Theorem
WW
57.
V.
lie
on a
line
(say).
Let
VW,
it
VP, meet
/ at
W^, P^.
its
Now
a plane
plane
Then, since P^, P3, W^ are unaltered by the rotation, cormeet on /. responding sides of the triangles vp'jv',
VPW
.".
VPW
12.
aire
in perspective
[Theorem 47];
Vv,
at
Let Vv,
Ww' meet
252
PLANE GEOMETRY
passes through
fl. J2.
[c
Then Pp'
.-.
similarly,
Aa,
!>',
Now
the points a,
on the
11 to
circle
tt.
cr,
i.e.
the circ
obtained by
2 from
11,
w.r.t.
fi
on the plane
lie
which
conic.
Moreover, since
v,
w'
on
cr,
V\
Q.E.D.
If the reader
draws Fig.
125
/,
for himself
will see
he
THEOREM
If
144.
two ranges
{A',
B,...P\
...)
ai
QQ,...oi corresponding
two bases
u.,
points
of the ranges.
IX.]
253
a',
...
Draw
to
in a plane
tt,
different
11 of u,
...
touch a at H'.
from A! B',
...
P'
in a,
h,
...p,
57.
are concurrent, at
ii
Now
on plane
w.r.t.
BP,
Hp,
aA',
bB',...pP',... project
into
IIP',
HP, AA',
BB',...PP',....
Also by definition,
Therefore AA',
touches
61.
0-
BB',
i.e.
PP',
...
envelope
conic,
which also
q.e.d.
HP, HP',
a,
a.
;
that
A PQ
variable point
lies on a given conic S g is a point such subtends given angles at two fixed points on S ; find the
locus of Q.
62.
TV
is
a variable point on a fixed diameter of a conic ; JV is the from P to its polar ; prove that the locus of a rectangular hyperbola.
is
is a fixed chord of a given conic S ; from a variable point P on the tangent at A, another tangent is drawn, touching S aX Q; find
63.
BP, AQ.
the conic is a parabola, prove that the ranges are similar; prove also the converse.
If in
144,
65.
is
Theorem
P is
PT to
a.
parabola
PP^
PP^
PP2
is
PP.
66.
is
ABC is
H,
a triangle
;
of constant size
67.
find
fixed,
fixed line
and
ABC
K are
Q, R,
;
PQ,
RS
;
of a conic
prove that
H, K, P,
68.
lie
on a conic.
two of
its
in position
circumcentre.
;
a circle
is
drawn through A,
is
circle
through B,
if
fixed,
prove
A,
C meet
on a
and meet a
fixed line at
/",
Q;
if
PQR
is
an
254
71.
PLANE GEOMETRY
HK
/iB
at P,
is
a variable line
HK
at
the polar of
cuts
PQ PQ at
perj
Q;
the locus of Q,
72.
is
arc
A
A
O
;
BP^
is
APi;
meet
73.
a hyperbola.
PQ
fi
point
w.r.t.
the circle on
PQ
as diami
envelopes a parabola.
74.
If
a quadrangle
is
at its vertices,
75.
w.r.t.
a given conic
P P to i envelo
;
is
its
a parabola.
76.
What happens
The base
point
AB P on
f
is
is
A
;
Q;
BP.
direction, cutting
PQR
is
is
line,
fixed
X locus of X
is
a hyperbola, having
79.
Through a
two
fi:
lines at
P,Q;
PQ
/.
in
a constant
ra
c
80.
A A
two fixed
lines in points
which are
jugate
w.r.t.
a given conic
lies
on a fixed line ; its polars w.r.t. two gi prove that the locus of g is a conic.
conic
6"
The base QR of a variable triangle PQR is a chord of a gi PQ, PR cut 5 again at fixed points if QR passes throug
; ;
is
BC of
a given conic
at P,
two
varia
I
AB,
AC
respectively;
the envelope of
PQ.
84. Z* is a variable point on the base BC of a given triangle Al a parallel through to cuts at .E a parallel through to cuts at prove that the locus oi '\s a parabola through touching at A, with its axis parallel to BC.
AD
AB
^C
AB
IX.]
255
85. variable polygon is inscribed in a given conic, and all its sides^ save one, pass through fixed points find the envelope of the remaining
side.
86.
of
its
poles
prove that the join two given conies envelopes a conic, inscribed in the
;
common
87.
A,
B are
is
triangle
PQR
B
contact with
locus of p.
88.
two fixed points on a conic S the base QR of a variable a chord of 5 and touches a given conic having double if PQ, PR pass through A, B respectively, find the
;
A,
is
is
a variable point on
is
5,.
and
V{A, B,
C,
D}
PQR
is
a variable triangle, inscribed in a fixed circle PQ is of passes through a fixed point find the envelope
;
PR
QR.
90.
is
Prove that a pencil of diameters to a conic to the pencil of their conjugate diameters.
91.
axe.
homograpMc
E, F, G,
(i)
A, B,
C,
the mid-points of
parallels
through
90.J
to
OH'
are
Prove that
G' H'\.
0{E
[Use Ex.
(2)
F G H\=0\E' F'
variable conic passes through four fixed points prove that the locus of its centre is a conic passing through the diagonal points and the mid-points of the six sides of the quadrangle formed by the four fixed points. [Use (i).]
;
92.
I
;
123456
;
is
;
a hexagon inscribed
(23, 41)
;
in a conic
(25,
2
93.
(13,
24)
(15,
26)
16)
tangent at
ratio.
find
PQ
;
in
a constant
94.
w.r.t.
a given conic
P moves
;
on a
find
fixed line
at a given point
the locus of
95.
The bases
-P
is
P,
axe.
its
polar
w.r.t.
a fixed
PQ.
;
PQR
is
centroid
if its is a variable triangle inscribed in a given conic a fixed point; prove that the sides of the triangle touch a
fixed conic.
256
PLANE GEOMETRY
7
was proved
A,
B
PB
is
If Z' is
\k
PA,
of Z'
98.
a conic, through A, B.
In
Theorem
Theorem
76,
A,
In
76,
prove that
AB
is
he
conies.
a variable point on a ; g is t prove that / a given conic envelopes a conic having the same polar of ab as the given conic.
100.
a,
point
on
conjugate
to
w.r.t.
101.
A,
PQ,
RS respectively of a giv
conic
102.
Prove
tliat
AP, AQ, PQ, BR, BS, RS touch a conii the conic locus in Theorem 76 breaks up in
AB touches the given conic; that one these lines is AB, and the other is the join of the points contact of the other tangents from A, B to the given conic.
two
straight lines, if
THEOREM
The
are at right angles
is
145.
circle,
Fig. 127.
Let
TP,
centre C.
be a pair of perpendicular tangents to a coni Denote the circular points at infinity by w, u>'.
Jio'
()o'.
TQ
Then
since
Tu>,
are
harmonically
conjugate
w.r.t.
TP,
T{
PTQ =
IX.]
257
54).
co'.
.'.
the conic
(Theorem
through
(o,
.'.
by Theorem
the locus of
.'.
is
circle.
And by
circle
must be
at
C.
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
If the conic
is
The proof
Definition.
is
left
to the reader.
The
The
De
Lahire
(1640-17
8),
who wrote on
Its
and magic
squares.
was pointed out by Boscovich (1711-1787); but the name appears to be due to Gaskin.
103.
If a,
circle of
a rectangular hyperbola
a point
105.
circle of a conic passes through the (imaginary) points of intersection of the conic with its directrices.
106.
A
S
chord
PQ
CQ
A, A'
axe.
a pair of
a quadrilateral touching
a conic
at L,
points at infinity,
^, A' are projected into the circular prove that the conic through AA'LMNP is projected
if
M, N, P
108.
cr
is
of
(T
w.r.t.
confocal with S.
109.
a conic to
110.
lines
;
Prove that the tangent from any point on the director its auxiliary circle is equal to the minor axis.
ellipse of given size slides
its
An
centre.
;
P is a point on the directrix of a conic, focus S PT the tangent from P to the director circle; prove that PT = PS.
111.
112.
is
ABCD
P
;
is
AB
A
meets a
if 5
PSA = PBS.
->o
113.
its
jri-rtiML
oi:-wiviii, 1 IV
variable parallelogram
is
circumscribed to an ellipse S^
;
a
fi
the locus of
114.
vertices.
conies are such that an unlimited number of quad laterals can be inscribed in one, and circumscribed to the othi
If
Two
ABCD
is
ED me
at a fixed point.
115. Prove that the focus is a limiting point of the coaxal systt having the directrix as radical axis and the director circle as a cin
of the system.
116.
is
PQ
is
ai
the circle on
117.
PQ
as diameter.
PQ
A
is
pro
t!
to
director circle.
118.
ellipse
cut
the direct
circle at
P,
prove that
PQ
touches the
ellipse.
THEOREM
The
O, has
lie
its
146.
[Apollonius' Theorem.]
feet of the four normals to a conic, centre C, from any poi on a rectangular hyperbola, which passes through C, O ar
Fig. 128.
Fig. 129.
Let C/\,
of the conic.
to <7/\,
CP^,
...
4, Then
//j,
....
C{/\, P^,
C{Z>i,
...}
...}
= =
.'.
A,
C{d^,d^,...};
a-
through O, C.
IX.]
259
If
a point of intersection of
o-
Cd
is
is
parallel to
CP
and
is
d
o-
is
to
the given
conic.
.'.
feet of the
normals from O.
Let CA,
CB
Then
diameter
.'.
the
perpendicular from
at infinity.
to
CA
CB
cr
CB
and
similarly
o- is
C and
having
its
q.k.d.
The method
of proof
is
due to Chasles.
119. Prove that four lines can be drawn from a given point to cut a given conic at a given angle (in a determinate sense) and that the four points of intersection, the given point and the centre of the conic
lie
on a conic.
120.
P, Q, /?, ^ are the feet of the four normals from a point to a prove that the tangents at P, Q, R, S touch a parabola, which touches the axes of the conic. [Use reciprocation.] conic
;
THEOKEM
147.
One and only one conic can be drawn through five given points, no three of which are coUinear. be the given points. Let A, B, C, D, Then two homographic non-perspective pencils exist and are determined uniquely by A{C, D, E), B{C, D, }. By Theorem 143, the meets C, D, E, ...of corresponding rays And only one such conic exists, lie on a conic through A, B. for any point /" on a conic through A, B, C, D, E must by
Theorem
either
pencils; consequently
of the two 57 be a meet of corresponding rays AP, if there were two such conies, any point of
lie
BP
must
on the
other.
q.e.d.
26o
i'LAiNii
GiiOMJiTKY
148.
L^
THEOREM
One and
The proof
is
left to
the reader.
THEOREM
The
projection of a conic
is
149.
a conic.
Let A,
a variabl
...^,
B{...
P ...}
ar
homographic.
.'.
a{...p
...\,
l>{...p...} ar
homographic.
.'.
the locus of
;>
is
a conic.
q.e.d.
beyond the scope of this volume to deal with generalisation Theorems 143, 144. A concise and interesting account wil be found in Chapter XI. of Dr. Filon's treatise on Projectiv
It is
of
Geometry.
as follows
THEOREM
If
150.
0{A, B,
...
P,
...}
is
tangents
meet of
OP
is
in general a cubic,
THEOREM
If {a, b,...p, ...},
151.
[a,
b',
.../', ...}
of tangents to two different conies, the locus of the meet of /, is in general a quartic.
special case of
page 248.
special case of
Theorem 151 has been already dealt with; se( Theorem 150 is given in Theorem 152
THEOREM
a
is
152.
the tangent
OA
0-,
to a conic
cr.
If th(
pencil
0{A, B,
...P, ...)
to
homographic to the pencil of tangent then the locus of the meet of OP, p is
o-,
conic.
z to
and
let /
be any straight
line.
Let the required locus cut / at the point E, the meet of with the tangent e to (t.
OL
IX.]
261
Let a, b, e, ...^ ... meet z at OB,... CP, ...meet /at A^, B^,
b^,
...
and
let
OA,
P^,
Fig.
Then
.'.
and
z.
Now
two conies have four common tangents. But 0, a are two common tangents of S, <t ; also Ee^
tangent of S,
a-.
is
common
But
.'.
any
is
therefore a conic.
121.
Write down the dual of Theorem Write down the dual of Theorem
122. 123.
124.
Use
the
to
;
A
;
C,...P,...} on /
homographic
C,
...
P", ...]
on
the conic
CHAPTER
X.
of peculiar importance.
Its treatmei
this chapter.
The fundamental
involutic
rather
si
complicated form
six points or
lines in involution,
were
first
enunciated by Desargues.
is
The
theoi
i c
worked out
to
is
in great detail
Giomitrie
Superieure
of
Chasles,
whom
the
revival
interest in the
methods of Desargues
due.
ANALYTICAL TREATMENT.
two homographic ranges are situated on the same base, t every point ^ of that base, there correspond in general two distinc
If
first
or secon
range.
Under
ing theorem.
(I) \i
then
q^r
is the homographic relation cor same base, referred to the same origir the necessary and sufficient condition that to an
same point
/?,
whicheve
range o belongs
(i)
If
to.
.r
values of a
and
+ q/3 + ra + s = o
r)
= o.
CH. X.]
263
But a -
pa?
.'.
+ (^ + r) a + 5 = o. q r=o or q = r.
(2)
If ^
-,t
It
a;
= a, X =
I '
qo.-\-s
pa-^s
qa. I
:
Tf
a,
X= -
+s
pa + s
q.e.d.
corresponding to the point ^ on the common base of the ranges, defined hy />.i:r' + qx+rx'+s=o, prove that
If J, z" are the points
-> (y-^)[/g'+(y+^)g+^1
2.
Interpret
geometrically
the
fact
that
in
Ex.
i,
_y-2' = o
if
satisfies the
3.
If the
homographic
relation
is .i-.r'-3;r-3.r'
+ 8=o,
2,
4, 4.
o-
If in
Ex.
3,
fl
is
;r->-oo,
12.
find
the
homographic
5.
relation,
when
is
transferred to
If the
homographic
relation
xx' a{x+x')
+ i=o, and
if (fi,
00)
when
the origin
is
transferred to Q.
Definition.
If
two cobasal ranges are determined by the relation /xx' + q(x + x') + s = o,
referred to the
same
origin,
{A,
B,
C, ...},
{A',
is
is
B',
C", ...}
are
two
of one
range
of the
But
A'
further, if
is
now regarded
it
as
in
range, by
(I),
is
and
A,
similarly for
B,
C,
....
It
C,
C,
...),
(A',
B, C,
C,
...)
are
homographic: and
this is the
charac-
teristic feature of
264
It is
PLANE GEOMETRY
[ch
meaning of this property. To every value of a there corresponds one and only one value of x, given by th Suppose x receives any set of value homographic relation. then we can find uniquely the corrt whatever, a, fi, y, S,
clear idea of the
.
.
sponding values of x
follows that
let
these be
a.',
P',
is
y',
S', ....
Since th
+ q{x + x') + j = o
(3,
symmetrical in x and x
a', /?', y', 8',
. .
if
is
now
then
y, S, ....
And
a,
y8,
P', y, y',
y',
a',
a, P', fS,
y, ...:
and the
cross-ratio
determined by any
foui
from one
sponding
(II)
set, is
four,
determinei
uniquely,
any two pairs of collinear corresponding points are givei The equation pxx +q{x + x') + s = o contains two independen
-.
constants -,
Therefore,
if
two
pairs of values of x,
are giver
f ^
in
as -
can be determine(
q.e.d.
We
shall
assume
/ =|= c
late
be dealt with
written
/ =|= o,
may be
XX +~
(x
+ x)-\-~ = o
p
or
or
+Q {x + Q)
xx!
to
p + 5= o, {x' + Q) = Q^-S.
(x-l-a;')
Now
The
the point
x=
- Q, and
the relatio
point, x= - Q, has a geometrical interpretation. Writing the involution relation in the form
we
see that
when
.'-> 00,
-o
X
and x
or
is
then given by
1+ =
The
infinity
x=
- O. ^
to
point,
x=
- Q,
:
therefore
will
corresponds
the
point
on the base
and
be denoted by O.
X.]
INVOLUTION
point
RA*?JGES
AND PENCILS
265
Definition.
The
infinity
O on the base which corresponds to the point at on the base, in an involution range, is called the centre
of the involution.
The
for
The
now be
S.
it
form
as
follows
If
is
centre
of an
involution
and
is
if
P,
OP
OP'
constant.
was proved in Chapter VIII. that two cobasal homographic ranges have a pair of double points, real or imaginary. For two ranges in involution, by putting X=X' = ^, we have
^=(X--S
or ^= n/(2^-5. Consequently two ranges in involution have a pair of double points, real or imaginary, which are equidistant from the centre
of the involution.
OE^=OF^ = (^-S=OP.OP',
points
are
harmonically
conjugate
w.r.t.
the
double points.
Determine the involution relation, defined by the pairs of points Find the double points and reduce the relation to its (5, 7). simplest form, by a change of origin.
6.
(i>
2)
7.
(i,
10)
Determine the involution relation, defined by the pairs of points Determine the double points, and a point-pair, whose (4, 7).
;
distance apart
8.
is
15.
is
An
involution
defined
by the x and
relation
x'.
relation to
(2,
simplest form.
;
if
the point-pairs
5)
(i,
8)
(3,
a) are
in involution.
10.
given by
relation, the
11. X, V are two fixed points on the base of an involution range prove that the harmonic conjugates w.r.t. X, Y of the points of the involution range, also form an involution range.
;
266
12.
a,
PLANE GEOMETRY
b are fixed points
;
[c
at infinity is -^5
a double point
in this case, pro
and
fixed mid-point.
14.
a,
Where
c,
is
b, 1/
d are
cd
.
a, /?,
7 are
mid-points of
aa', bb',
prove that
^ _,
^
(AtC
etc
, ,
=
U.
jf
[Take a as
origii
notation of Ex.
.
14, '
prove that ^
ab.aU
With
E,
-_,
ac.ad
ac ac
ac
r-.
-I-
ac
r-
17.
on EF, such
involution.
18.
A,
/",
AB,
such that
AP AP
"
equals a constant
A prove
;
ranges in involution that A, B are a pair of corresponding and determine the condition that the double points are real.
;
19.
^''
+ 2ai!^ + bi=i
^ + 20^^ + 6^=0
[Use the
conjugate
20.
w.r.t.
$^
fact that
pairs of points $^
Prove that the double points of the involution defined by + 2ai^ + bi=o ^'^ + 2a2^-hb2 = o are given by
;
i'^}-'h)^'^
21.
(i)
The
relation connecting
is
the
same
origin,
two homographic ranges, referred pxx! -^qx-Vrxf -Vs=o prove that there exists a sing
.r-origin is transferred to
A, the
relation
becom
Hence prove
that
to superpose uniquely
if two ranges are homographic, it is possih one on the other, in such a way that the t\
is
cut
by a system of coaxal
circl
in point-pairs, in involution.
[Take the transversal as x-axis and note that any one of the circl can be written in the form x^^-y'^ + 2gx-\-2fy+c-^2'k{lx-Vmy-\-i)^ where A. is the only variable, and use Ex. 19.]
X.]
267
p=
0.
+ 2^^ + ^ = o, by
putting
+ g (x + x = x' = ^.
.
x')
+s=o
are
This
is
If /-^o,
one root of
+s=o
has one of
its
double
X -^ cc =
s
,
if
P,
PP'
is
the
and
is
therefore a
point, given
by 2q^ +
.f
= o,
geometrically evident.
The
pxxf + q {x + ;r') +
24.
J-
= o.
involution
Cj...
is
in
with the
range
{^2) -^21 C,i,...\; the range \A^, B^, C^,...} is in involution with the range {^^3, B^, Q, ...}, and {A^, B^, Q, ...} is in involution with
{Ai, Bi, C4, ...} if the point at infinity is a double point for each pair of ranges, prove that the ranges {A^, B^, Cj, ...}, {A^, B^, C4, ...} are in
;
involution.
25.
If,
in
Ex. 24, the three pairs of ranges have any fixed point as a
{A-^},
common
26.
{A^} are
in involution.
in involution with
{A"}
prove that the ranges {A'}, {A"\ are in involution, if and only if the double points of {A}, {A'] are harmonically conjugate w.r.t the
.
The
three
c.2
pairs
a^^"^
of
points
given
by iZjP +
21^^^
+ ^i = o
+ 2b2^ +
= o;
2b^^-\-c^
=o
are in involution,
1
if
and only
if
(i)
To
is
necessary.
= o.
268
PLANE GEOMETRY
if
Now
X,
Oj^ +
2i^j^
+ ^j =
we have
?( p'i^Ui
x-Vx =
i)+J- =
or
xx = -J2(>j^
rtj5
+ (Tj/ = o
Similarly
and
..
the condition
a^
is
necessary.
b^
q = 0,
it
(2) If
is
q,
which
satisfy
equations
(i).
But these equations are the conditions that the given point-pa
are corresponding points in the involution /a:a;'
.".
+ ^(^ + a:') + 5 = c
q.e.d.
poii
the condition
is
sufificient.
(IV)
pairs
The double
a^$^+2by^ + c-^
= Q,
a^^^
+ 2b^^ + c^ = o
-X
b.
are given by
Then
+ X"^ = O + ^2 =
1^^+2^1^ + '^1 =
fljP
are in involution.
21^2^
-X
i
by (HI),
\a^
b.
Q.E.D.
27.
point-pairs, (Vi-t-i,
;
(V^, -v/~).
;
28. A, A' B, B' are two fixed collinear pairs of points P, a pair of variable points, such that {AA'BP} = {A'AB'P'}
pro
X.]
269
point-pairs,
c,
29. Prove that all involutions defined by the two 4^ + a$ + c=o, i'^ + i^ + c=o, for different values of a, 6,
have one
common
30.
exists
31.
Two involution ranges lie on the same base prove that there one and only one point-pair which belongs to each involution.
is defined by the point-pairs, ai^2+2bi^-)-Ci=0; prove that any other point-pair of the involution is represented by ai^2+2bif -t-Ci-i-A(a2^2+2b2^-l-C2)=0, for a suitable value of A.
3,2^ H2b3^-I-C2=0
;
An
involution
32. system of conies pass through four fixed points; prove that any transversal is cut by them in involution ranges [use Ex. 31] and deduce that two conies can be drawn to pass through four fixed points and touch a given line.
:
33.
P,
fixed
line,
and are
conjugate
ranges.
a fixed
conic
prove
that
[Take the
fixed line as
;i--axis.]
35. ^1, A^; ^1, B^; Q, C^ and A-,, A^; B^, B^; Ci, Cg are two cobasal involution ranges prove that in general A^, A^ B^, B^ Co, C3 are not in involution.
; ;
PENCILS IN INVOLUTION.
In Chapter VIII., the similarity between the properties of
homo-
now be
in
briefly indicated.
We
adopted
If line
Chapter VIII.
common
vertex,
to
every
there
{i.e.
y = ii.x)
origin,
/u.
according as
is
regarded
second pencil.
coincide,
for
Under
all
certain conditions,
however,
these
two
lines
values
of
/x.
These
(V) li
pmm +gm+rm' +s = o
is
is
common
and
same
then ^ = r
the necessary
that to
270
PLANE GEOMETRY
line a,
to.
[CH.
any
/?,
The
36.
37.
proof
is
left to
(V).
homographic
relation
is
7w'-4;-4;'+i5=o,
lines.
find the
lines corresponding to
determine the
Definition.
If
two
pencils,
with a
common
vertex,
are
to
connected by the
relation
referred
...],
is is
{a,
b',
c',
...}
of
lines
of one pencil
is
now regarded
it
a!
and
similarly
{a,
a, b', b,
c', c,
...)
are homographic
and
[a],
this
[a']
is
the characteristic
feature of two^
homograpMc
(VI)
pencils
in involution.
pencil
if
uniquely,
given.
of lines in involution exists and is determined any two pairs of concurrent corresponding lines are
The
38.
proof
is
left
to the reader.
(II).]
was proved
in
with a
common
vertex,
Chapter VIII. that two homographic pencils, have a pair of double lines, real or imaginary.
in involution, putting
m = m' =
/t,
we
pfi? + 2qix + s = o
u=
-Q 'Jq'' -ps i. P
T-
exist
X.]
27r
It is possible, however, by a change of axes, reduce the fundamental relation to a simpler form. Take as axes the two lines bisecting the angles between the two double lines. Referred to the new axes, the double lines are of the form
an involution range.
to
y=
Let I'mm'
fji,x.
+ Q(m + m') + S = o be
are the roots of
.:
the
new
relation.
Then
fj.
Pm^+2Qm + S=o.
(2
= o;
.'.
It
m pmm +q{m + m') + s = o, which would appear to relation to the form MM' = k, has no direct geometrical
The
39.
reduce
the
significance.
actual substitution
is
m=
=^, m' =
jJ^
Efives
the
new
axes, obtained
through an angle
40.
tan~';u,.
Ex. 39 changes an
(VII)
The double
w.r.t.
is
conjugate
The proof
lines a.re
42.
43.
to the reader.
is
mm =
/t^
y=
Ax;
method suggested.
line-pairs,
y = i\x,
44.
Determine the involution defined by the y=7x. Find the double lines.
}'=x,
y=2x;
y=2,x,
45.
Determine the involution defined by the y=6x. Find the double lines.
If the line-pair ax'^
line-pairs,
y=x, y=Sx
;
belongs to the
+ 2hxy + by^ = o is equivalent to y=inx, y = m'x mm' = Deduce that the line-panax^ + 7.hxy + by^=o involution defined hy pmm' + q{m + m') + s = o if ap-\-bs = 2hg.
-7.
Hence prove
(VII).
272
46.
PLANE GEOMETRY
An
involution
is
;
[CH
t(
defined
m, m'
Reduce the
involution, defined
referrec
form
MM' = k,
x = o, y = o x=y^, j)/=W3
in the involution, defined bj
line
corresponding to
x=o
if
{2)
x^+y'=o.
51.
What
is
p=o
in
the relation
OP, OP' axe. a variable pair of lines at right prove that they generate pencils in involution, and find the
;
double
53.
lines.
to
is a fixed point OP, OP' are a variable pair of lines inclined each other at a constant angle a if a =1=90, prove that OP, OP' cannot generate pencils in involution.
; ;
54. Prove that in every involution there exists one pair of corresponding lines at right angles and that if there is more than one such pair, then every pair is at right angles.
:
55.
line-pairs,
;
+ 2hiXy+b.iy^=o
x^ + 2h^y+b^y^' = o
x^+h^xy + b3v'i=o
Prove that the double lines of the involution determined by x'^ + 2hyxy+biy^=o; x^ + 2A2xy + b2y^=o
(.^i-A2)x^ + (bi-b2)xy+(biA2-b2k^)y^=o.
are
(VIII)
The
a^x^
2h^xy
-f-
b-^y'^
=o
2h^xy
if
H- b^'''
=o
if
a^x"^
2k^xy
+ b^y^ = o
are in involution,
and only
1
X.]
273
(X)
one
line-pair at
right angles.
If there
at
right
more than one such line-pair, then every line-pair is angles and the double lines are the isotropic lines
:
Let m^,
m^ be
From
i.e.
the relation,
ffij^
we have
m-^m-^
m^ + m^
=p s
if
Wj,
.'.
there
is
q.e.d.
(2)
Then
.'. .'.
mm' +1 =
or
mm' = or
i.
,-.
every line-pair
is
at right angles.
And
.'.
/a=
V- i.
Q.E.D.
the double lines are the isotropic lines through the vertex.
59.
(IX).
involutions defined
by the
line-pairs,
have one
common
pair of corresponding
Prove that any line-pair of the involution, defined by aix2-|-2hixy-l-biy2=0 a2xH2h2xy-H)2y2=0 can be represented by aix2 + 2hixy -H bjy^ h- A (a2x2 -v 2h2xy bay 2) 0,
61.
;
-1-
double lines of an involution are at right angles, prove any pair of corresponding
involution in Ex. 61
Find the condition that the isotropic lines are a line-pair of the and prove that it is the same as the condition
:
274
64.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Through a
:
[CH.
w.r.t.
drawn
a fixed circle
circle in the
[Take the
possible
6).]
it
65.
to
By
is
prove that the double lines of one are harmonically conjugate to the double lines of each of the others.
66.
jj
/i,!-2=i
Prove that the line-pairs .ri = o, ^2 = fi-"^2=i fi ^'-f2 = Si fifs^ o, where j, = a^r + (^r^-l-ci., form an involution, if
>
X.X.'
//./J.'.
67.
are given
by
^i ^2^^2
.
ox
oy
ox
M
oy
GEOMETRICAL TREATMENT.
The
analytical treatment
homographic
relation
pxx
-\-q(x
+ x')-v s = o: and
take this
last
it
this relation
was
our
easily reducible to
= k.
as
We
shall
relation
the
starting-point
in
geometrical investigation.
Definition.
is
B, B'
C,
...
on the
line,
OA
Then
to form
B, B'
C,
C
'
are said
an involution.
F
T.
"""; """;
is
A BP
Fig. 131,
E
h-i
1
>,
B
Q
P Q'B
O
Fig. 132.
A'
P'
B'
It
should be noted
that,
O corresponds
definition
on
p. 265.
Further,
if
is
is
each point-pair
lies
.]
INVOLUTION
RAlffcES
AND PENCILS
i.e.
275
le portion of
they do not
verlap.
Whereas,
)ining
if
is
negative (Fig.
132),
the portion
of the line
any point-pair contains O, and overlaps the portion of the ne joining any other point-pair.
If k
is
:
positive,
the involution
is
called
non-overlapping
or
yperbolic
r elliptic.
let
that in
and if k is negative, the involution is called overlapping [The terms " hyperbolic " and " elliptic " refer to the one case the double points are real, and in the other
involution
ase imaginary.]
This definition of
ttention to
has
the
advantage
viz.
of directing
one of
its
principal features,
an
is
nvolution
point.
is
It
ross-ratio characteristic.
THEOREM
153.
/,
Given two pairs of points A, A' ; B, ' on s. straight line OA' = OB lossible to construct a point O on I such that OA
.
it is
OB'.
any other-two
Produce
HK to
,,
,
meet
/ at
O.
By
parallels,
.'.
OA OH OB _=_=_.
OA OA'=OB
.
OB'.
Q.E.D.
For another method, see Ex. 68. N.B. There is nothing in this proof to show that only one
osition of
exists.
Since
e
have
is
Another proof
is
276
68.
PLANE GEOMETRY
is
[CH.
of
Theorem
at
153
HA A', HBB'
meet again
K\
then
69.
HK cuts
P,
/ at
is
a variable point-pair of a given involution ^ is a fixed find the locus of the circumcentre of the base
;
APP-
THBOKEM
If
154.
A, A'; B, B';
C,
C
1
{AABC] = {A'AB'C').
H
1 1
1 1
C C
Let
O A
B
Fig. 134.
A'
OA.OA'^OB.OB'=OC.OC'^k
{OA' .
(say).
OA){OC- OB)
OB')
OA')\OA
Ob)
^ AA' C'B' _ A'A B'C _ (0A' - 0A){0B' (OA' - 0C'){0B' - OA) ~ C'A' AB'~A'C' B'A
.
.
PC
= {A'AB'C}.
Theorem 154 may
Let
base
w.r.t.
:.
(u
Q.E.D.
also
be proved as follows
be the point
AB.
Then
<aA, wA',
wB,
mC
'Jk.
B,
by Theorem
55,
{A'AB'C')=(^{AA'BC} = {AA'BC}.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
155.
Given two pairs of points A, A' ; B, on a base one and only one involution, having A, A'; B,
corresponding points.
/,
there exists
as pairs of
By Theorem
such that
If
153,
it
is
.
OA
OA' =
OB OB.
/
is
any point on
and
if
P'
is
OP.OP^OA.OA,
then the point-pair P,
B,
as corresponding points.
X.]
277
is
But further, the position of the point P, corresponding to P, uniquely determined, since by Theorem 154,
{A'ABP) = {AA'B'P').
Therefore there exists one and only one involution, having A, A'
B, B' as
point-pairs.
q.e.d.
Corollary.
Given two pairs of points A, ; A' B, B' on a base /, there exists one and only one point O on /, such that OA OA' = OB OB'. For O corresponds to the point at infinity on /, in the unique
.
.
B, B'.
156.
THEOREM
If
A, A'
B, B'
C,
on a base
/,
such that
{AA'BC} = {A'AB'C},
let
an involution.
If possible,
C" be
by A,
the
point
corresponding to
involution, defined
in
the
B,
B'.
By Theorem
154,
But by hypothesis,
:.
.'.
{AABc\ = {A'AB'C');
{A' ABC")
= {A'AB'C}
coincides with
;
C
q.e.d.
.'.
A, A'
B, B'
C,
form an involution.
157.
THEOREM
The
B, B'
;
the ranges
D',I),...}
To
necessary.
that
if
was proved
then
Theorem
154,
{A/i'BC}, {A'AB'C} are equicross ; and by a precisely similar method it may be shown that ranges of the type {A, B', C, >}, {A, B, C, 17} are equicross ; while ranges of the remaining type {AA'B'B}, {A ABB'}
involution,
.".
the condition
is
is
necessary.
To
suflScient.
Since
{AA'BP} = {A'AB'P'},
any other
.'.
P, P' are, by
Theorem
156, a
;
by A,
B, B'
and
the condition
sufficient.
q.e.d.
278
70.
PLANE GEOMETRY
If A, A'; B, B'; C,
[CH.
prove that
71. 72.
AB
70.
,
With
If
AB.AB' ^ AB'-^A'B
^^
73.
B,
B',
prove that
74. 75.
AB Q^=-gjr
OA
^ the notation of Ex. 73, prove that
is
AB.AB'
With
AO
by a system
of coaxal circles.
76. If P, P' Q, Q' are variable point-pairs of a given involution, prove that the radical axis of any two circles, drawn through P, P' and Q, Q' respectively, passes through a fixed point.
;
77.
A, A'
B, B'
C,
;
is
any
PCC,
have a second
78.
common
If
which AA',
A, A'
B, B'
C,
that
80.
AB = ^,.BC' ^-^,.C A.
With
A,
the notation of Ex. 79, prove that
C,
BC BC AC AC'~'' o/ir + ^n ^g
;
81.
A', B, B',
C
;
a,
13,
;
points of
A A',
is
BB',
if
CC P
A, A'
C,
;
B, B'
C,
involution.
82.
A, A'
B, B'
a, /3,
CC
.
prove that
AC. AC
.
.'
.^, =
ay
;
With
a/3
+ a^
is
/3y
ya=o.
;
84.
axe.
is
and
if
P
.
prove that
85.
PB
afi.
are three point-pairs in involution, prove that the circles, whose diameters are AA', BB', CC, are
coaxal.
If A, A'; B, B'; 0,
X.]
86.
279
87.
is
cut
by three
circles
in point-pairs in involution,
and only
if
88. Given five collinear points A, A', B, B', C, construct a point such that A, A' B, B' C, are point-pairs of an involution, without
; ;
A, A'
',
B, B'
''
C,
BC
''
CA__BC^ CA.
CA'riders,
in Chasles'
DOUBLE POINTS.
Definition.
If a point
on the base of
ari
involution corresponds to
itself, it is
is
THEOREM
158.
as the involution
is
hyperbolic or
elliptic.
P
.
is
given by
OP. OP' = k.
If,
then,
is
a point
on the
OE OE = k,
or
OE^ = k,
or
OE=sJk,
then .
.'.
is
a double point.
F given
-slk.
by
OE=
+'Jk and
0F=
and
:
involution
and are
i.e.
is
positive
elliptic.
or negative,
hyperbolic or
Q.E.D.
28o
PLANE GEOMETRY
i.
is
[CH.
Corollary
Any
For
double points.
OE'^ = OF'^ = k=OP.
2.
OF.
Corollary
An
involution exists
and
is
is
homographic ranges.
THEOREM
(i)
159.
two points>
is
harmonically conjugate.
The proof
90.
91. 92.
left
to the reader.
158, Corollary
159.
2.
E, Q'
F
;
P,
Q
93.
P',
separate harmonically PP' and QQ', prove that E, F are three point-pairs in involution.
Given two point-pairs P, on a straight line, construct two Q, points X, Y which are harmonically conjugate w.r.t. each point-pair and state the conditions requisite for and Y to be real.
;
:
94.
{PF'(2J?}={PP'Ji'Q!}.
THEOREM
The
axe three point-pairs in involution
is
160.
;
B, B'
C,
AB'
(i)
To
prove
it
is
{AB'BC} = {A'BB'C}.
AB'
:.
.BC ^ A'B.B'C
Q.E.D.
X.]
INVOLUTION
To
prove
it
R^GES AND
PENCILS
28s
(2) If
is
sufficient.
AB'
then
:.
C'A,
A, A'
B,
form an involution.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
If
161.
an>
A,
.A'
B, B'
C,
AP AP p' p
ai
a'
'^
constant for
all
positions.
of P,
and equal
to -rrTy
AO
[We have
to prove that
AP.A'O.AP=:AP.AO.AP'.]
}.
By
hypothesis,
.
{APA'O} = {A'PA 00
"
.
AP.AP
AP.AP'
AO
A'U
constant.
Q.E.D.
THEOREM
Any
transversal
is
162.
of an involution.
Fig. 135.
Let the transversal cut the radical axis at O, and any one circle
at P,
P. Then
P,
OP OP = constant.
.
generate an involution.
q.e.d.
282
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
A, B, C,
...
163,
on a base
/; A', B',
C,
...
w.r.t.
a given conic 2, of A, B, C,
...
then the point-pairs A, A'; B, B' ; C, C";...form an involution on /, having as double points the meets of / with 2.
Fig. 136.
Let
meet 2
/?.
{AA'
afi)
is
harmonic.
{CC
,
afi}
(i),
etc.
are harmonic.
Therefore by Theorem
159
point-pairs of an involution, of
;..
are
points.
Q.E.D.
It is
Theorem
using
163, without
making use
of
a,
/8,
95.
Prove Theorem
163, without
;
a, /3.
[Let
is
be the pole of / prove that OA' is the pole oi A and that the pole oi A' deduce from Theorem 55 that
OA
THEOBEM
F,
164.
;
is
is
any
HPP'
passes through
i.e.
The proof
[Let
circle
is
left
to the reader.
let
OH
meet the
again in
K;
prove that
is
fixed.]
X.]
283
THEOREM
Given two point-pairs A, A'
form an involution.
;
165.
,
B, B'
C"
B, B'
C,
Fig. 137.
First Method.
any point
H outside
the base.
AH,
to
K.
Draw A'L
parallel to
is
parallel to
CH
meet
BH respectively, HK Z.
at
to
LC
C"
AH to
at
The
proof,
left
to the reader.
Second Method.
any point
the circles the circle
H outside
CHK to
p. 331.
the base.
let
them
cut again at
K.
by Theorem 164,
is
q.e.f.
284
PLANE GEOMETRY
CONSTRUCTION OF THE DOUBLE POINTS.
[CH.
If
it
are real,
method
for constructing O,
been stated (see page 275). The double points are then given by the meets of the base with a circle centre O, radius \lOA OA',
.
where A, A'
is
a point-pair
BB, CC,
If the
. . .
and are
easily constructed.
an imaginary
circle.
We
circle
THEOREM
166.
O is the centre of an involution defined by the point-pairs, A, A' B, B' ; the lines OA, OA' are rotated in opposite directions, about O, through a right angle into the positions Oa, Od ; then the circle on ad as diameter cuts the base at the double points E, of the involution.
F'G. 139-
Fig. 140.
is
FO=OE,
also
:.
Therefore E,
[This
is
F are
226.]
X.]
285
THEOREM
If
167.
E,
F are
point-pairs
A, A'
B,
A',
;
E,
B
;
A',
B'
E, 7^
also
By
hypothesis,
B, A'
E,
Fare
A,
point-pairs
it
may be shewn
that
A',
B'
E,
F are
q.e.d.
Theorem 167 yields another method for constructing the double points of an involution defined by two point-pairs A, A' ; B, B'
Take any point
Let the circles
Let the
circles
H outside the base. JIA'B meet again HAB, HAB meet again
HAB\
HKL.
circle
at
K.
at L.
Draw Then
the circle
the
meets of the
HKL
with
the
double points.
The proof
96.
97.
is
left
to the reader.
164.
Prove Theorem
Prove the
first
method of Theorem
for the
165.
this page.
double points, on
100.
F are
prove that
EP
P, P' are a
is
FP'
-^-p
constant.
101.
With With
If
102. 103.
B, B',
is at infinity,
prove that
AB' + A'Bo.
104.
With
B'A.
105. 106.
'S-p-
AB + AB' = AA'
^rp.
-jr^
prove that
107.
With the
106,
prove that
286
108.
PLANE GEOMETRY
With the notation of Ex.
.
[CH.
io6, if
P
.
is
prove that
109.
If
B, B'
C,
form an involution.
110. Prove that two straight lines, divided homographically, can be placed, one on the other, so as to form an involution. [With the notation of Chapter VIII. place / on/'.] 111. Given three pairs of points on a line, what is the condition for the existence of a pair of points, real or imaginary, harmonically conjugate to each given pair of points? And if they exist, what is the
is
by A, A'
B, B'
\i
the mid-pomt of
113.
AA
y,
^,
,
^ prove that
OB = AB
5~z
~d^'-
If a variable
line cuts
that
it
114.
line
pencils
115.
cut
is
by the pencils
a straight
/",
PQ
line,
at real points
the polars of
overlap.
116.
circles
;
meet PQ,
prove that
PF
and
QQ
at
must
Z,
if
U are
LL meets
circle at
A,
A\
AA\
LL
A
are coaxal.
variable line
is
drawn through a
fixed point
on the radical
Prove that the locus of the double points of the involution so formed is a circle and that as A varies, these circles generate another coaxal system.
axis of a coaxal system.
;
118.
E,
If
by A, A'
B, B'.
BB'
AB, A'B'
subtend
EF as
CC
diameter.
What
is
outside,
each other?
A, B,
1 1
C, A', B',
Construct a point
at
[Use Ex.
8.]
; ;
120. ABC, A'B'C are two triangles such that BC, B'C CA, C'A' AB, A'B' intersect at three collinear points P, Q, R AA', BB', CC meet the line PQR at P, Q, R prove that P, P Q, Q' R, R' form
; ; ; ;
an involution.
121.
point
Given a pair of corresponding points A, A' and one double of an involution, construct the point corresponding to a given
point P-
X.]
287
Construct
122.
Prove that this point-pair is real, if either or both involutions are elliptic if both are hyperbolic, state the condition that this common point-pair may still be real.
;
123.
straight line
124.
Prove that the double points of the involution made on any by a coaxal system are concyclic with the limiting points.
system of conies have
B, B'
C,
A
;
triangle
125.
form an involution. harmonic, prove that the harmonic conjugate of C Av.r.t. BB'. with the harmonic conjugate of
A, A'
If
{AA'
BB')
is
w.r.t.
AA'
coincides
P, P' are a variable point-pair of an involution perpendicular to AP, fixed point lines through P,
126.
;
is
AP meet
;
is
a straight
line.
P,
,
is
F are
double points
to
any
circle
circle
on
PP
as diameter
orthogonal
INVOLUTION PENCILS.
It
is
easy to
difificulty
ranges yields
pencils.
If a
without
drawn through a point V, cut any one transversal in point-pairs forming an involution, then every transversal will be cut in involution, by the fundamental cross-ratio property
system of
line-pairs,
Definition.
If a, a'
;
b, b'
c,
c ;... are
cut
by them
is
said to form
is
and
called the
The
involution pencil
is
and over-
THEOREM
Given two pairs of lines a,
there exists
pairs of corresponding rays.
a'
;
168.
b',
b,
which concur
having
at a point F, a'; b,
b'
involution,
a,
as
The proof
left to
the reader.
288
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
(i) If a,
{aci:bc) =
169.
a a
l>,
6'
c,
c'
{i^ab'c').
;
(2) If a,
b, b'
c,
c'
and
if
{adbc]
a,
b,
b'
c,
c'
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
THEOREM
(i) li a,
170.
b, b'
c,
c'
id,
if' ;
...
...},
.)
are homographic.
b,
b'
c,
c'
d, d' ;...
if
at a
common
point,
and
the pencils
{a'ab' be' cd'
;
[aa'bb'cc'dd' ...],
d ...}
are the line-pairs
a, a'
b,
b'
c,
c'
d, d' ;...
of an involution.
The proof
Definition.
If a line
is
left
to the reader.
to
itself,
it
THEOREM
(i)
171.
lines,
which are
real
hyperbolic or
elliptic.
An
and
is
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
THEOREM
( 1 )
172.
is
Every
line-pair of
an involution
harmonically conjugate to
an
fourth pair of lines, they form an involution, having the fourth pair
as double
lines.
is
The
proof
left
to the reader.
X.]
289
THEOREM
(i) (2) If
173.
line-pair at right angles.
line-pair
is
at right angles,
then every
line-
pair
is
at right angles
isotropic lines.
(i)
The
internal
and external
double lines are at right angles and are also a line-pair of the involution by Theorem 172, since they are harmonically conjugate
to the
(2)
double
lines.
;
VB, VB' be two perpendicular line-pairs. By Theorem 1 68, these two line-pairs determine the involution uniquely. But VA, VA' and VB, VB' are harmonically conjugate to the A A VB'. isotropic lines Fo), W, since A VA' = 90 = Vu), Vi' are the double lines of the involution, defined by
Let VA, VA'
VB'.
VF,
VP'
is
any other
V{PP'
is
u)(o'}
is
at right angles.
q.e.d.
point
VP, VP' are two prove that they generate an involution another method of proof of Theorem 173 (2).
V,
Definition.
If the line-pairs of
is
an involution are
said to be orthogonal.
THEOREM
174.
at right angles,
then
the isotropic lines through the vertex are a line-pair of the involution.
The proof
is
left
THEOREM
If the angles
175.
line-pairs of
an involution
have the same bisectors, then these bisectors are the double lines of the involution, and the angle formed by any other line-pair has
the
same
D.G.
II.
bisectors.
is
The proof
left
to the reader.
2go
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
b, c, ...
176.
a, are any system of lines through a vertex V; a, b', c', ... are the conjugate lines through V, w.r.t. a given conic 2, oia, b,c,...; b, b' ; c, c ;... form an involution through V, then the line-pairs a, a
;
Fto
2.
The proof
is
left to
the reader.
F denotes
;
VA, VA'
of the involution
129. 130. 131.
...
or or
a,
<?,
^,
id'
;...
denote
line-pairs
lines.]
VF
Prove Theorem
Prove Theorem
169. 170.
171.
132.
133. 134. 135. 136.
Prove Theorem Prove Theorem Prove Theorem Prove Theorem Prove Theorem
137.
The
lies
on a
an involution.
in general one
138. In any involution pencil, prove that there exists and only one line-pair, equally inclined to a given line.
What
139.
is
w.r.t. a variable conic; prove that the locus of the centre of the conic is a straight line, passing through the meet of the polars. [Use Theorem 176.]
140.
If
VA, VA'
.
is
141.
-=
A VP
sin
sin
=
A VP'
is
constant.
A VB
sin
B'VC
sin
B VC
sin
CVA.
so as
144. If two pencils are homographic, prove that there exist a pair of perpendicular rays of one, such that the corresponding rays in the other pencil are also perpendicular.
145.
tangents to
PH,
a quadrangle inscribed in a conic 5 PB, are th^ from any point P on the third diagonal prove that PK;PA,PC; PB, are the line-pairs of an involution.
is
;
ABCD
.S"
PK
PD
X.]
291
146.
is
prove that
AC
are conjugate points w.r.t. a conic 147. V, is a variable chord prove that VP, VP' generate an involution. Determine the through double lines.
;
V
;
PP
148.
sides
Through a point K, lines Va., V/3, Vy are drawn parallel to the BC, CA, AB of a triangle prove that VA, Va VB, V/3 VC, Vy
;
;
A
P'
;
perpendiculars at P,
to
VP,
VP
meet
at
P'
find
the
locus of P'.
150.
If
two
pairs
w.r.t.
,
of perpendicular
lines
through
a point
are
conjugate lines
,^, 151.
152.
Prove
that
Prove that
O must be a focus ^m^AVE sinAVB.smAVB' ,, ,. -^-snyy^=~. 77775;. sm A VB sm A VB sm-* A VE sinEVF .smPVP = 2smEVP .sinFVP.
a conic S, prove that
of 2.
Prove that conjugate diameters of a conic are line-pairs of an involution. Determine the double lines. Consider also the case where the conic is a circle.
153. 154.
PQR
is
a self-conjugate triangle w.r.t. a system of conies prove P to any one of the conies generate an involution
;
155.
is
;
a conic
and the
156. 157.
sides of
ABCD.
155.
w.r.t.
State
is
variable point
or\.
line
a conic through A
tangents from a
'\a.
P-^,
P^; prove
PROJECTION.
THEOREM
The
and the projection of a pencil Moreover double points and
lines.
177.
is
is
and
The proof
is
left
to the reader.
292
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
If
178.
A, A'
B, B'
C,
;...
VA, VA'
if
VB, VB'
if
And
the involution
elliptic,
and
are
conjugate imaginaries,
The
proof
is
left
to the reader.
[Use the method of Theorem 130 page 230, and Theorem 172 (i).] Theorem 178 may be proved in another way, which is really
only superficially different from the
method
as
suggested.
let
BB'
diameters and
(2),
them
meet again
if
at
V^,
V^.
V^,
V^ are
and only
if
the involution
THEOREM
Any The
158.
159.
proof
is
left to
the reader.
161.]
[Project
VE,
VF
160.
161.
may be
effected as
follows
VB, VB';...\s orthogonal. Project from K on to a plane, VAA'. 162. Prove tliat any involution range can be projected into a system of point-pairs having a common mid-point.
;
Take, by Let any transversal cut the pencil at A, A' ; B, B' 178, a point V in another plane, such that the involution
parallel to
163.
j4.
A'
B, B'
C,
prove that their joins to any other point on the conic also form an
involution pencil.
164.
165.
concurrent.
meet of
AA
and BB' as
166. 167.
Prove, by projection, that any transversal is cut in involution by a system of conies through four fixed points.
X.]
293
168.
conies,
Prove that any transversal is cut in involution by a system of having a common focus and directrix.
169. variable chord of a given conic subtends a right angle at a fixed point on the conic, prove that it passes through a fixed point. [Use Ex. 165.]
170. X, Y are two fixed points on the base of the involution determined by the point-pairs A, A' B, B' CC ... If A^, A( ^1, B-[ Cj, Ci';...are the harmonic conjugates w.r.t. X, Y of A^ A'; B, B' C, ..., prove that they form an involution.
; ; ; . ;
171.
A, A'
B, B'
C,
QLuadrilateral
;
P
;
is
PC form an involution. [Project APA!, BPff and use the fact that the circles whose diameters are
A
;
A,
B
173.
a.
AB
prove that P,
a single
174.
generate an involution on
common
its
vertex have
reality.
common
line-pair.
Examine the
conditions for
that every conic has in general a single pair of conjugate diameters at right angles, and that this pair is
173,
always
175.
pair of
176.
centre
that
sm.\COA
^r
sin^A'OB' ~ ^
sini
siniBOC = ^~
siniB'OC
165.]
:
prove that
^,
A A BB
. .,
,
sin^COA'
AOB
CC
are concurrent.
[Use Ex.
177.
Generalise by projection
;
AB, BC, CD
CD,
parabola
BE, CE
are parallel to
OE
and
on
BC
OP.OQ = OR.OS.
Write down the dual theorem. Project the dual theorem so as inscribed in a circle.
178.
;
to obtain
D, D' are four fixed point-pairs of an A, A' B, B' C, ^y is a variable point on the base H^, H^, H^, Pf^ are the prove that the four point-pairs w.r.t. harmonic conjugates of {H^H^H.JJ^f is constant.
;
;
involution
179.
P,
P are a variable
find
Xa
2^
given conic.
Consider also the special case, when the base touches the conic.
CHAPTER
XI.
C,
V^
are
By
the
fundamental
V^B, V^B'
line-pairs
;
cross-ratio
the
line-pairs
V-^A,
V^A'
V^A, V^A'
V^B, V^B'
it
V^C, FjC"
;...
form an involution
pencil.
As
in
Chapter IX.,
is
V{AA'BB' CC
...}.
Definition.
on a conic is called an system of point-pairs ^, ^' -5, ^' ; points on the conic or an involution range ol involution range of
if
their joins
to
form an involution pencil. It follows immediately from the definition that the necessary and B, B' ; C, C";..-or sufficient condition that the point- pairs A, A'
;
is
{AA'BB'CC
...},
{A'AB'BC'C
THEOREM
An
involution range of points
uniquely,
180.
exists
on a conic
and
is
determinec
when two
reader
the
method of Theorem
131.]
CH.xi]
295
CHAPTER
XI.
b,
b'
c,
...
Wj, 2 a-re
By
the fundamental
;
v-J>, v-J)
v-^c,
;
Vjc' ;...
;
v^a, v^ci
v^b, vj)'
it
v^c'
..Aoxvsx
an involution range.
As
in
Chapter IX.,
is
Definition.
system of tangent-pairs
their
a,
b, b'
...to
a conic
is
called an
b, b'
c,
c'
...to
a.
is
},
{ dab'bc'c
THEOREM
An
mined uniquely, when
181.
and
is
deter-
The proof
is
left to
296
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
and only two points on the conic
each of which
is
182.
on a
(real or
conjugate imaginaries),
The
proof
is
left
AA'
BB'
and
involution,
if
CC";...are point-pairs on a conic, forming an E, are the two points, each of which is a
THEOREM
If
184.
A, A'
B, B'
C,
C
. . .
...
of points on a conic,
lines
w.r.t.
A A',
BB',
CC,
and if E, are the double points meet at a point, viz. the pole
then the
of
EF
the conic.
Fig. 141.
E{PF' EF) is harmonic; E{FF' OF) h \iz.Tmomc. Similarly F{FF' OE) is harmonic. But these pencils have a common corresponding ray EF; the meets of EF, FP; EF', FP' EO, FO are coUinear.
By Theorem
172,
.-.
; ; ;
.
FP'
E,
passes through O.
q.e.d.
is
still
If
F are
Principle of Continuity.
XI.]
397
THEOREM
183.
Given an involution pencil of tangents to a conic, there exist two and only two tangents to the conic (real or conjugate imaginaries), each of which is a coincident tangent-pair of the involution.
The
proof
is
left
to the reader.
Definition.
If a, a
;
b, b'
c,
c'
...
involution,
and
if
e,
/ are
is
THEOREM
If a,
185.
b, b'
c,
if e,
f are
viz.
lie
on a line,
the polar o oi ef
the conic.
PP'
Fig. 142.
By Theorem
Similarly
is is is
harmonic;
harmonic.
e{\pp'
of\
ef;
//'
e,
lies
on
0.
If
f are
still
Principle of Continuity.
298
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOBEM
If
186.
A, A'
B,
C,
on a conic, such
AA', BB', CC", ...pass through a point O, then the point-pairs A, A' ; B, B' ; ... form an involution of points on the conic, having as double points the meets , of the conic
that the h'nes
PP' (see Fig. 141). Then E{EF; PP')=E{OP" PP'} = {OP" PP") = Let P" be the meet of ^Jf,
;
;
E{EF;
PP'\\s harmonic;
EE,
.'.
EP as
E,
EP'
E,
F as
If
F are
Principle of Continuity.
For
riders,
see Exx.
THEOBEM
If a
188 [Desargues'
Theorem].
fixed
four
points
then
three
Fig. 143.
A, B, C,
and
/ is the
given
line.
BC,
1^*^
AD;
CA,
BD; AB, CD
be
^11 ^2' -^1' -^2J ^\i ^2' ^"<i of the system be Pj, P^.
'
-"^i.
^2J
^\i Pi
^"^s
XI.]
299
THEOREM
If a,
187.
b,
b'
c,
c'
...
bb',
cc\
lie
on a
e,
line
0,
b,
b'
...
to
Then
..
ee,
e{ef; pp')
= e{op"
.'.
pp')
= {of ,pp']=-i;
ep'
e{ef;pp'y\s harmonic;
(i),
;
by Theorem 159
ep,
ef as double points
.".
e,
f as
If
e,
double
lines.
is
still
q.e.d.
Principle of Continuity.
THEOREM
three
of these
then
the
tangents
form
line-pairs in involution.
a,
b,
c,
and
L
to
is
with
be,
ad;
ca,
b^;
and
let
A. AThen c{p^^ab)=d\j[>J^b);
.-.
flj,
a^;
b-^,
b^;
p-^,
p^ are three
line-pairs in involution.
3cx>
PLANE GEOMETRY
A{P^P^C) = D{P^P^BC)
. .
[CH.
Similarly
{P,P,C,P,}
;
= {P,P,B,C,} = {P,P,C,P,}
P^ are three
.-.
Cj,
Cj
B^, B^;
P-^,
point-pairs in involution.
But an involution is defined uniquely by B-^, B^; P^, P^; .-. A^, A^; B^, B^; Cj, C^; P^, P^ form an involution. Similarly, if Q-^, Q^ are the meets of / with any other conic
of the system,
Q^, Q^
is
Corollary.
If
Xj, X^
is
/,
a conic can
be drawn to pass through the six points A, B, C, D, X^, X^. Other methods of proof are indicated in Exx. 49, 50, and
Chapter X., Ex. 32.
Definition.
four fixed
points,
is
The
Theorem.
(i) If
a line
of contact of
/ is
touches one of a pencil of conies, then the point the double point of the involution formed by
/
Two and
and
be drawn
to
pass through
four points
PQR
is
the
quadrangle
ABCD,
point.
through A, B, C,
P as
one double
the
number
riders
points A, B,
coincide.
For
XI.]
301
Similarly,
= d{p^pj>c\
{/iM^i} = {/1/2V2} =
^2J
{PiPii^ih}
>
'
"^u
''2
'^u
A>
is
But an involution
' ^i>
'^2
1
Similarly,
q^,
b-^, b^; p^, p^; form an involution. '^I'l P\i Pi q^ are the tangents from L to any other conic
defined uniquely by
is
Corollary.
If
x-^,
X2
is
any
through Z, a conic
x-^,
d,
x^. 99.
Definition.
lines, is called
a range
of conies.
The
(i)
Theorem.
If a point
is
lies
on one of a range of
at
Z
(2)
to the conies.
Two and
pqr
is
and
(3) If
d,
number
b,
c,
more of the
lines a,
coincide.
189, see Ex. 88-115.
For
riders
on Theorem
302
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
(i) If
two
of two conies
^j, 52, then they are conjugate w.r.t. every conic passing through
the four
common
S2
{i-e.
w.r.t.
pencil determined by
(2)
S^.
The
P
'
w.r.t.
concurrent.
Fig. 143.
(i) Let
A, A'
PQ
Then
since P,
Therefore P, Q are the double points of the involution, defined by A, A' ; B, B'. Let X, X' be the meets of PQ with any conic S of the pencil, determined by S^, ^j.
Then by Theorem
.".
188,
A, A'
;
B, B'
is
{XX' PQ)
harmonic;
q.e.d.
..
P,
(2) Since P,
are conjugate
S, the polar of
w.r.t.
passes through Q.
P
P
w.r.t.
are concurrent.
XI.]
303
THEOREM
(i) If
^j^,
191.
w.r.t.
two
lines /,
q are conjugate
w.r.t.
k^-'-
^2)
every
w.r.t.
four
common
The
of
s^.
.Tj,
^2
range determined by
(2)
poles of a given
line
w.r.t.
'
coUinear.
(i)
Let
a, a'
b, b'
to
s-^,
s^.
Then
pq] and
[bb'
pq]
are harmonic.
by
Therefore p, q are the double lines of the involution, defined a, a ; b, b'. Let X, x' be the tangents from pq to any conic s of the range,
s-^,
determined by
s^.
Then by Theorem
.-.
189, a, a';
b, b'
is
x,
are in involution;
{xx' -jpq]
harmonic;
s.
.-.
q.e.d.
the pole of
w.r.t.
5 lies
on
q.
Therefore the
pole
of
p w
r.t.
any
conic
of
the
range
lies
on
q.
are coUinear.
Q.E.D.
304
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
(i)
is
192.
Z' is
conjugate to
P w.r.t.
all)
of a pencil of conies
/"' is
" which
the conies of
the pencil.
(2)
The
conic
at
o-
passes
if
is the harmonic conjugate of If w.r.t. A, B, then a- passes through H' and the corresponding five points on the other five sides of the quadrangle ABCD; o- also passes
If / cuts
AB
^and
H'
ABCD
Fig. 147
(i)
...
be the poles of
S-^,
S^,... of
the pencil.
P, Q, P,
...
on
/;
and
P',
Q,
R',... are
two and
.-.
all
Therefore PL.,,
polars of
.-.
QL^, RL^, ... and FL^, QL^, P,Q,P,... w.r.t. S-,, S^; L^{P', Q, P\ ...} = {P, Q, R, ...}=L,{P',
K L^,
...
are the
XI.]
305
THEOREM
{i)
193.
p
is
is
L;
p'
is
a line
which
/'
conjugate to
w.r.t.
all)
of a range
a conic
n-
w.r.t.
the conies of
the range.
(2)
The
conic
cr
If
is
the
join of
a,
b,
and
o-
ab,
and
fi
if h'
is
w.r.t.
then
touches
lines
through
to the range
Fig. 149.
(i)
Let
/j,
4,
...
be the polars of
w.r.t.
the conies
s-^,
s^,...oi
the range.
/,
q,
r, ...
and
p', q',
r,
...
are
two and
.-.
all
Therefore //j,
q'l^,
rVj, ...and
/4,
rVg, ...are
the
poles
of/,
q, r, ...w.r.t.
/i{/, /. r,
= {A
q, r,
]=IAP'^
/.
'''
3o6
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
is
a conic
Z3,
a-
Fiu. 148.
(2)
w.r.t.
Since {^AB;
HH')
.-.
is
harmonic,
H, H'
But
lies
a-
on
/;
o-
Similarly
passes
through
the
corresponding
five
points
on
EFG
ABCD,
and
let
EG.
the polar of F,
.'.
Then, since
w.r.t.
EG
on
/;
is
F,
X are
conjugate points
But
lies
o-
..
cr
passes through F.
Similarly
Lastly,
A,
/t
passes through E,
X,
jx.
G.
/,
if
are
the
<T
passes through A,
/x.
Definition.
The
conic-locus
o-
of
Theorem 192
is
corresponding
[This
name
is
THEOREM
The
is
194.
This
is
XI.]
307
/
l^,
is
a conic
o-
touching
/,,
4 and
q.e.d.
...of
w.r.t.
the range.
Fig. 150.
(2)
Since {ab
hW)
is
harmonic,
h,
ti
.-.
o-
touches H.
five lines
through
ac,
ad,
bd,
cd. let
x be
w.r.t.
and
is
eg.
Then, since eg
the pole oi f,
.f,
.".
o-
touches/.
touches
jx
e,
g.
Lastly, if A,
A,
[i.
cr
touches
A,
fi.
Q.E.D.
Definition.
The
conic-envelope
cr
of
Theorem 193
a,
is b,
d corresponding
to
[This
name
is
due
to Dr. Taylor.]
THEOREM
The envelope
of conies
is
195.
w.r.t.
a range
This
is
3o8
1.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Two
[CH.
at
a point
M of the conic
cuts
chords FQ,
RS
;
of a conic meet at
H\
;
MN
is
;
the tangent
prove that
MP,
MQ
MR,
MS MH, MN
;
form an involution.
2.
is
PQ
of a conic
a fixed
line
through
the conic 2A
H,
cuts
/"Q
at
X and the
The
conic at
X'
prove that
KX, KX'
generate involution
pencils.
conic,
vertex A of the triangle ABC is a fixed point on a given and the mid-point and direction of BC are fixed. If AB, AC cut the conic again at B\ C, prove that B'C passes through a fixed
3.
point.
4.
is
involution.
prove that
5.
PF
a fixed point /, p' are a variable line-pair of a given P, P' are the feet of the perpendiculars from O to p, p' passes through a fixed point.
;
;
A variable A
triangle
;
is
prove that
conic
three of
its
vertices
on fixed
lines
prove that
its
circle is
8.
9.
Prove that the inverse of an involution range of points on a an involution range, either on a circle or on a straight line.
is
What
a fixed point on a fixed diameter of a conic through is drawn a variable chord PP' of the conic lyp, lyP cut the tangent at in g, prove that DQ' is constant.
is
;
DD
DQ
10. If A, A' B, B' ... are point-pairs of an involution 0, range on a conic, prove that the point at which AA', BB', CO',... concur is the pole w.r.t. the conic of the cross-axis of the homographic ranges {A, B, 0,...}, {A', B', C, ...} of points on the conic.
; ; ;
11. 12.
10.
a fixed point on a given tangent are variable points on such that AP,
is
^C
P,
Q S
angles
at a fixed point
to
meet on a
13.
fixed line.
;
is a fixed point on a conic S PQ is a variable chord of such that OP, OQ are ec[ually inclined to a fixed line prove that PQ passes through a fixed point.
S,
14.
variable chord
PQ
;
fixed point
on the conic
of a conic subtends a right angle at a prove that PQ passes through a fixed point.
XI.]
309
15.
AB
7"
;
is
point
on a
P,
Q
16.
find
from a variable and meet AB at the locus of the meet of the other tangents from P, g to S^.
;
common
drawn
to ^1,
A A
variable
circle
5 at P, Q; Q to 5.
meet of the
prove that
AQ
19.
AB
is
tangent at
cuts
the tangent at
20.
in P',
Q
aX
is fixed.
The tangent
AE
to
a conic
is
BC
BCD
.
PQ
is
if
a variable
BQ
is
meet
AE
at
P,
AE
EQ
CD
meets
constant.
21. at P,
22.
A
P'
.<4
fixed circle
;
5 cuts a variable circle of a given coaxal system prove that P, P' generate an involution range on S.
a fixed point on a conic
is
tangents
at
to
;
S meet
two
a fixed tangent at
P,
AP,
S-^,
AQ
meet
P,
23.
Q'
a,
b are
common
at a variable point
of S^ meets a at Q, the tangent from Q to S^ to 5; touches S^ at T; find the meets b at R, the tangent from
envelope of
24. S^, S^
PT.
circle
The
;
is
cut orthogonally
cut
prove that
it is
by them
in
25. Tangents are drawn from a variable point on a fixed line to a given conic and meet a fixed tangent to the conic at P, Q\ prove that P, Q generate involution ranges.
the tangents to S from 26. BC is the tangent at P to a conic 5 two points ^1, A^ meet BC in Pj, Q^ and Pj, 02 respectively if A-^A^ meets PC at C, prove that P, C; Pj, 2i P2, Ss fof an involution.
;
a variable point on a fixed line, tangents p, q are drawn From a fixed point O, lines OP, 00 are drawn parallel to /, q\ prove that OP, OQ generate an involution pencil. if O is 28. Two chords PQ, RS of a conic meet on the chord
27.
From
to
a parabola.
AB
the pole of
AB,
AP,
AQ
AB
form an involution.
3IO
29.
PLANE GEOMETRY
A, B,
C,
[CH
;
D,
on a conic
is
OA,
30.
OB
A
;
prove that
0{ACBD)=P\ACBD\-x.P{A'CB'D\.
fixed
circle
meet the
any
circle at
P,
Q
31.
prove that
is
PQ
PP a variable chord of a fixed conic O If OP, OP are a line-pair of a given involution pencil,
oi
is
fixed point.
PP.
32.
A, B,
C,
P, Q,
if
K{PABC}=R{QCBA],
prove that
33.
PQ
TQ
meets
AC
on the tangent at B.
T
TP,
is
PQ
of a conic
a variable
line
PQ
at a fixed point
the conic
meet on a
fixed line.
;
34.
OP,
OP
is
the
corresponding rays of a homographic pencil, with a different vertex, meet OP, aX P, prove that passes through a fixed point. ;
OP
PP
35.
OA,
OB
two variable
parallel
tangents meet
OA,
OB
at P,
respectively
PQ.
36.
E,
straight line
by the
are the double points of the involution determined on a sides of a quadrangle inscribed in a circle 5 ; prove
EF
as diameter
is
orthogonal to S.
that the intercept of
any tangent
Two
C,
C,
A, B, A, B,
39.
conies touch the same line at P, Q respectively and cut at D;'\i R is the mid-point of PQ, prove that the conic through D, R has one asymptote parallel to PQ,
;
Two
K;
coincide.
41.
is
on AB equidistant from O two lines CPQ, DRS and R, 5 if PR, QS meet AB at X, Y, prove
;
AB
of a conic
C,
are points
that
CX=DY.
42.
coincide.
any point on a chord o{ a conic a line through and the tangents at A, B to the conic in Q, R that PC. PR. PQ CR.
43.
is
;
AB
the conic in C,
D QD=PD
P
;
cuts
prove
XI.]
311
44. is the mid-point of a chord AB of a conic PQ, RS are two chords through PR, QS meet AB at X, Y prove that AX=BY.
;
H
A
45.
pair of
common
tangent
46.
TP
to 5; cuts 52 2A
chords of two conies 5i, S2 meet at T; the H, prove that { TP HK\ is harmonic.
on a hyperbola, parallel to an asymptote, cuts two pairs of opposite sides of an inscribed quadrangle in //, H'; K, K' prove that PH' = PK'
line
Z'
;
PH
PK
47.
The
F
;
Q,
P, R'
in
prove that
P,
49.
Q
n
in
M,
N and
n
meets a chord
PQ
H,
the tangents
.
the curve in
prove that
OH^=OM
ON.
that
With
'
Theorem
n'r,^
}=
n n
J?
50.
PQ
is
AB
at
the
tangents at P,
52.
Q
;
meet
AB m
S,
T; prove
that
;
AS=BT.
A, B,
C, I,
at .4 in S,
that
T U
this
J are
is
five points
on a conic
//,
A,
U are
does
?
What
infinity
theorem become,
axe.
if /,
53.
P, Q, P,
I I
S
I
of a conic
another chord
PQaX.0; HR,
55.
KS
T
in
meet
PQ
aX L,
UK cuts
QS
cut
prove that
;
OP.OQ=OL. OM.
P, Q, R, S,
the tangent it
56.
H, K, M,
prove that
From a
;
drawn
quadrangle
57.
Show how
Through
line
sides of a quadrangle in
58.
Ha H as
centre.
to intercept
show how
to
draw a conic
on a given
59.
and
A,
B'm
P,
prove that
PQ
passes through
a fixed point.
312
60.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
line
A system of conies pass through four fixed points A, B, C, ; any through A cuts the conies at P^, P^, Pg, if AT^, AT^, AT^, ... ;
to the conies,
prove that
AP,
AQ
PQ
a.t
P,
Q;
of CP,
62.
BQ
The
;
is
a straight
line.
circle of curvature at
a point
/"
and the tangent at P divide harmonically Q the other common tangent of the circle and the conic.
again at
prove that
63.
asymptote at Q,
64.
at g,
If
N
is
on a conic meets the auxiliary circle prove that {PT; QR\ is harmonic. the foot of the ordinate from P to the major axis, prove that
axis at
TN bisects
65.
QNR.
chord
A variable
j'?.^'
PQ
;
A
S
BP,
BQ
at R,
prove that
66.
ABC
From
is
;
is
a fixed point
at
on the conic
BC, CA,
67.
AB
prove
and
OC
to the sides
prove that
OA, OA'
OB, OB'
a conic
PQ
E
70.
to
the tangent
the mid-point of
PP,
77
prove that
JT p '^ P'
at P,
if
EQ
is
constant.
lines
at
PCP', DCJy are conjugate diameters of an ellipse the straight joining P>, D' to a variable point on the ellipse meet the tangent
;
Pm
71.
X, Y; prove that
is
-^..^=^.
;
ABC
-
:;
is
a variable
AQ AR
-
BP, CP meet
the tangent at
m. Q,
R;
prove
is
constant.
Two
parabolas touch at
and cut
PR
to
two curves.
XI.]
313
73.
cutting
A,
PP PF B, C, D
C
is
is
a diameter of a conic, centre O AB, CD are two chords X, X' if prove that any conic through cuts at points equidistant from O.
at
;
PX=PX\
PP
74.
of the conic
CD
cuts
AB, AE,
is
chord
CD'^^
GD^
75. A system of conies circumscribe a given triangle and have a common pair of conjugate points prove that they pass through
Two
conies
5;,
S^ have
chord
AQi
of S^ cuts ^2 at P^, Q^
special case
if
P^Qi
is
parallel to the
a chord
Deduce a
infinity.
line at
transversal cuts the sides BC, CA, AB of a triangle at three other points P', Q', R' are taken, such that P, P'; Q, Q'; R, R' form an involution prove that AP', BQ', OR' are concurrent.
77.
A
;
P, Q,
78.
Two
at
;
of
them
a.t
P,
if it
meets
AB
at
X, prove
that
of a conic
i? is
a point on
PQ
such that
are
01^=0P
sides
OQ.
From any
drawn
PQ aX H, P
prove that
OH
OX=RO'^.
80.
The
BC, CA,
AB
PT is
prove that
P{rABC} = P{ TDEF\.
CA, CA' AB, A'B' of the triangles ABC, 81. The sides BC, B'C A'B'C meet in three collinear points P,Q,R\ if AA', BF, CC cut PQ at P, Q', R', prove that P, P Q, Q' R, R' form an involution. 82. / is the line of intersection of the planes of two triangles ABC, AF'C BC, CA, AB, B'C, CA', A'B' meet / at a, b, c, d, b', d. If Ad, BV, Cc' are concurrent, prove that A'a, Fb, C'c are also concurrent.
; ; ;
83.
P,
Q,
R,
a variable line
at S', Q', R'
;
through
SQ
constant.
Two
chords
AB, CD
w.r.t.
the conic
any chord
is
AP
DB
Q
at Q, R,
prove that
{PR; QS}
harmonic.
85.
ABA'F
Q
to
circumscribing a conic
\i
P,
touch
BA, BA'
at
A, A'
respectively.
314
86.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
ABC
is
PQ
g
a fixed triangle inscribed in a conic ; a variable chord if {Pabc\ is constant, prove that at a, b, c
AB
87.
Three equidistant
is
lines, parallel to
;
an asymptote of a conic, meet prove that any line parallel to divided harmonically by the curve and the
88.
A
TR
tangent at a point
at g, i?
;
to
A is the pole of a chord BC of the conic that AB, AC; AP; AT; AQ, AR form an involution pencil. TP^, TQ^ are. the tangents from a point T 89. TP^, TQi
TQ,
;
prove
conies
to two TP^, TP^ axe conjugate lines w.r.t. a conic S^, touching the four common tangents of 5j, 52, prove that TQ^, TQ^ axe also
.S"i,
52
if
conjugate lines
90.
w.r.t.
53.
is
one of the
common
U
is
to the conies
if
A, A'
their
is
formed by
common
that
91. 92.
c,
0{AA'
TiT^]
harmonic.
a, b, c coincide. a,
and
also
coincide.
93.
will
show how
to
draw a pair of
vertices
lines
which
each
of
the
joins
of opposite
of a
complete
quadrilateral harmonically.
94.
any point
95.
if
A BCD is P on
a tangent
at
CD
at
prove that
Q AP, BP
;
cut
CD
at L,
M;
;
AA', BB',
96.
CC
is
DD
through O. a quadrangle inscribed in a conic 5; PH, are from any point P on the third diagonal ; prove that a conic can be inscribed in to touch PH, PK.
the tangents to
ABCD
PK
ABCD
97.
AA'
BB'
CC
are the
pairs
;
of opposite
vertices
of a
PQ} and {BB' ES} are harmonic prove that PE and QS cut CC harmonically.
quadrilateral; {AA';
98.
ranges;
ABCD is
a.\.
a quadrilateral circumscribing a
circle,
centre
BC
OB,
meet
AD,
AB, CD meet
and OC,
:
the lines
OA,
OE
OF
prove that the angles between are equal ; and deduce that OA, OC
at
F;
an involution of which the isotropic lines hence deduce, by projection. Theorem 189.
XL]
99.
315
project
hence deduce Theorem 189 from the theorem that the orthocentre of a triangle circumscribing a parabola lies on the directrix.
100.
system of conies touch three fixed lines and have a given prove that they touch a fourth fixed line.
;
are the opposite vertices of a quadrilateral A, A' B, B' C, T is any point on a conic through AA'BB' CC meets this conic aX P, Q; prove that TP, TQ are the tangents to the two conies which can be inscribed in the quadrilateral and pass through T.
;
102.
vertices of a quadrilateral to
Prove that the feet of the perpendiculars from the six any straight line form an involution
range.
B, B' are two pairs of opposite vertices of the quadrilateral 103. A, A' formed by the four common tangents of two conies which cut orthogonally
;
at
a point
104.
prove that
APB = A'PB'.
HK
is
PR,
QS
meet
a chord of a conic inscribed in the quadrilateral PQRS ; meet the curve again at H', K' prove at O ; OH,
OK
PQRS
to touch
HK',
HK.
4>
and four fixed lines Given a point O, a conic through 4j 4> h construct, with the use of a ruler only, the tangents from a given point on /j to the two conies which pass through O and
;
touch
106.
/i,
I2,
4,
l^.
Four circles have one common point axes form an involution pencil.
,
to a conic, foci S, are the tangents from a point are equal or supplementary. prove that the angles 577',
107.
TP,
TQ
H;
HTQ
108. 109.
are the
centres
S^;
;
PHi, PK^ and PH^, PK,^ are the tangents from any point P to S^, S^ prove that PO, PO' PH^, PKx PH^, PK^ form an involution pencil.
; ;
TP is a fixed triangle circumscribing a given conic 5 a tangent from a variable point T to 5 if T{ABCP) is constant, prove that the locus of 7" is a straight line.
110.
ABC
is
111.
ABC
BC
A
is
meets
at Z*
the polar of A a triangle circumscribing a conic a tangent at any point Q of the conic meets the
;
;
other tangent
from
D
;
in
T; prove
that
T{BC
QA}
is
harmonic.
112.
ABC,
touches
BC
.a
at
a fixed point
of the
H,
BC
locus
3i6
113.
PLANE GEOMETRY
P is any point
PB,
on a conic inscribed in the quadrilateral meet AC m T, Q, R prove that
[CH.
A BCD
the tangent at P,
PD
AT^_ AQ.AR
Cr^
114.
CQ.CR'
The
;
points
line.
poles of two fixed hnes w.r.t. a variable conic are fixed prove that the locus of the centre of the conic is a straight
115.
A variable
conic
is
ABA'B'
E,
E,
prove that the other tangents from to the conic meet on a fixed line through A'.
AB, AB'
THEOREM
If a variable
a fixed point
point
chord PP' of a conic subtends a right angle at on the conic, then it passes through a fixed situated on the normal at V.
Let
Since
QQ, RR', SS', ... be other positions of the chord. PVP' ^go" = QVQ' = RVR' = ..., the line-pairs VP,
VR, VR'
;
VP'
VQ,
.'.
f^Q'l
...
form an involution;
;
R, R'
...
PP', QQ', RR',...a.re concurrent by Theorem 184. A is the normal VX at V, since VVX= 90
PP'
F on
the normal at
V.
Q.E.D.
Definition.
If a
variable
right
angle at a
fixed
point
through which
V.
XI.]
317
116.
is
Fregier point of
117.
is
at infinity. A
QR
is.
normal at a point
118.
P on
QPR = 90.
w.r.t.
V.
119. P, Q are variable points on a fixed tangent to a conic, and subtend a right angle at a fixed point find the locus of the meet of the other tangents from P, Q to the conic.
;
120.
that
VF
the Fregier point of a point V on a parabola prove bisected by the axis of the parabola. [Consider, in the chord PP" when P' is at infinity.]
is
;
is
If
F is the Fregier point of a point V on a central conic. ACA', BCB' are the principal axes, prove that GA, CB are the
VCF.
[In Fig. 151, take
bisectors of
122.
If
VP
parallel to
BC]
at
infinity),
123.
On
PQ
of
circle is described,
normals at
124.
are parallel to
PQ.
and
their
is
F on
a given parabola
if
V
;
prove that
F^,
126.
V^ on a conic
prove that the axes of the conic are parallel to the bisectors of the
angles between the lines V1V2, F-^F^.
the Fregier point of a point V on a given central conic prove that F traces out a concentric homothetic conic. Is there any exceptional case?
127.
is
if
V varies,
and normal of
axis at
N, G, and
is
-^
is
constant.]
128. If a chord of a parabola subtends a right angle at the vertex A \s equal to the latus rectum. and meets the axis at F, prove that
AF
;
129.
F oi V
is
fixed
circle.
Prove that
circles,
parallel
chords of a
3i8
131.
PLANE GEOMETRY A
2
normal at a point
is
[CH.
on
a.
G,
^i
a point on
PG
such that
D75="Dr- +
11 p~
chord through
132.
A
<T
;
a point
C,
becomes a
conic
w.r.t.
prove that
S becomes
C
is
<r.
133.
PQ,
on
PS
Diy
them
prove that a
common
tangent of the
PQ and PS as
Theorem
fact,
D and Z^.
Desargues'
an interesting
Desargues.
Let
Join
12,
45 meet at
and
it
34, 61 at JV.
A'.
meet the conic at A, meet 14 at F, take a point F' on point-pairs Z, N; A, A' ; F, F' form an involution.
to
JV and produce
Let
LN
LN so
that
the
By
it
follows that
F' F'
lies
on
23.
By
it
follows that
on 56
.'.
23,
56 meet at P'
:.
the meets of 12, 45; 23, 56; 34, 61 are collinear. Q.E.D.
XL]
319
THEOREM
To
touch two given
lines.
197.
Fig. 153.
Let A, B,
It is
OK the
E; and
given lines.
the conic
K dX which
at
touches
Let
OK at
P^, P^ and
ffK
let
BC
cut
OH, OK at (2i, (22 and HK at F. By Theorem 188, " is a double point of the involution determined
\3iy
A,
is
C
The
P which
meets Off,
OK at the
required points
H, K,
Hence we can
ditions.
134.
Construct a conic to pass through three given points and have Construct a conic to pass through two given points and touch
320
136.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
a given conic.
137.
it
and a pair of
points
conjugate
138.
given focus.
THEOEEM
(i)
198.
common
points A, B, C,
;
D of
is
a rectangular hyperbola
and
the
ABC.
ABC,
it
passes through
its
orthocentre.
(i)
Let
(i>,
(D,
<u'
infinity.
Then
.".
w' are
hyperbolas through A, B, C, D.
by Theorem 190
every such conic
(i),
w,
oj'
w.r.t.
every
conic through A, B, C,
.
D.
is
a rectangular hyperbola.
;
q.e.d.
But
..
AB,
Z*
is
CD
AC,
BD
AD,
BC are
A
..
(2)
ABC.
q.e.d.
BC
Then
pair
.
.
AB
Z*
is
is
perpendicular to
CD;
the orthocentre of
ABC;
lies
the orthocentre of
ABC
in a joint
139.
This theorem was published in 1821 by Brianchon and Poncelet memoir. It is capable of a very simple analytical proof.
PQR
is
angular hyperbola
to QR.
140. PQ is a chord of a rectangular hyperbola the circle on PQ as diameter cuts the curve again at R, S prove that RS is a diameter of the hyperbola. [Use Ex. 139.]
; ;
XL]
141.
321
viz.
Theorem
198,
Steiner's
theorem,
lies
on the
142.
inscribed in
circle
a self-conjugate triangle w.r.t. a conic S-^ a conic S^, touches a directrix of S-^ prove that the director of ^3 passes through a focus of S-^.
is
;
PQR
PQR,
143.
in
a rect-
angular hyperbola
144. If the normal at a point P on a rectangular hyperbola meets the curve again at Q, prove that the radius of curvature at P equals JPQ. [Apply Theorem 23, Part I., to the triangle formed by P and two points adjacent to it on the curve.] 145.
find
the
of the
poles
of
the
sides
of
the
triangle
w.r.t.
the
hyperbola.
146. If the normal at a point P on a rectangular hyperbola, centre C, meets the curve again at Q, and if R is the mid-point of PQ, prove
that
RCP=<)o.
147.
A
;
variable equilateral
find the locus of
is
triangle
is
inscribed
in
rectangular
hyperbola
148.
its
centroid.
in
ABCD
;
a rectangular
hyperbola
point
PH, PK, PL, PM are the on the curve to AB, BC, CD,
DA
prove that
PH.PL = PK.PM.
149.
The mid-points
;
move on
rectangular hyperbola
circumcentre.
150. Prove that a system of conies, through four fixed points, can be projected into a system of rectangular hyperbolas. 151.
HK
;
is
direction
PP
a variable chord of a rectangular hyperbola, fixed in find the locus is the diameter perpendicular to
HK
of the
152.
meet of
HP, KP'C,
Two
system
prove
CD
by
cut orthogonally.
definition,
of confocal
a range of
conies;
Theorem 189
confocal system.
322
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOBEM
(i)
199.
point
T,
S,
TX,
to the
TP,
TQ
T to
and
TX,
TY are
is
conjugate lines
The
a system of
line.
confocal conies
(i) Let S,
H;
;
S',
H' be
;
and
w, ul
Then
of
S,
S, H'
<a,
w are the
pairs
of opposite vertices of
the
confocal
quadrilateral
circumscribing
each
conic
system.
TY
Tm,
TH;
to
Tfo'.
TX
at
T
.-.
and
similarly a
system to touch
Since
TX,
lines,
T{XY;
is
harmonic;
X7'F=90;
..
T
are
q.e.d.
(2)
By Theorem
189,
TF,
TQ
involution.
Since the double lines are at right angles, they are the bisectors
of the angles between each line-pair of the pencil.
.-. TX, TY are the and TF, TQ.
between TS,
TH
q.e.d.
(3) Since
TX,
tangents from
w.r.t.
TY are harmonically conjugate to each pair of T to the system of conies, they are conjugate lines
q.e.d.
each conic.
(4)
TX
at
T.
Let
TY be
the tangent at
T to
XI.]
323
Then by
But by
system
.-.
(3),
TX TY
is
perpendicular to
TY.
w.r.t.
is
conjugate to
TX
w.r.t.
TX
.199,
the system
is
dicular line
153.
TY.
from Theorem
Deduce,
parabola.
154.
From a point
A on
;
to a confocal conic S2
a conic Sj, tangents AB, AC are drawn prove that AB, AC are eaually inclined to
to
the tangent at
155.
Y,
ellipse to
to
YZ
S,
are the feet of the perpendiculars from a focus 5 of an two tangents TY, TZ prove that the perpendicular from passes through the other focus.
;
157.
H are
;
is
through
158.
is
meet on
HT.
Construct the centre of a conic which has a given focus and inscribed in a given triangle.
159.
ABCD
its
is
a given parallelogram
AB,
BC
is
and
on
AD, DC;
centre
a straight
160.
ABCD
parallelogram
ABS,
ADS
is a fixed parallelogram circumscribing prove that the locus of the foci of tr is a hyperbola through A, B, C, D.
ABCD
;
variable
conic
(T
rectangular
162.
One
;
is
at the ortho-
centre
163.
in
variable conic
;
is
circle
if
one focus
circle.
lies
on the
circle,
also lies
164.
on the
is
PQ
a diameter of a conic
is
PR, Qli make equal angles with the tangent the pole of PR lies on the director circle.
that
of a triangle ABC, inscribed in a 165. The sides BC, CA, prove that the conic Si, tonch a confocal conic S2 at P, Q, escribed circles of ABC touch the sides at P, Q, R. [Let the tanand prove that X, gents at A, B, C to 5i form the triangle Y, are the excentres and use Theorem 199 (4).]
AB
XYZ
324
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
The
a fixed quadrangle,
is
200.
a conic circumscribing the common selfconjugate triangle of the pencil, and passing through the mid-points of the six sides of the quadrangle, and having its asymptotes parallel to the axes of the two parabolas of the pencil.
192, take / as the line at infinity.] Another method of proving Theorem 200 is suggested in Ex. 91,
left to
the reader.
Chapter IX.
Prove Theorem 200. Prove that the centre of a rectangular hyperbola circumscribing a given triangle lies on the nine-point circle of the triangle.
166. 167.
168.
fixed
;
line
at
find
the locus
centre.
169.
is
its
A, B,
170.
ABC is a triangle inscribed in a rectangular hyperbola, centre HO meets the hyperbola at D prove that orthocentre page 43, Ex. 9.] Use Part C, D are concyclic.
;
I,
conies of a four-point pencil have parallel axes, prove that all the conies have parallel axes, and that one of them is a
If
two
circle.
171.
Prove
that
the
lines
joining
point
to
the
vertices
of a
vertices
which
as
lie
172.
fixed points
is
conjugate points
and has two pairs of prove that the locus of its centre
all
a conic.
173.
The
w.r.t.
conic
a-
is
conies of a pencil
is
any point on
o-
if its
A
;
is fixed,
the locus of the centres of all conies circumscribing the quadrangle ABCD prove that the centre of or is the mean centre of the points A, B, C, D.
175.
is
The conic
176.
lies
A
A
prove that
its
centre
on one of two
177.
prove that
the locus of
centre
is
a rectangular hyperbola.
XI.]
325
178. ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral two parabolas which pass through A, B, at the centroid of A, B, C, D. 179.
C,
ABD, BCD
Prove that the nine-point circles of the triangles have one common point.
ABC, ACD,
180. Construct the centre of a rectangular hyperbola which passes through two fixed points and touches a given line at a given point. 181.
C,
prove that P, Q are conjugate points w.r.t. the elevenpoint conic of the pencil through A, B, C, corresponding to the line /.
in P,
;
A given Q
line /
182. A, B, C, D are four points on a hyperbola prove that the asymptotes of the hyperbola are parallel to a pair of conjugate diameters of the centre-locus of all conies through A, B, C, D.
;
points
is the locus of the centres of all conies through four fixed prove that the asymptotes of any one of the conies meet cr at the ends of a diameter.
183.
cr
184.
A, B,
C,
conies through A, B,
D
185.
are collinear
Five quadrangles are formed from five points, no three of which prove that the five conies which pass through the mid:
common
:
point.
circle
is
PQ
is
any
through
P,
Q
187.
prove that
RS
a diameter
of the circle.
Two
chords
;
angles at
E
CD
AB, CD of a rectangular hyperbola meet at right and the mid-points of prove that the circle through
AB and
188.
a variable
a rectangular hyperbola.
;
is
A circle meets a rectangular hyperbola at P, Q, B, S if PP' a diameter of the hyperbola, prove that P' is the orthocentre of QES.
189.
190. The conic o- is the locus of the poles of a fixed line / w.r.t. a P, Q are the system of conies through four fixed points A, B, C, meets of / with n- ; prove that cr touches each of the four conies which pass through P, Q and touch AB, BC, CA, and that cr touches twelve other conies formed in a similar way.
191.
ABC;
192.
prove that
rectangular hyperbola circumscribes an equilateral triangle its centre lies on the ineircle of ABC.
incentre
Prove that the locus of the centre of a conic, passing through the and excentres of a triangle, is the circumeircle of the triangle.
326
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH
THEOREM
(i)
The
three circles,
inscribed in
whose diameters are the joins of opposite and the director circles of the quadrilateral, belong to the same coaxal
conies inscribed in a given quadrilateral
system.
(2)
lie
The
centres of
all
on a
line,
(i)
Let A, A'
the quadrilateral.
at
be the pairs of opposite vertices of B, B' ; C, Let the circles on AA', BB' as diameters meet
be the tangents from
H, K.
Let
PH, HP'
to
any conic
.S
inscribed
in the quadrilateral.
HB, HB'
A
HC,
HC
HP, HP'
form an
But
..
involution
..
[Theorem 173
(2).]
the circle on
CC
on
as diameter passes
through
H;
and the
circle
director circle of
passes through
H.
and the director
CC
as diameter
of
5
.".
pass through K.
the circles on AA', BB',
all
CC
and the
q.e.d.
director circles of
the
XL]
(2) ..
327
the centres of all the director circles lie on a line which passes through the mid-points of AA', BE, CC. But the centre of a conic coincides with the centre of its director
circle.
..
the
centres
of
all
conies inscribed in
the quadrilateral
q.e.d.
lie
on
this line.
(i)
(2)
it
is
page 120.
the reciprocal of
Theorem 201
show.
is
Theorem
by reciprocating
conies.
194.
195.
in Fig.
circle of each of two conies, prove, H, that it lies on the director circle of every conic touching the four common tangents of the two given
193.
If
lies
on the director
w.r.t.
Deduce Theorem
Theorem
191
(2).
What
154?
C,
C coincidt,
196. If a system of conies touch four fixed lines, prove that the radical axis of their director circles is the directrix of the parabola
ABC
touches
BC
at >
if
conic
198.
lies
on A'D.
A,
is
circle
through
A,
quadrilateral.
199.
A A
if its
axis
is
fixed
a fixed
line.
200.
circle
if its director variable conic is inscribed in a given triangle pass through one fixed point, prove that it must pass through
;
By
taking, in
line at infinity,
Theorem 201, one side of the quadrilateral as the prove that the orthocentre of a triangle circumscribing
directrix.
a parabola
202.
lies
on the
Prove
that, in general,
one and only one conic can be drawn its centre on a given line.
to
328
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
203. Prove that the lines bisecting the joins of opposite vertices of each of the five quadrilaterals formed by five straight lines are concurrent.
204.
If a
parabola
is
quadrilateral
ABCD,
lines,
prove that
205.
AC,
its
BD
meet on
directrix.
prove that
are the fixed points and P, 206. If in Ex. 205 A, of the fixed focus in the fixed lines, prove that P, Q
Q
lie
the reflections
on AB.
207. Prove that the circumcircle of a triangle self-conjugate w.r.t. a conic is orthogonal to the director circle of the conic. 208.
is
circumcircles of
209.
ABCD
is
prove that
AC,
BD
is
focus
Four conies circumscribe the triangle ABC and have a common prove that the director circle of any conic, touching the four corresponding directrices, passes through D.
210.
211.
Prove that any two tangents to a central conic and the four
Show how
to
213.
ABCD is a quadrangle
P, P'
Q,
Q
all
R,
by the tangents
conies
A, B, C, D. If the conic o- is the locus of the centres of through A, B, C, D, prove that the join of the mid-points of
is
PP,
a tangent to
214.
cr.
parabola
is
drawn
;
common
is
tangents of two
rectangular hyperbolas
prove that
directrix
the perpendicular
Given a triangle
ABC
ellipse
inscribed
216.
is
PQ
of a parabola
halfway between
T and
the polar of
w.r.t.
the circle on
217.
PQ
as diameter.
circles of
any transversal
in
AB,
AC
ai fixed points
B,
prove that
is
of which y4
a limiting point.
XI.]
329
219.
line triangle of
quadrilateral cuts the line, passing through the mid-points of the joins
THEOREM
E, F, G,
a conic,
202.
to
C M, N are the feet of the perpendiculars CA from the pole J" of EFto the axes ACA', BCB if GH CB at M\ JV, then M'C= CM and N'C= CN.
centre
; ;
cu'vs.
Fig. 155.
Let
EF meet CA
at
M".
By Theorem
to
CA, CB.
Now
through
the
transversal
AA'
is
involution
by
all
conies
EFGH;
C, CO
.
and
M',
M"
A, A'
.-. .-.
C
is
is
But, since
EF,
.-.
TM
is
the polar of
M",
and [AA'
MM"}
harmonic.
.-.
CM.CM"=CA^;
.-.
CM=-CM';
sixid
.-.
M'C=CM
similarly
ITC^CN.
q.e.d.
33
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
The
circle
a point
to
Fig. 156.
EC meet the conic again at E and CT meet EF at parallel to E'E. Since EV= Fi?" and EC=CE, CVT
Let
is
The
notation
is
the same as in
Theorem
202.
V.
MJV
is
parallel to
M'JV' or GJI.
diagonals
But CT,
.-. ..
MN are
equally inclined to
of a rectangle.
E F, GH are
VL
Ex. 125.]
equally inclined to
CA, an
FGH
E.
[See
Ch.
Q.E.D.
If P, Q, E are the feet of the normals 220. [Harvey's Theorem.] to a parabola from any point, prove that the circumcircle of the triangle PQR passes through the vertex of the parabola.
221. P is a fixed point on a central conic Q is a variable point on the normal at P L, M, N are the feet of the other normals from Q to the conic prove that the sides of the triangle envelope a
;
;
LMN
parabola.
222.
P, Q, R,
;
to a conic
if
FQ
RS
touches
fixed conic.
223.
PQ
is
prove that
the normals at
and
meet on a
fixed line.
XI.]
331
224.
meet on a fixed normal / of the conic prove that PQ, envelopes a parabola, whose directrix passes through C and whose
conic, centre C,
focus
is
dicular to
225.
and the
The normals at the points -P, Q, P, S on a conic are concurrent, circles QPS, PSP, SPQ, PQR meet the conic again at/, q, r, s
;
respectively
g,
r,
s are concurrent.
226.
EFG
is
;
ABCD
is
any point
GP3
EP,
FP,
GP
w.r.t.
;
respectively
227.
the sides of the quadrangle which meet at E, F, prove that EP^, FP2, GP3 are concurrent.
G
;
A variable conic, centre P, passes through four fixed points a point on the conic, the tangent at which has a fixed direction prove that PQ passes through a fixed point.
(2 is
228.
parallel to
at V,
ABC is a triangle inscribed in a conic PQ, PR are two chords CB, CA PQ meets AB, AC at L, U PR meets BC, BA M; prove that ^=^- [Prove that {LUQ^} = \RVM ^}:\
; ;
229.
Two
of any point P,
230.
AB.
Obtain, from
Theorem
288,
CHAPTER
XII.
MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES.
THEOREM
(i)
204.
six
If
vertices
lie
a conic,
their
six
sides
(i)
Let
ABC,
PQR be
cut
<r.
AB, Then
Let
AC
M, N.
.'.
by Theorem
74,
A, R, F, B,
C,
lie
on a
conic,
q.e.d.
CH.XII.]
(2)
[It
MISCELLAN^US PROPERTIES
(i)
333
or by
writing
at
full
length
dual
of the
method of
(i)
or
by a "reductio ad
absurdum" method.]
THEOREM
The
205.
circumcircle of a triangle, formed by three tangents to a parabola, passes through the focus of the parabola.
Let be the triangle formed by the three tangents let 5 be the focus of the parabola, and <o, <o' the circular points at infinity.
:
ABC
Then
the triangles
ABC,
(i).
A, B, C,
C,
S,
w,
w' lie
on a conic;
q.e.d.
A, B,
lie
on a
circle.
THEOREM
If
206.
in
.A
Let
o-
ABC
is
and
at P,
and
let
to
cr
meet
at J?.
By Theorem 204
(i),
A, B^
C, P,
Q,
P
P,
lie
on a
five
conic.
Now
[Th.
..
through
given points
147].
since
S
is
passes through A, B,
C,
Q,
it
must
also
pass
:hrough
.".
P;
inscribed in
PQP
2 and circumscribed
to cr;
q.e.d.
334
1. 2.
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
Prove Theorem 204 (2) by the dual method. Prove Theorem 204(2) by the "reductio ad absurdum" method.
3.
lies
The
on the curve
in-centre of a triangle inscribed in a rectangular hyperbola prove that the in-circle passes through the centre ;
of the hyperbola.
4. Ti, T2 axe the poles of two chords PiQi, P2Q2 of a conic prove that the six points Ti, Pi, Qi, T2, Pa, Q.- lie on a conic. 5.
prove variable parabola has a fixed self-conjugate triangle its focus is the nine-point circle of the triangle.
;
a.
drawn
so
ABCD
on PQ.
r^,
parabola inscribed in
7.
ABCD
s^,
lies
If
two
is is
circles
s^
radii
r^
centres A^,
A^
are such
and circumscribed
w.r.t. Jj
.
to S2, prove
that
8.
- ir^r^
A^
a triangle circumscribing a conic, focus are concyclic, prove that the conic is a parabola.
PQR
UP,
Q, P,
9. i^ is a focus of an ellipse 5, ; ^j is a circle, centre F, of radius equal to the major axis prove that an unlimited number of triangles
;
triangle inscribed in S2
With the notation of Ex. 9, prove that the orthocentre of every and circumscribed to S^ is at the second focus
of ij.
11. If two conies are such that one quadrilateral can be inscribed in one and circumscribed to the other, prove that an unlimited
number of such
inscribed in
>!,
quadrilaterals
exist.
[If
quadrilateral
ABCD
is
cr-^
and circumscribed to Sj, project 2i into a circle having projection of meet of A C, BD as centre and note that ctj
:
is
directo
12. If ABCD is a variable quadrilateral inscribed in one fixed conic and circumscribed about another fixed conic, prove that AC, BD meet at a fixed point.
13. A variable parabola has a fixed focus and touches a fixed line / prove that the locus of the point of contact of the other tangent from a fixed point on / is a circle.
14.
that
15.
of a parabola, focus
T, P, S.
prove
T
;
is
PQ
of a parabola
is
the mid-point
of
PQ
a hyperbola
drawn through P, Q,
XII.]
MISCELLANliOUS PROPERTIES
to
335
parallel
TR
S
if
it
at 5,
tangent at
to the parabola
a 17. T is the pole of a chord PQ of a. hyperbola 5i, centre C hyperbola S^ is drawn through T, P, Q with asymptotes parallel to those prove that S.^ passes through C and that its centre lies on CT. of 5i
;
18.
at
Find the locus of the focus of a parabola touching a given a given point and a second fixed line.
line
19.
A
T
conic
is
inscribed in a triangle
;
circumcentre of
ABC
and passes through the prove that the circumcircle touches the director
ABC
20.
is
PQ
of a parabola, focus
\s
the
circumcentre of
TPQ;
THEOREM
If
207.
w.r.t.
and
on a
conic.
Fig. 159.
Let
in
ABC,
Let PQ,
PQR be two triangles, self-conjugate w.r.t. a conic. PR meet BC in Q, R and AB, AC meet QR
the meet of
is
B, C.
Now
.-.
(2'
is
poles are R,
AR
and
is
AQ.
{BQ'R'C}=A{CRQB},
= {C'RQB'} = {B'QRC}
.-.
BB\ QQ,
;
RR',
CC
BC,
BC,
Q.e.d.
by
Th. 75
.-.
the sides of
ABC,
204,
PQR
the
.-.by Theorem
conic.
vertices
ABC,
PQR
lie
on a
Q.E.D.
336
PLANE GEOMETRY
CH.
THEOREM
conic
w.r.t.
208.
same
Fig. i6o.
Let
ABC, PQR be
QJi
Project
to infinity
and
P into
ABC.
[Theorem
of the
new
figure
by small
The
its
conic
o-
is
a rectangular hyperbola,
[Th. 198.]
at infinity
.-.
on
tr;
A gpr=<jd';
w.r.t.
.'.
pqr
o-j
is
a self-conjugate triangle
circle w.r.t.
o-j is
any
circle,
is is
centre /.
self-conjugate.
Let
be the
Then
w.r.t.
the centre of
at
/ and
:
therefore
pqr
o-j
self-conjugate
(Tj.
Hence
.'.
abc and
pqr
there
exists
a conic 2j
w.r.t.
which
ABC
If
and
PQR
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
two
triangles
circumscribe the
same
conic,
there
exists
conic
which both triangles are self-conjugate. This follows at once from Theorem 204.
w.r.t.
25,
26.
xil.]
MISCELLAN^US PROPERTIES
THEOREM
209.
337
If in
S-^,
5j,
is
self-conjugate to S^,
Let
ABC
let
S-^,
which
^'2
is
self-
conjugate to S2-
on 5j
let
the polar of
w.r.t.
cut 5j
Q;
conjugate to
PQ
w.r.t.
S^ cut the
polar of I' at
a conic.
five points
lie
on
5j.
J? lies
on S^
is
.".
PQP
inscribed in
S-^
and
self-conjugate to S2;
triangles exist.
..
q.e.d.
THEOREM
If
210.
two conies S^, S^ are such that one triangle can be circumscribed about S-^, which is self-conjugate w.r.t. S2, then an unhmited
number of such
triangles exist.
left to
The proof
Definitions.
(i)
is
the reader.
The
conic ^^
if
is
therefore
an
unlimited
(2)
number
if 'Si is
of triangles), self-conjugate
is
w.r.t.
S^.
The
conic S^
conic ^21
number of
338
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
If a conic S^
is
211.
S^
is
harmonically inscribed to
Fig. 162,
I'QjR
is
w.r.t.
^j.
Let
.S
be
conic
w.r.t.
which
5,
S^
and
^2
^^^
reciprocal.
[Theorem in.]
Reciprocate the figure
the
w.r.t.
and consider,
in
one system,
and the old figure. Then, S-^ becoming ^Sg, and S2 becoming S-^, triangle pqr circumscribing ^2 ^"d self-conjugate
figure
.".
new
PQR
to
S-^
becomes a
q.e.d.
^'2
is
THEOREM
If
212.
PQR
is
of
PQR
of 5.
Let
u),
&)'
infinity.
<t;
Now
.'.
by hypothesis,
is
is
harmonically inscribed in
o-
But
This
C(u(o'
a self-conjugate triangle
w.r.t.
and two of
q.e.d.
its
on
o-
lies
on
cr.
[Th. 215.]
xil.]
MISCELLAEOUS PROPERTIES
339
THEOREM
If triangles
213.
can be inscribed in a conic 5j and circumscribed to a conic S^, prove that all such triangles are self-conjugate to
a conic
w.r.t.
reciprocal.
Let
Let A^-^C\, A,fiC^ be two of the triangles. S be the conic w.r.t. which both triangles are self-conjugate.
208.]
w.r.t.
[Theorem
5.
w.r.t. 5, reciprocate
Then
..
A-^B-^C-^,
into themselves
S-y
A-yB^Cy, A^B^C^,
.-.
into
^'2
.S is
a conic
Let Let
BC B
cut
reciprocal.
on 5^;
be one meet oi
BC touches BC and
S-^.
^2.
Then
let it
the polar of
w.r.t.
S
Cj,
BC
2i\.
C.
Now
.'.
the triangles
A^ B^
ABC
S;
^j.
Similarly
.-.
AB
touches ^2;
ABC
is
all triangles
self-
conjugate
w.r.t.
Q.E.D.
340
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
Corollary.
If a triangle
ABC
and
is
inscribed in a conic ^j
and circumscribed
to a conic ^2,
if
PQR
is
the
common
self-conjugate triangle
of S^ and
S.^,
ABC,
Cor.
PQR
lie
on a conic.
\PQR
21.
22. 23.
is
self-conjugate w.r.t. S,
Theorem
in
the
conic
must be a
w.r.t.
a rectangular hyperbola,
circle.
on a
ABC
:
is
a given triangle,
is
a given point,
QR
is
a given line
which ABC is self-conjugate, and such that P is the pole of QR w.r.t. 2 and that 2 may be constructed BC meets QR, AP at Q, Q! E, are the double points as follows of the involution B, C Q, meets QR zx R; is the harmonic
prove that there exists a conic
w.r.t.
conjugate of
Q PE
;
w.r.t.
P, R.
Then 2
is
AF at
E, F.
207.
ABC,
DEF
w.r.t.
is
a conic
5
line
;
of the meet of
AD,
BE
a Pascal
whose vertices, in some order, are A, B, C, D, E, F hence prove that the three Pascal lines through the meets of (i) BC, EF; AC, and (2) AC, AB, and (3) AB, BC, DE
DP
DE
is
EF
DF
are concurrent.
28.
lie
The
S-^
at
A, B,
conic.
C and
its
vertices
on a conic 52
if
PQJi
the
Q,
common
self-conjugate triangle of
A, B,
C, P,
lie
on a
[Use Th.
213.]
;
PQR
is
a triangle self-conjugate
w.r.t.
a conic, centre
prove
are parallel
is
through
inscribed in S2.
31.
CP,
S-i
CD
hyperbola through
that
is
with
its
CD
53 is a prove
XII.]
MISCELLAlEOUS PROPERTIES
341
32.
AB
The
is
as
directrix
and
its
AB
is
centre of a circle
is
6'i
lies
on a rectangular hyperbola ^2
S.^.
prove that S^
34.
harmonically inscribed to
parabola,
35.
circle, whose centre lies on the directrix of a harmonically circumscribed to the parabola.
is
S-^,
centre
C\ ^2
is
is
OC
^3
is
and
directrix
is
the tangent at
\a S-^;
related
that
triangles
can be inscribed
self-
Any circle through the focus of a parabola circumscribes triangles which the parabola is inscribed.
Any
The
circle
37.
is
orthocentre
oi
;
a.
triangle
ABC
inscribed in a conic
on the director circle of S prove that the polar of the circle w.r.t. which ABC is self-conjugate.
39.
w.r.t.
5 S touches
to
The
;
conic
if
S-^
is
inscribed in a triangle
its
self-conjugate
S^,,
the
conic S2
prove
that the joins of the other points of contact also touch 5240.
PQ
is
the pole of
41.
PQ
a chord of a rectangular hyperbola, centre C prove that lies on the circle through C, which touches PQ at P.
;
triangle w.r.t.
ABC
harmonically.
42.
(Ta;
if
The
o"!
focus
is
5 of a conic a-^ lies on the director circle of a conic harmonically inscribed to o-j, prove that 0-1 touches the
o-j.
polar of
w.r.t
342
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
The circumcircle of a triangle, self-conjugate orthogonal to the director circle of the conic.
C
a conic,
is
Fig. 164.
Let
PQR
PQR
as
B,
quadrilateral.
{AA'
PR), [BB'
circles,
BE, CC,
the circle
.-.
PQR.
circle
the
PQR
is
Theorem
201,
is
orthogonal to the
Q e.d. was discovered independently, eight years later, by a Frenchman, M. Faure, in i860. For another method of
This theorem
proof, see
43.
page 349.
Prove that the circumcentre of a triangle, self-conjugate to a parabola, lies on the directrix.
44. Prove that the circumcircle of a triangle, self-conjugate to a rectangular hyperbola, passes through the centre of the hyperbola.
XII.]
MISCELLANBOUS PROPERTIES
343
45. If two circles are harmonically circumscribed to a conic, prove that their radical axis passes through the centre of the conic. 46.
H
5
is
a given conic
AH meets BC
ABC,
is
circumscribing
constant, prove
H
;
at Z>
if
HA .HD
S,
\&
circle.
a focus of a conic
is
rectangular hyperbola
drawn through
it
conjugate triangle
48.
prove that
inscribed in
Two
The
have
and
are
each
AB
touches S.
49.
is
w.r.t.
a given conic,
of fixed size
50.
its
centre.
Two
lie
and
their
six
vertices
on a conic
conies
w.r.t.
which
Two
i^i,
^2 have a ^3
;
common
focus 5,
and each
is
harmoni-
cally
inscribed to a conic
i'l,
common
\s
tangents of
52.
^2
lies
on the polar of
w.r.t.
S^.
P
A
is
PT
the
tangent from
53.
parabola
of
hyperbola is harmonically circumscribed to a prove that the axis of the parabola is parallel to the polar the focus of the parabola w.r.t. the hyperbola.
rectangular
;
54.
if
PQR is a
is
w.r.t.
a given parabola
fixed,
PQR
215.
system.
THEOREM
The
polar
circle
6'
of a
triangle
o-.
circumscribing a conic
n-
is
By
."
hypothesis,
cr
is
harmonically inscribed in S.
6' is
by Theorem 211,
harmonically circumscribed to
cr.
";
i.e.
cr.
THEOREM
The
the
directrix.
on
The
is,
344
to
PLANE GEOMETRY
the
directrix
is
[CH.
of the parabola,
since
the
director
circle
of a
parabola
..
the
centre
of the
triangle
lies
on the
directrix
i.e.
lies
on the
directrix.
Q.E.D.
55.
Deduce
Steiner's
side
216,
by
reciprocation.
;
find
b'^
is
a minimum.
58. If a triangle is self-conjugate w.r.t. a rectangular hyperbola, prove that its incentre and ezcentres lie on the curve.
59.
of
PT, QT are tangents to a parabola; P is the point of contact PT PQ is drawn perpendicular to TQ and meets the directrix at
;
prove that
DTP=go.
60.
The
vertices of
;
on a conic
two triangles, having a common orthocentre, prove that they have the same polar circle.
lie
62. A conic is inscribed in a triangle, self-conjugate w.r.t. a rectangular hyperbola, and has one focus at the centre of the hyperbola prove that it must be a parabola. 63. G is the centroid of a triangle circumscribing a parabola prove that the polar of G w.r.t. the parabola touches the conic which passes through A, B, C, and has its centre at G. 64.
ABC
The
triangle
its
circumscribing a
lies
conic
passes
through a focus
conic.
prove that
orthocentre
on a
directrix of the
A variable conic o- circumscribes a fixed triangle and is harmonicircumscribed to a fixed conic 2 if the fixed triangle is not self-conjugate w.r.t. 2, prove that o- passes through another fixed point.
66.
cally
67.
is
A variable
if its
orthocentre
fixed,
prove that
polar circle
is
also fixed.
68.
69. variable conic is inscribed in a fixed triangle ; if the sum of the squares of its axes is constant, find the locus of its centre.
XII.]
MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES
345
Two circles Sj, S2 are harmonically circumscribed to a conic prove that any circle coaxal with Sj, S2 is harmonically circumscribed to 0-. Generalise this theorem.
70.
<t;
71. Two circles S^, S^ are harmonically circumscribed to a conic prove that the limiting points of the coaxal system, defined by S-^,
lie
cr
S^,.
on the director
72.
circle of
cr.
B, CF
lies
ABC EF meets EC
;
2X
in
ABC. and
touching
EF,
73.
on
AH.
Find the locus of the circumcentre of the triangle formed by two fixed tangents, and one variable tangent of a parabola.
74.
(Ti
is
a parabola harmonically inscribed to a hyperbola <t^ are conjugate lines w.r.t. a^.
lines
;
o-g
prove
director circles
THEOREM
Pairs of points P,
joins
217.
P'
Q,
Q
;
of opposite vertices
AA'
BB'
CC
lie
of
a quadrilateral
conic.
on a
+c
?,-
Q.--
346
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
If
points
two pairs of opposite vertices of a quadrilateral are conjugate w.r.t. a conic 2, then the third pair of opposite vertices
w.r.t.
2. 2.
A, A' and B, B' be conjugate w.r.t. Let 2 cut AA'; BB' ; at P, ; R, R' Q, ;
In Fig. 165,
let
CC
By
hypothesis
{AA
QQ'}
are harmonic.
Q',
But only one conic can be drawn through F, F, Q, .". by Theorem 217, {CC ; RR'} is harmonic.
..
R.
C,
q.e.d.
THEOREM
If
219.
lines
two pairs of opposite sides of a quadrangle are conjugate w.r.t. a conic 2, then the third pair of opposite sides are
is
This
THEOREM
220.
If two triangles are conjugate to each other w.r.t. a conic, the meets of corresponding sides are collinear and the joins of corresponding vertices are concurrent.
Fio. 167.
XII.]
MISCELLANE014S PROPERTIES
ABC, A'B'C
2).
347
{i.e.
be conjugate to each other w.r.t. the sides of either are the polars of the vertices
of the other
w.r.t.
Let P, Q,
be the meets of
AB,
A'B'.
Now
.-.
in the quadrilateral
ACPR,
A, P; C,
R
.-.
2;
w.r.t.
2;
is
is
A'C
A'C
lies
on
PR;
.-.
..
also,
concurrent.
into a
circle,
having the
projection of
as centre.
77. In Theorem 220, prove that the meet of AA', BB', the pole of PQR w.r.t. 2.
OC
is
78.
A, A'
;
B, B'
C,
axe.
points on a conic
CC
CC,
AA'
Q,
R,
;
respectively.
PP
BB',
348
PLANE GEOMETRY
[CH.
THEOREM
If
221.
two conies S^, S2 are harmonically circumscribed to a conic 2, determined by S^, S^, is also
B^
Fig. 168.
Let 5i,
S.2
meet
at
A, B, C, D.
w.r.t. 2 cut 3'j at P, P, and S^ at ^, Q, and 2 at E, F, and any other conic ^3 of the pencil at R, R. are self-conjugate triangles w.r.t. 2; By hypothesis, APP', .-. {PP' ; EF], {QQ ; EF] are harmonic;
AQQ
.. E, are the double points of the involution, determined hy P, P; Q, Q. But by Desargues' theorem, R, R' is a point-pair of this
involution.
..
..
[RR"
is
EF)
is
harmonic;
w.r.t.
ARK
^'3
a self-conjugate triangle
2;
q.e.d.
.".
is
harmonically circumscribed to
2.
By
If
taking
S-^,
particular case of
Theorem 221
is
lines
w.r.t.
This
Theorems
218, 219.
THEOREM
If
222.
two conies 5i, S^ are harmonically inscribed to a conic 2, then every conic of the range, determined by S-^, S^, is also
harmonically inscribed to
2.
The
79. 80. 81.
proof
is
left
to the reader.
222.
ABC,
PQR are
in
a conic
drawn circumscribing
ABC
and
PQR
respectively
XII.]
MISCELLANEO^ PROPERTIES
;
349
w.r.t.
contact
which
ABC
and
PQR
are self-conjugate.
82. S^, S2 are two conies with parallel asymptotes, and are each harmonically circumscribed to a conic S^ prove that the common chord of Si, S^ passes through the centre of S^.
;
83.
What
If
is
if
Sj
is
circle
84.
conic S,
85.
two confocal conies are harmonically inscribed prove that S must be a rectangular hyperbola.
parabolas are inscribed in a triangle
in
a third
Two
ABC
if Z? is
AD, BC
are conjugate
86.
w.r.t.
5.
Two
conic S,
87.
conies, which are harmonically circumscribed to a have double contact at A, B; prove that AB touches S.
axes,
TP, TQ are the common tangents of two parabolas with parallel which are each harmonically inscribed to a conic S, centre C prove that the diameter of 5 conjugate to CT is parallel to the axes
;
of the parabolas.
Theorem 221
yields an interesting proof of Gaskin's theorem. Let Si, S2 be two circles harmonically circumscribed to a conic 2. If they meet at A, B, by Theorem 221, and the hne at
AB
conjugate lines
w.r.t. 2.
AB
w.r.t.
2,
i.e.
.'.
to
2
.'.
a certain circle
.'.
centre O.
must
from
on
to
o-.
lines,
point-circles at
are conjugate
at
w.r.t.
2;
are
right
lies
on the
director circle of 2.
.-.
0-
circle of 2.
is
q.e.d.
:
Another method
given in Ex. 88
and
If in the
CB
if
the pole of
at
AB
A,
is
prove that the circle through T, touching harmonically circumscribed to 2, that CT is a tangent
w.r.t.
AB
2,
to this circle
and that
its
length
is
\/CA^+CBK
35
89.
PLANE GEOMETRY
The
director circle of
[CH.
2 meets
a circle
w.r.t.
o-,
harmonically circum-
scribed to 2, at
the polar of
B,
C;
IS
the
mid-point
go"
;
of
2 at /", g and a- at PQ; prove that (i) {BC PQ) is RB .RC=RP^=RA^ (3) RA touches
cuts
; ;
(4)
o-
is
orthogonal to the
director circle of 2.
THEOREM
A
variable conic
is
if its
the
sum
is
of
the squares
circle,
of
its
axes
is
of
centre
whose centre
Fig. 169.
Let Let
ABC
c^
its orthocentre. be the given triangle, and be the constant sum of the squares of the semi-axes
:S'
w.r.t.
which
ABC
is
self-conjugate.
o-.
o-.
Let
By Theorem
circle.
S
oi
\s
<t
director
.-.
the locus of
91.
centre.
circles
and that
lines.
XII.]
MISCELLANE(^S PROPERTIES
351
THEOREM
move on
PQR
touch a conic
^^ then
S^ also confocal to
Sy
Ya'C
FQR
By Theorem
o-.
Produce PP'
QQ,
RR
XYZ.
at P, Q,
it
o-
XYZ
R,
b>r
hexagon
PPQQRR,
follows-
PX, QY,
RZ
X.
are concurrent, at
say.
Produce
produce
QP
is
to .meet
XY 2X
H:
QPYX,
{XY; RIf}
Q{XY; RP}
is
harmonic
PQ
to
By Theorem 199
confocal to Sj,
(2),
ZQX
;
touches a conic
^j,.
XQR = ZQP=XQ_K.
RP) =
.-.
But Q.{XY;
= Q.{XY;
.-.
RK} XQY^^o;
S^,
QY
is
{%
perpendicular to XZ.
confocal to
S-^,
Similarly, since
to
.'.
.-.
the orthocentre
is
XY\ of XYZ;
YZ;
conic, confocal to
PX
perpendicular to
.".
by similar reasoning,
moves on a
Sy
Q.E.D.
352
PLANE GEOMETRY
circumscribes a
[CH.
Corollary.
If a quadrilateral
conic
S,
^i
and
if
three of
its
be the pairs of opposite vertices: B, B' C, be the given vertices: apply Theorem 224. to the and A'B as bases.] circumscribing triangles which have
[Let A, A'
;
;
let
A, A',
AB
92. 93.
to the case of
a polygon circumscribing a
conic.
94.
is
coaxal with
95.
then
BO
a variable triangle ABC AC touch fixed circles touches a circle coaxal with S.
:
that
if
and
if
AB,
are three conies inscribed in a given ciuadrilateral A variable triangle ABC circumscribes Sj; B lies on S2; C lies on S3 prove that the locus of is a conic inscribed in the given
Si, S2, S3
;
quadrilateral.
96. 97.
a variable triangle
ABC is inscribed in
BC.
S^
AB
S^
98.
THEOREM
The
w.r.t.
225.
is
Fig. 171.
circles.
xn-]
MISCELLANi;j)US PROPERTIES
aj,
353
s-^,
Let
ag,
a^,
a^ be the centres
w.r.t.
of the circles
s^,
s^,
/5
:
s^..
and
s^,
M^,
-fsi
S'4
ka^,
ha^,
the circles
Then
^{PiPiPaPii^^iPiPiP&PiSi since the pencils are equiangular,
= constant,
.-.in the original figure, the pencil of polars
ratio.
is
of constant cross
Q.E.D.
Corollary.
The pencil formed by the polars of any point w.r.t. any number of conies of a pencil through four fixed points is homographic with the pencil of polars of any other point H'.
is
100.
B, C,
D
is
prove that the cross ratio of the tangents at equal to the cross ratio of the tangents at B.
to the conies
101. Prove that the range formed by the poles of a line /j w.r.t. a system of conies touching four fixed lines is homographic with the ranges formed by the poles of any other line 4 w.r.t. the conies.
102.
in
the quadrilateral
ABCD
is
prove
that
the
equal to
ABCD
is
a given quadrangle
as
a conic, having
its
ABC
D
its
a point on
director circle.
104.
centre and
a self-conjugate triangle.
105. Find the locus of centres of hyperbolas which pass through two fixed points and have their asymptotes parallel to two fixed lines.
106.
If to
The conic S-^ is harmonically circumscribed to the conic S^. a tangent to ^2 cuts S^ at A, B, prove that the tangents at A, B 5i are conjugate w.r.t. S^The
;
107.
sides
respectively
EF, FD,
D.G. n.
DE
of a triangle touch a conic at D, E, BC, CA, a tangent at any point P on the conic cuts BC, CA, AB, at a, b, c, d, e,f\ prove that {abcP\ = {defP). z
AB
354
108.
PLANE GEOMETRY
Ai, A2, A3, Af are four points
;
[CH. xil.
S^
triangle
prove that formed by the other three as a self-conjugate triangle 5,, 52, 53, 54 are homothetic to each other and to the conic-locus of the centres of all conies through A^, A^, A^, ^4.
109.
conic,
The
is
is
a point on the polar circle of the triangle ABC; prove which is inscribed in ABC, and has one
ABC.
circumscribing a conic
PQ
is
A A',
112.
BE'
a fixed quadrilateral,
whose
directrix
the quadrilateral.
113.
The
Two
inscribed in one
the tangents at
115.
and circumscribed to the other. ACA', BCB' are the and aCa', bCb' of the smaller. Prove that a, b meet on a side of the parallelogram ABA'B.
is inscribed in a fixed circle and circumscribes prove that the locus of its centroid is a straight line. is
variable triangle
;
a fixed parabola
116.
variable ellipse
inscribed in a triangle
ABC
and passes
ABC
prove that
circle of
its
ABC.
Hence
INDEX
The numbers
refer to pages.
Analytical treatment of
cross-ratio, l6.
123,
171,
205, 262,
involution ranges, 262-279. projection, conical, 76-85. projection, orthogonal, 34, 38-9. reciprocation, 199-203. Angle, between lines and planes, 54. imaginary, 8. ApoUonius, 87-8, 123. theorem on normals, 258. Areal coordinates, 82. Aristaeus, 87. Asymptotes, as tangents, loi. of circle, 124.
for hyperbola, 107. Auxiliary circle, 40. Axes of conic, 133-4.
confocal system, 133, 140, 203, 322, SSIconjugate diameters, 42, 101-2. cross-ratio properties, 95-8, 116-7, 259-260. defined, 88. equation, 17, 78, 167-8.
harmonic properties,
history
of, 87.
Boscovich, on continuity,
on director
circle, 257.
4-7.
Brianchon, 147, 171. hexagon theorem, 149, 150. in connection with cross-centre, 243.
theorem,
19.
244.
Camot,
65, 147. triangle theorem, 160. Central properties, 100-109. Centre-locus of pencil of conies, 324. range of conies, 326. Centroid in projection, 36, 48 (ex. 89,
90).
by
trial
and
error, 233-7.
of a conic through 3 points to touch 2 lines, 319. Continuity, Principle of, 2-4. Contours, 60. Coordinates of a line, 199. Cross-axis, 222, 240.
356
PLANE GEOMETRY
H.P., 51. Huygens, 171. Hyperbola defined, 88.
properties of, 107-8.
Cross-centre, 223, 241. Cross-ratio defined, n. linear properties of, 12, 16, 67, 92. conic properties of, 95, 1 16-7, 251-3.
equation
of, 167.
De
De Lahire, 123, 257. Delbalat, 88, 250. Desargues, 6$, 147, 205, 262.
triangle theorem, 70.
Imaginary angle,
line, 3.
8-9.
conic theorems, 98, 298, 300, 318. Descartes, I, 65, 87, 123, 147, 171.
10-2.
Director circle, defined, 256-7. Pliicker's theorem, 326. Gaskin's theorem, 342, 343, 349. Directrix, 133, 136, 257. Double lines, 214-5. Double points, 210-2, 225, 244. Duality, Principle of, 14, 65, 171, 199. Duplication of Cube, 87.
Elevation, 51.
nature
of, 18.
points at, 20, 24. Inversion, 14, 21-3. Involution, centre of, 265, 274-5. conjugate points of, 282. construction of point-pairs, 283. double lines of, 270, 288-9. double points of, 265, 267, 279, 284-5. metrical properties, 280-1.
of,
41 (ex. 37).
orthogonal, 273, 289, 292. pencils, 269, 287. properties of conic, 294-5, 2989. ranges, 263, 274, 277.
Isotropic lines, defined, 10. homographic and involution application of, -214, 273, 289. other properties, 13, 124, 203.
Equiconjugate diameters 49
Euclid, 87, 147.
(ex. 103).
Joachimsthal, 330.
Faure, 342.
Filon, 222-3, 240-1, 260. Foci, 65, 123. defined, 133. properties of, 134-7, 333Fr^gier, 316.
Kepler,
2, 4, 87, 123.
Lam^,
Line,
of of of of
Locus ad quatuor
Gaskin, 257, 327, 342, 349.
Ground
line, 51.
centres of pencil of conies, 324. centres of range of conies, 326. meets of corresponding rays, 116. meets of perpendicular tangents,
119.
Harmonically
Menaechmus,
Mobius,
171.,
87.
Harvey, 330
(ex. 220).
Newton,
172,
nomothetic
ellipses, 40.
INEX
Ordinate, I0I-2. Orthocentre of triangle, circumscribing a parabola, 343. inscribed in a rect. hyperbola, 320.
357
62.
of,
Range of conies,
Pappus, 88, 123, 136, 147, 163, 262.
Parabola, defined, 88. equation of, 168. focus of, 136. properties of, 104-5. triangle circumscribing, 333, 343.
Parallel lines, 20, 31. Pascal, 147-8, 15. 65, 'Si. 242, 318. Pencil of conies, 300, 302, 352. Perspective pencils and ranges, 218-9. 199. angles, 188.
301, 303.
a second given
equation
Point, 4. Polar circle, 338, 343. Pole and polars, 41, 90, 174. w.r.t. system of conies, 301-2, 304-5, 322. Poncelet, 2, 65, 123, 171, 233, '320,
352
(ex. 94).
Self-conjugate triangle, 91, no, ni. Serenus, 65. Similar ranges, 211, 228. Solid Geometry, practical, 51. Stationary points, 59. Steiner, 123, 152, 321 (ex. 141), 343, 350. Sturm, 299, 301.
point, 4. Principle of Continuity, 2-4, 87. Duality, 14, 65, 171, 199. Projection, analytical treatment, 34, 76, 84. and involution, 291. axis of, 30, 66. conical, 14, 65, 86. horizontal, 60. of angles, 69, 74. of conic into circle, 125. of pencil of conies, 126. of two points into u, w', 125.
Power of a
Tangential coordinates, 65, 199. Taylor, 88, 306, 307. Trace, 53. Transformation, 14, 27. Trial and Error constructions, 232. Triangles, circumscribing a conic, 332-3,
336. 339inscribed in a conic, 332. self-conjugate to a conic, 335-6. Tschirnhausen, 171.
orthogonal, 30. validity of imaginary, 28, 77-8. vertex of, 66. Projective ranges and pencils, 218-9.
Projector, 5t.
Vanishing line, 66-8, 100, 104. Vanishing point, 69. V.P., 51.
Von
Wallis, 19.
Glasgow:
tki NTED
CO. LTD.
MACMILLAN* AND
CO.'S
Works on Trigonometry
Trigonometry for Beginners.
B.A.
By
J.
B. Lock,
M.A., and
J.
M. Child,
Globe 8vo.
2s. 6d.
Trigonometry for Beginners as far as the Solution of Triangles. By J. B. Lock, M. A. Globe 8vo. -23. 6d. KEY. Crown 8vo. 6s. 6d. Trigonometry for Beginners. 2s. 6d. KEY. Crown 8vo.
By Isaac Todhukter,
8s. 6d.
F.R.S.
Pott 8vo.
The Trigonometry
2s. 6d.
of
One Angle.
By H.
S.
By
J. B.
Lock, M.A.
Globe Svo.
Elementary Trigonometry.
B.A.
S.
R. Knight,
Globe Svo.
43. 6d.
KEY.
By
J.
Crown
Elementary Trigonometry.
B. Lock,
M.A.
Globe 8vo.
4s. 6d.
KEY. Crown
Svo.
Ss. 6d.
Higher Trigonometry.
By
J. B.
Lock, M.A.
Globe Svo.
J. B.
4s.
6d.
By
Lock, M.A.
Com-
One Vol.
Globe Svo.
7s. 6d.
Plane Trigonometry.
Part
I.
By
II.
Prof.
2s. 6d.
H.
S.
Carslaw, Sc.D.
4s. 6d.
Crown
8vo.
2s. Cd.
Part
Complete.
The Elements
and
C. Davison,
By Rawdon Lbvbtt, M.A., of Plane Trigonometry. M.A. Globe Svo. In two Parts. 3s. 6d. each.
I.
5s.
KEY.
By
Svo.
I.
5s.
Spherical Trigonometry for the Use of Colleges and Schools. By I. Todhuntbr, F.R.S. Revised by J. G. Leathbm, M.A. Crown
Svo.
7s.
6d.
By W. J. M'Clelland, Treatise on Spherical Trigonometry. M.A., and T. Preston, M.A. Crown Svo. Ss. 6d., or, Part I. To the End
of Solution of Triangles.
4s. 6d.
Part
II.
5s.
The Elements
of Plane
By
J. C.
Snowball, M.A.
Crown
CO.,
LTD.
MACMILLAN AND
CO.'S
By
T. J. I'a
Introduction to the Theory of Fourier's Series and Integrals, and the Mathematical Theory of the Condaction of Heat. By Prof. H. S. 14s. net. 8vo. Carslaw, M.A.
The Theory
ment.
of Determinants in the Historical Order of DevelopPart I. General Determinants up to 1841. Part II. Special Determinants up to 1841. By Thomas MuiR, LL.D. Svo. 17s.net. of Quaternions.
A Manual
By
C. J. Joly,
M. A.
A.
Svo.
lOs. net.
By
Prof.
Gray and
Prof.
G.
B.
4s. net.
By
Sir
A. G. Grebnhill, F.R.S.
By
A. R.
Forsyth, F.U.S.
By
Prof. Jamics
M. Page, M.A.,
By
Prof.
George A. Gibson,
Crown
Svo.
7b. 6d.
By
Prof.
Crown
Svo.
.3s.
6d.
Differential
By
Sir A. G.
Greenhill, F.R.S.
Crown
Svo.
6d.
The
Differential
and
6d.
Integral
Calculus.
By
P.
A.
Lambert.
Crown
Svo.
7s.
for
Beginners.
By Joseph Edwards,.
M.A.
The
CO.,
LTD.